RationalDMIS User Manual

- 1 -
WELCOME TO RATIONALDMIS................................................................................................................. 1

SOFTWARE AUTHORIZATION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 2

RATIONALDMIS HELP BASIC INFORMATION ........................................................................................... 4

HELP - KEYBOARD CONVENTIONS ...................................................... 4

HELP - MOUSE OPERATION .......................................................... 6
HELP - SOFTWARE INTERFACE......................................................... 8

INSTALLING RATIONALDMIS .................................................................................................................. 10

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 10

RATIONALDMIS INSTALLATION ...................................................... 11
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE LOCK ..................................................... 12

RATIONALDMIS QUICK USE GUIDE OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 13

RATIONALDMIS QUICK USE GUIDE ........................................................................................................ 14

RationalDMIS Interface .................................................................................................................. 14

Running RationalDMIS ................................................................................................................... 15
Adding a new user .......................................................................................................................... 16

QUICK USE GUIDE - MACHINE MODELS ................................................................................................ 17

Creating a Machine Model ............................................................................................................. 17

Loading a Machine Model .............................................................................................................. 20
QUICK USE GUIDE - SENSORS ....................................................... 21
Creating a new sensor .................................................................................................................... 21
Custom Stylus ................................................................................................................................. 24
Creating new sensor angles............................................................................................................ 27
Calibrating a sensor ........................................................................................................................ 32
QUICK USE GUIDE – COORDINATE SYSTEMS .............................................. 34
Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System ...................................................................................................... 34
Using Create Coordinate System .................................................................................................... 36
Moving a coordinate system .......................................................................................................... 39
Rotating a coordinate system ......................................................................................................... 41
QUICK USE GUIDE – FEATURE MEASUREMENT ............................................ 44
Intelligent Measurement ................................................................................................................ 44
Measuring a point feature.............................................................................................................. 46
Measuring 2D features ................................................................................................................... 47
Measuring 3D features ................................................................................................................... 49
QUICK USE GUIDE - FEATURE CONSTRUCTIONS ............................................ 51
Using Best-fit construction ............................................................................................................. 51
Using intersect construction ........................................................................................................... 54
QUICK USE GUIDE - TOLERANCE ...................................................... 57
Using distance tolerance ................................................................................................................ 57
Using diameter tolerance ............................................................................................................... 60
QUICK USE GUIDE - REPORTING ...................................................... 63

- 2 -
 QUICK USE GUIDE - DMIS PROGRAMMING .............................................. 67
Create a simple DMIS program ...................................................................................................... 67
Opening a DMIS Program ............................................................................................................... 73
Running a DMIS program ............................................................................................................... 74
Stopping a running DMIS program ................................................................................................. 75

INTRODUCTION TO THE MAIN MENU AREA ......................................................................................... 76

MAIN MENU - NEW ............................................................. 77

MAIN MENU - OPEN SOLUTION ...................................................... 78
MAIN MENU - SAVE SOLUTION ...................................................... 79
MAIN MENU - SAVE SOLUTION AS…… ................................................. 80
MAIN MENU - SAVE AS OLD VERSION SOLUTION ........................................... 81
MAIN MENU - IMPORT DATA FROM SOLUTION ............................................ 82
MAIN MENU - IMPORT CAD ........................................................ 83
MAIN MENU - EXPORT CAD ........................................................ 86
MAIN MENU - IMPORT ........................................................... 88
MAIN MENU - EXPORT............................................................ 90
MAIN MENU - OPTIONS ........................................................... 91
Options - Load Machine Model ...................................................................................................... 92
Options - Create Machine Model.................................................................................................... 93
Options - Application Setup ............................................................................................................ 95
Options -Import Application Setup ............................................................................................... 172
Options -Export Application Setup................................................................................................ 173
Options-Keyboard Input Mapping ................................................................................................ 174
MAIN MENU-WINDOW .......................................................... 175
Main Menu-Window-Switch Viewer and Data Window .............................................................. 176
Main Menu-Window-Restore Default Window Position .............................................................. 177
Main Menu-Window-Data Window............................................................................................. 178
Main Menu-Window-Operation Window .................................................................................... 179
Main Menu-Window-Status Bar .................................................................................................. 180
Main Menu-Window-Shortcut Window ....................................................................................... 181
Main Menu-Window-Data Window Shortcut .............................................................................. 183
Main Menu-Window-Drag Bin ..................................................................................................... 184
MAIN MENU-HELP ............................................................. 185
Main Menu-Help-Show Help ........................................................................................................ 186
Main Menu-Help-Show Assistant ................................................................................................. 187
Main Menu-Help-Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer ............................................................. 190
Main Menu-Help-Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer .......................................................... 191
Main Menu-Help-Show Sensor Calib History Viewer ................................................................... 192
Main Menu-Help-Show App Log Viewer ...................................................................................... 193
Main Menu-Help-Support Tools ................................................................................................... 194
Main Menu-Help-Check for Update.............................................................................................. 197
Main Menu-Help-About RationalDMIS ........................................................................................ 198
MAIN MENU-MANAGE RECENT SOLUTIONS ............................................. 200

- 3 -
GRAPHICS AREA ................................................................................................................................... 202

GRAPHICS VIEW ............................................................... 203

Graphics View - View Selector ...................................................................................................... 205
Graphics View - View Mode selector ............................................................................................ 208
Graphics View - Zoom Window .................................................................................................... 210
Graphics View - View All .............................................................................................................. 211
Graphics View - View Rotation Mode........................................................................................... 212
Graphics View - Display Settings .................................................................................................. 213
Graphics View - Color Settings ..................................................................................................... 217
Graphics View - Auto Function Settings ....................................................................................... 218
Graphics View - Remove ............................................................................................................... 221
Graphics View – Pick Option Toolbar............................................................................................ 222
DMIS EDITOR VIEW ............................................................ 243
DMIS Editor - File Options ............................................................................................................ 244
DMIS Editor - Edit Options ............................................................................................................ 246
DMIS Editor - Search and Replace ................................................................................................ 247
DMIS Editor - Bookmarks.............................................................................................................. 248
DMIS Editor - Formatting Options ................................................................................................ 250
DMIS Editor - To Program ............................................................................................................. 252
DMIS Editor – Layout .................................................................................................................... 253
DMIS Editor – Remove Continuition ............................................................................................. 254
OUTPUT VIEW ................................................................ 255
Output - Set Default Save Path ..................................................................................................... 256
Output - Output Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 258
Output – Main Output Window ................................................................................................... 261
Output - Excel Output Window .................................................................................................... 264
Output - Output Setup Pane ......................................................................................................... 265
Output - Various Output Forms Samples ...................................................................................... 294
GRAPHICAL REPORT VIEW......................................................... 300
Graphical Report - Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 301
Graphical Report - Main Window................................................................................................. 305
Graphical Report - Graphical Report Setup .................................................................................. 311
FORM ERROR REPORT ........................................................... 318
Form Error Report - Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 319
Form Error Report - Main Window ............................................................................................... 327

DOUBLE DATABASE .............................................................................................................................. 330

FEATURE DATABASE ............................................................. 332

Feature Database - Drag & Drop of Nominal Features and Actual Features ................................ 333
Feature Database - Point Cloud .................................................................................................... 334
Feature Database - Feature Selection........................................................................................... 338
Feature Database - Rename Feature Label .................................................................................. 339
Feature Database - Feature Properties ......................................................................................... 340
Feature Database - Parent Node Right Click Menu ...................................................................... 343

- 4 -
 Feature Database – Feature Label Right Click Menu .................................................................... 345
Feature Database - Plane Point Generation ................................................................................. 349
Feature Database - Circle Point Generation ................................................................................. 351
Feature Database - Arc Point Generation ..................................................................................... 353
Feature Database - Sphere Point Generation ............................................................................... 355
Feature Database – Cylinder Point Generation ............................................................................ 358
Feature Database - Cone Point Generation .................................................................................. 361
Feature Database - Curve Point Generation ................................................................................. 363
Feature Database - CAD Model Right Click Menu ........................................................................ 364
Feature Database - Feature Drag and Drop ................................................................................. 367
Feature Database - Parallel plane ................................................................................................ 369
COORDINATE DATABASE .......................................................... 370
Coordinate System Database - Coordinate System Node ............................................................. 371
Coordinate System Database – Save Coordinate System ............................................................. 374
Coordinate System Database - DAT Node ..................................................................................... 376
Coordinate System Database - Iteration Node ............................................................................. 377
Coordinate System Database - CRD Frame Node ......................................................................... 378
Coordinate System Database - Coordinate System Drag & Drop Summary ................................. 379
SENSOR DATABASE ............................................................. 381
Sensor Database - Sensor Node ................................................................................................... 382
Sensor Database - Calibration Gage Node ................................................................................... 387
Sensor Database - Rotary Table Node .......................................................................................... 389
Sensor Database - Sensor Change Node....................................................................................... 391
Sensor Database – Drag & Drop ................................................................................................... 394
VARIABLE DATABASE ............................................................ 395
Variable Database - Create New Variable .................................................................................... 397
Variable Database - Delete Variable............................................................................................. 400
Variable Database - Edit Existing Variable values ........................................................................ 401
Variable Database - Drag & Drop ................................................................................................. 402
Variable Database - DMIS Macro ................................................................................................. 404
Variable Database - External Resources ....................................................................................... 422
PROGRAM DATABASE ............................................................ 423
Program Database - DMIS Program Window............................................................................... 424
Program Database - DMIS Program Window Drag & Drop.......................................................... 426
Program Database - DMIS Execution Toolbar .............................................................................. 427
Program Database - DMIS Function Toolbar ................................................................................ 431
CUSTOM VIEW DATABASE ......................................................... 440
Custom View Database - Project Views........................................................................................ 441
Custom View Database - Graphical Reports View ........................................................................ 442
Custom View Database - Form Error Report View ....................................................................... 444
Custom View Database - Dimension Label Report View .............................................................. 447
Custom View Database - Display Layers....................................................................................... 448

FUNCTION OPERATION AREA .............................................................................................................. 450

MEASUREMENT OPERATIONS PANEL .................................................. 451

- 5 -
 Measurement - Intelligent Measurement..................................................................................... 452
Measurement - Measurement of Two-dimensional Features ....................................................... 453
Measurement - Measurement of Three-dimensional Features .................................................... 455
Measurement - Measurement Operations Panel ......................................................................... 457
CONSTRUCT .................................................................. 490
Construct - Construction Result Window ...................................................................................... 491
Construct - Middle Feature ........................................................................................................... 493
Construct - Parallel Feature .......................................................................................................... 496
Construct - Intersection Feature ................................................................................................... 498
Construct - Perpendicular Feature ................................................................................................ 501
Construct - Tangent Feature ......................................................................................................... 504
Construct - Project Feature ........................................................................................................... 508
Construct - Move Feature ............................................................................................................. 515
Construct - Best Fit Feature .......................................................................................................... 518
Construct - Mirror Feature ............................................................................................................ 520
Construct - Bound Feature ............................................................................................................ 522
Construct – Construct From Cone ................................................................................................. 523
Construct - Extreme Point Feature ................................................................................................ 524
Construct - Three Point Offset Plane ............................................................................................ 525
Construct - Transfer Feature ......................................................................................................... 526
Construct - Multiple Point Offset Plane ........................................................................................ 528
Construct - Copy Create Feature ................................................................................................... 529
Construct - Sweep Construct ........................................................................................................ 532
Construct – COG ........................................................................................................................... 533
Construct - Break Curve ................................................................................................................ 534
Construct - Cylindrical unfold ....................................................................................................... 535
SENSOR ..................................................................... 536
Sensor - Create New Probe ........................................................................................................... 538
Sensor - Create Calibration Gage ................................................................................................. 542
Sensor - Sensor Calibration ........................................................................................................... 545
Sensor - Sensor Utility .................................................................................................................. 548
Sensor - Sensor Calibration Shortcuts ........................................................................................... 549
Sensor - Probe creation and assembly .......................................................................................... 551
Sensor – Add Additional Sensor Angles ........................................................................................ 556
Sensor - Create New Sensor Angles and calibrate ........................................................................ 558
Sensor - Sensor Mount Calibration ............................................................................................... 560
Sensors – Additional Operations................................................................................................... 561
TOLERANCE .................................................................. 563
Tolerance - Distance ..................................................................................................................... 564
Tolerance - Angle .......................................................................................................................... 566
Tolerance - Angularity .................................................................................................................. 569
Tolerance - Perpendicularity ......................................................................................................... 572
Tolerance - Parallelism .................................................................................................................. 574
Tolerance - Position ...................................................................................................................... 576

- 6 -
 Tolerance - Cylindricity ................................................................................................................. 580
Tolerance - Coordinate Tolerance ................................................................................................. 582
Tolerance - Concentricity .............................................................................................................. 584
Tolerance - Circular Runout .......................................................................................................... 587
Tolerance - Total Runout ............................................................................................................... 589
Tolerance - Circularity ................................................................................................................... 591
Tolerance – Cone Angle ................................................................................................................ 593
Tolerance - Diameter .................................................................................................................... 595
Tolerance - Radius ........................................................................................................................ 597
Tolerance - Flatness ...................................................................................................................... 599
Tolerance - Straightness ............................................................................................................... 601
Tolerance - Point Profile ................................................................................................................ 603
Tolerance - Curve Profile .............................................................................................................. 605
Tolerance - Surface Profile ............................................................................................................ 609
Tolerance - Symmetry ................................................................................................................... 612
Tolerance - Width ......................................................................................................................... 614
Tolerance - User Difined ................................................................................................................ 616
Tolerance - Composite .................................................................................................................. 617
COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................ 618
Coordinate System - Coordinate Translation ................................................................................ 619
Coordinate System - Coordinate Rotation .................................................................................... 621
Coordinate System - Create Crd .................................................................................................... 623
Coordinate system - Offset Coordinate ......................................................................................... 626
Coordinate System - Three Points Best-fit Coordinate System ...................................................... 628
Coordinate System - Two Point Offset Alignment Coordinate System .......................................... 630
Coordinate System - Six Point Best-fit Coordinate System ............................................................ 633
Coordinate System - Multi Point Best-fit Coordinate System ........................................................ 636
Coordinate System - Merge Coordinate System ........................................................................... 640
Coordinate System - 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation Method II .............................................. 642
Coordinate System - Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation ..................................................... 645
Coordinate System - CAD Aligned Coordinate System .................................................................. 648
Coordinate System - Iterative Alignment ...................................................................................... 650
Coordinate System - Coordinate System Mapping ....................................................................... 652

STATUS PANEL ...................................................................................................................................... 654

STATUS PANEL - POSITION CONTROL .................................................. 655

Status Panel - Position Control - Absolute Position ....................................................................... 656
Status Panel - Position Control - Relative Position ........................................................................ 657
Status Panel - Position Control - Vector Move .............................................................................. 658
Status Panel - Position Control – Virtual Joystick ......................................................................... 659
Status Panel - Position Control - Dragger ..................................................................................... 661
Status Panel - Position Control - Soft Home.................................................................................. 663
STATUS PANEL-DIGITAL READ OUT (DRO) .............................................. 664
STATUS PANEL - SETTINGS ......................................................... 665
STATUS PANEL - FEATURE WATCH .................................................... 666

- 7 -
 STATUS PANEL - MEASURE......................................................... 667
STATUS PANEL - SYSTEM MESSAGE ................................................... 669

STATUS BAR .......................................................................................................................................... 670

APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................................. 671

- 8 -
Welcome to RationalDMIS

EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC

P.O. BOX 53331
Bellevue, WA 98015-3331
E-mail： [email protected]
Website：www.external-array.com

- 1 -
 Software Authorization Description

Software No.
A serial number is laser etched on the software lock. This serial number will beginning with the
letters “AKE” followed by numbers. The same value is also on the external packaging of the
software lock.

License
RationalDMIS software sold by EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC is furnished with a formal
software license secured with an official seal of EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC.

Software licensing will be provided by EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC.

Users will be required to contact EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC to obtain software
authorization.

About Window

As shown above, this software is licensed to “External-Array Software(CNC).15.C6336”,

EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC still owns the software lock. Namely, it indicates that the
software lock is only used as CNC version. Distributors are not entitled to sell the software lock
to users.

- 2 -
About Window shown below.

The above screen-shot indicates that the software is authorized to “Delta Air lines, Inc.”
“Version type: CNC machine” indicates the software is licensed for a DCC CMM.

- 3 -
RationalDMIS Help Basic Information

Help - Keyboard Conventions

Name of key position

Every key has its own name on the keyboard. It may be character “A” or a word “Enter”.
Generally, these will be printed on the key.

Enter: return key

For example: If you press key Enter in DMIS editor, it will accept input of the line and move the
cursor to the next line.
For example: There is a popup window displayed. When the focus is on the OK button, pressing
Enter on the keyboard is equal to clicking OK with the mouse.

Tab: tabulator key

You can move the cursor ahead by a series of spaces or to move to the next entry of button in a
displayed window.
For example: A popup window is displayed with “OK” and “Cancel” options. When current focus
is at “OK”, pressing Tab will select “Cancel”
For example: An edit box has been filled in a feature definition. If you press Tab, the cursor will
automatically jump to the next edit box.

Delete: delete key to delete selected input

For example: If you type an error while editing DMIS in the DMIS edit view, you can select that
incorrect text and delete it by pressing the Delete key.

BackSpace: backspace delete key

Every time you press the Backspace key, the character to the left cursor position will be deleted.
For example: You intend to enter 0.015. However, you wrote 0.014. The cursor will be located at
the end of the 0.014. Pressing the Backspace key will delete the “4” allowing you to enter the
desired character.

Home: beginning-of-line key

If you press the Home key once, the cursor will move to the beginning of the current line.
End: end-of-line key
If you press the key once, the cursor will move to the end of current line.

[PageUp] or [PgUp]: Pressing the page up key will display the contents of the previous page.
[PageDown] or [PgDn]: Pressing the page down key will display the contents of the next page.

Number key a line of number keys arranged on the keyboard according to provisions, which can
be used to input numeric characters.

- 4 -
Hotkey & shortcut key Can be assigned to replace mouse clicks.
For example: To quickly switch to the RationalDMIS output interface, you can press “F5”;
For example: to quickly switch to RationalDMIS sensor build panel, you can press “Ctrl+F2”.

- 5 -
Help - Mouse Operation

RationalDMIS can make use of a 2-button mouse, 3-button mouse, wheeled mouse and spherical
mouse.

Most mouses available today have at least left and right buttons;
The Left button is called main button, or Left Click and most mouse operations are completed
through a click or double click of the main left button. The Right button is called a Right Click or
auxiliary button, which is mainly used for software specific shortcuts or tasks.

Many operations in RationalDMIS can be completed through mouse operation.

Basic operations include point, click, double click, drag, drag and drop, and right click.

Point
Moving the mouse pointer to an object.
For example: To select a certain feature, the mouse pointer must be over the label of that
feature.

Click
Quickly pressing and releasing a mouse button.
A single click is generally used to select an object.
For example: To input information in an edit box, you would first need to click in the edit box to
activate it.

Double click
Quickly pressing and releasing the mouse button for two consecutive times.
Double click is generally used to with the left mouse button to open a document or similar
operations.
For example: To view the properties of a feature named PT1, you would need to double click the
label for PT1.

Drag
Pressing the left mouse button on an object while moving the mouse to specified position.
For example: To output a feature CIR1, you would need to left click the label for CIR1 and drag it
to output view.

Drag and drop

Pressing the left mouse button on an object while moving the mouse to specified position then
releasing the left mouse button to “drop” the object.
For example: To output a feature CIR1, you would need to left click the label for CIR1 and drag it
to output view then release the left button over the output view.

- 6 -
Right click
Quickly pressing and releasing right mouse button.
A right click is generally used to open a shortcut menu related to operation.
For example: To use an automatic measurement function of CIR1, you would need to right click
on the label for CIR1 and release right mouse button. A related context menu will pop up to allow
selection of automatic measurement functions.

- 7 -
Help - Software Interface

RationalDMIS has a graphical user interface with the following interface objects.

Text-box
Used for manual input of data. In many cases, an object can be dropped into the text-box using
drag & drop.
For example:

Drop-down menu
Where many options are available, a drop down menu will contain those options. A left click on
the small arrow on the right will display the options for selection. Left click on the desired option
to select it.

List box
In some cases, objects may be displayed in a list box. A single object can be selected with a left
click. Multiple objects may be selected using either CTRL+left click or SHIFT+left click. In some
cases the list box may accept the drag and drop of objects to it, or from the list box.

Slider
You can move the position of the grab handle of the slider to alter values within a range.

Button
There is generally text on button to display its function. A left click on the button to will activate
the function, such as “Accept” button.

- 8 -
Check box
The description of a check box selection item is generally written beside it. Check boxes are either
checked or not checked. You can change the checked/not checked state by clicking on the small
box.

Tree
A tree can be made up of multiple items stored under different nodes, similar to leaves contained
in a branch. A node can be collapsed or expanded with a left click of the “+” beside the node.
In some cases, you may be able to drag and drop items to and/or from the tree nodes.

Right click menu

You can right click on some items to display a right click context menu. Functions can then be
selected from the menu by clicking on the desired function in the menu.

- 9 -
Installing RationalDMIS

System Requirements

Operating system:
Windows 7 is recommended, Windows 8 and Windows 10 operating systems can be used.
It is recommended that all operating system patches are applied and operational before installing
RationalDMIS.

Minimum hardware requirement:

Processor at least a 1GHz dual-core processor
RAM at least 2GB DDR memory
Graphics card an independent graphics card with at least 1G ram, 1280x800 min resolution
Display 1280X800 minimum resolution
Hard drive a minimum of 20.4GB with a revolution speed of at least 7200RPM
CD-ROM for installing software
Mouse three-button wheel mouse recommended
Keyboard 104-standard keyboard
USB port one avalable USB port
PCI slot will vary depending on external measurement hardware
COM port will vary depending on external measurement hardware

Note: please use a computer power supply with good voltage stabilization to prevent unstable
current from causing failure of the software lock.

- 10 -
RationalDMIS Installation

Please confirm the system requirements are met before installing RationalDMIS.

IMPORTANT: do NOT install the USB dongle before installing RationalDMIS software

Installation procedure:
 Close all other applications
 Insert the RationalDMIS installation CD in the CD Drive.
 Click RationalDMIS-Setup file to begin installation.
 Click “Agree” to accept software license agreement
Input: user name, company name and serial number
 Destination folder: If the default path is not selected, you can select or enter a new
path and installation folder. Click “OK”.
 Click “Install” to complete installation.
 If the system prompts “restart computer”, please restart.

- 11 -
Installing the Software Lock

You must install a dongle, which is also called software lock to run RationalDMIS.

When the software lock dongle is inserted into a USB port, the operating system should
automatically identify new hardware and install the appropriate drivers:

Prompt 1: found new hardware

Prompt 2: determine new hardware type

Prompt 3: your new hardware is installed and ready to use.

When the system prompts “Your new hardware is installed and ready to use.” you can then start
RationalDMIS.

Note: Do not shut down the computer during the installation of the software lock.

Note: If the software lock is inserted in another USB port that has not been previously used, the
operating system will identify the hardware as new and install the drivers. This process is normal
and will not harm anything.

Note: Do not remove the USB software lock from the computer while RationalDMIS is running.
RationalDMIS will encounter an error and shut down, possibly risking data.

- 12 -
RationalDMIS Quick Use Guide Overview

This Quick Use Guide can help you to quickly establish operational concepts for RationalDMIS and
quickly understand the RationalDMIS operating environment.
This Quick Use Guide is intended to enable users to quickly master the basic operation of
software. It is not intended to cover all details of RationalDMIS.

Quick Use Guide covers the following topics:

RationalDMIS interface
Running RationalDMIS

Adding a new user

Creating a machine model

Loading a machine model

Creating a new sensor

Creating new sensor angles
Creating a sensor calibration gage
Sensor calibration

Intelligent measurement
Measurement of point features
Measurement of 2D features
Measurement of 3D features

The use of best-fit constructions

The use of intersect constructions

The use of distance tolerances

The use of diameter tolerances

Creating a simple output report

Creating a simple DMIS program

Open a DMIS program
Running a DMIS program
Stopping a DMIS program

- 13 -
RationalDMIS Quick Use Guide

RationalDMIS Interface

RationalDMIS software has no complicated popup windows.

Tool-tips are available by placing the mouse pointer over certain icons to describe the function of
the icon.

The Graphical Toolbar changes when the interface displays different views such as the graphical
view, DMIS editor, output report view, graphical report view, etc. Every time you switch to a
different interface view of the Graphical/DMIS/Output Window, the functions of the toolbar will
be updated automatically to reflect the tools appropriate to that view.

The Double Database area is used to store data results of measurement, construct and tolerance
evaluation.

The Operations toolbar displays different operation panels depending on the selection made. For
example, in the above view, the construction icon is selected in the operations toolbar and the
construction operation panel is shown. The construction operation panels allows access to
numerous feature construction operations.

The Status Window can display current status information of the machine such as the current
probe location in the DRO.

- 14 -
Running RationalDMIS

To run RationalDMIS software double click RationalDMIS icon in the desktop.

When running RationalDMIS for the 1st time, numerous items will have to be configured.
You will be presented with a screen similar to the one shown below.

You will see that a blank graphics screen along with some sensor build tools are all that is
displayed when 1st starting RationalDMIS.
We will walk through the creation of a machine model and creation of sensors later in this guide.

If you are online, and the machine needs to return to zero (home), a home icon will

automatically appear on the top right corner of the RationalDMIS software interface. You can
click on the home icon to make the machine move to its home position in the case of a DCC
measuring machine, or allow you to move the machine to its home position with a manual
measuring machine

- 15 -
Adding a new user

A log-in window will appear when RationalDMIS is started. The window allows users to log-in or
create a new user log-in if desired.

Enter a new user account name in the New User text-box, then click “Add New User”.
A password setup window will be displayed.

You will need access to the software serial number, which can be obtained from the original
RationalDMIS installation CD.
Enter the software serial number in the Admin Password text-box.

If you always want RationalDMIS to log-in as the newly created user, check on Enable ‘Always
log-in using this user’ for new user. If you selected ‘Always log-in as this user’, RationalDMIS will
no longer display the log-in dialog on start-up.
If at some point you wish the log-in dialog to be displayed when RationalDMIS starts, hold down
the CTRL key while RationalDMIS is starting.

The following settings are saved per user:

a complete separate registry;
a finished configuration directory;
a complete sensor directory.

- 16 -
Quick Use Guide - Machine Models

Creating a Machine Model

RationalDMIS allows you to create machine models in order to make full use of the RationalDMIS
graphical environment.
If you are using RationalDMIS online, the graphical environment provides synchronized
movement of both the graphical machine and the actual machine for quicker and easier use.

If you are using RationalDMIS offline, the axis of the graphical machine will show how the actual
machine will move when on-line, greatly reducing errors related to offline programming.

Left click on Create Machine Model under Options in the main menu.

- 17 -
A Machine Model Creation Utility dialog will appear.

Enter a name for the machine model in the Machine Name text-box.

Left click on the machine model type that best represents your measuring machine.

- 18 -
Your machine has a designated home position. Move the mouse to the ball that represents your
machine’s home position and click to select.

Set the direction of the axis the same as your online measurement machine by clicking one of the

four icons that represent the axis directions. You can also double

click on the coordinate graphic that you placed on the ball to scroll through the axis directions
one by one.

Set the X, Y, and Z travels of the machine model to match your online machine.
Units MUST be entered in mm.

RationalDMIS selects “Set current machine model” as the default. This will immediately make the
machine model just created the active machine model.

Click “Make Model” to create the new machine model.

If you can’t see the machine model, you can zoom in and zoom out in the graphical area by
scrolling the middle mouse wheel. If you do not have a mouse with a wheel, you can still zoom in
and out by holding down CTRL+SHIFT+Left mouse button while moving the mouse up or down.

- 19 -
Loading a Machine Model

You can load previously created machine models by left clicking on Load Machine Model under
Options in the main menu.

The Open Machine Model File dialog box will appear.

Machine models are by default stored in the \RationalDMIS\MachineModel directory.
Left click on a machine model to select it. If “Preview” is enabled a graphical preview of the
machine model will be displayed on the right of the Open dialog box.
Left click the Open button to load the machine model into RationalDMIS.

- 20 -
Quick Use Guide - Sensors
Creating a new sensor

To measure with a sensor, one will have to be created.

Left click the sensor icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open sensor operations toolbar

Select “Build Sensor” to enter the sensor creation interface.

There will be a list of probe heads displayed. Double click on the sensor that is on your machine
to select it and activate it. Once activated, the list will expand to only show the items that can fit
on the previously activated probe head.

- 21 -
The installed items will be listed in the sensor data tree.

Once the probe head has been added you can continue to add a touch probe, module and stylus.

The “View All” button on the bottom row will display the current sensor build
The “Reset” button will remove the entire sensor build.

- 22 -
The “Delete” button will delete the last component added.
The “Add” button will add the currently selected component to the senor build (you can also
double click on the component to add it).
The “Custom” button will present an interface for building you own custom probe heads,
extensions, sensors etc. See Custom Stylus in this guide.
A default name has been created for the sensor. You may use this name or enter another name in
the Sensor Label text-box.

If necessary, the sensor direction can be updated to match the sensor direction on your
measuring machine (i.e. horizontal arm cmms can have different mount orientations) through the
sensor mount selections. The direction is indicated by the red light on the probe head.

The “Add Sensor” and “Add/Activate” on the bottom right of the sensor panel will become
enabled when the sensor build is complete. If you click “Add Sensor”, the newly constructed
sensor will be added to the sensor database, but will not be selected as active. If you click
“Add/Activate”, then the sensor will be added to the sensor database and made the active
sensor.

The new sensor is added to the sensor database and can be seen in the sensor database tab of
the dual database area. The small graphic of a sensor before the sensor label name indicates the
active sensor.

- 23 -
Custom Stylus

If you have a stylus that is not shown in the list of available styli in RationalDMIS, you can create a
custom stylus.
Left click the “Custom” button at the bottom of the sensor build interface to begin creating a
custom sensor.

- 24 -
Options presented in the custom build interface are:
Video Probe: Construct a custom CCD probe
HiScanner: Construct a laser probe head
Stick stylus: Construct a hard probe
Probe head: Construct probe head
Extension: Construct a custom extension
Stylus: Construct a custom stylus

Delete: Deletes the selected custom constructed object

OK: Closes the custom interface

- 25 -
To create a custom stylus, left click on the Stylus button to display the following window:

Label: Enter a name for the custom stylus

Style: Select either a conventional sphere stylus, or a disc stylus.

Thread: Select the thread size. Standard size is M2

Diam: Enter the shank (body) diameter of stylus
Length: Enter the length of the stylus from the “shoulder” before the threads to the center of the
ball.
Ball Diam: Enter the diameter of the sphere or disc.
After entering all the required parameters, left click the “Accept” button to complete the custom
stylus creation.

The newly constructed stylus will be saved under the corresponding type. Stylus in this case.

Left click on the “OK” button to close the custom sensor interface.

The newly created custom sensor will now appear in the list of available styli in the sensor build
interface.

- 26 -
Creating new sensor angles

After constructing a sensor, if the probe head supports it, you can use many different sensor
angles to complete measurement. If the selected sensor cannot rotate, the new sensor panel will
not be active.

While there are many methods to define sensor angles in RationalDMIS, we will show a simple
method in this guide.
Left click the sensor icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open sensor operations toolbar

Left click on the “New Sensor” icon to open the new sensor panel.

The New Sensor panel will add new positions to the currently active sensor. Make sure the sensor
you want to add angles to the active sensor. The parent sensor label will be shown in the Parent
Label text-box.

You can now create the angle custom the angle you require.
A new position can be created by entering the A and B angles int the Angle text-boxes.

If the particular A and B values are not known, you can use the corresponding sliders to select the

- 27 -
desired A and B angles while previewing the results in the graphics view.

The A and B angle increments are established by the capabilities of the probe head. If you wish to
change the A and B angles by larger increments, select the desired increment from the Increment
drop down.

Multiple sensors can automatically be created based on the selected increment by left clicking on
the “Make A Angles” or the “Make B Angles” buttons. If the “Make A Angles” button is clicked, all
of the A angles based on the current increment for the currently active B position will
automatically be created. Likewise, if the “Make B Angles” button is clicked, all of the B angles
based on the current increment for the currently active A position will automatically be created.

- 28 -
RationalDMIS will create a default sensor name based on the root sensor name and the selected
angle. You can use this default name or enter a name of your choice in the New Sensor text-box.

The “Add Sensor” and “Add/Activate” on the bottom right of the sensor panel will become
enabled when the sensor angle selection is complete. If you click “Add Sensor”, the newly
constructed sensor will be added to the sensor database, but will not be selected as active. If you
click “Add/Activate”, then the sensor will be added to the sensor database and made the active
sensor.

- 29 -
Creating a Sensor Calibration Gage

The sensor must be calibrated or verified before it is used for actual measurement!
The main purpose of sensor calibration is to evaluate the actual diameter of the sensor to
provide accurate sensor radius compensation during feature measurement. A sensor that has not
been calibrated cannot provide accurate compensation, therefore cannot provide accurate
measurement results.

Left click the sensor icon in the operations toolbar

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the sensor operations toolbar.

Left click on the sensor calibration icon to enter the sensor calibration panel.

Left click the “Calibration gage definition” tab.

Enter a name for the calibration gage to be created

Enter the diameter of calibration gage sphere (certifications with the value are normally provided
by the calibration standard manufacturer)

- 30 -
If known, enter the coordinate location of the center of the sphere in the XYZ text-boxes.

Enter 0 or any number if the location is not known. Make sure in the sensor
calibration panel is checked for the 1st calibration to allow automatic updating of sphere location
XYZ data.

Enter the IJK vector information of the calibration sphere (0,0,1 would be straight up and down)

The “Offset Dist” is a value up from the sphere’s horizon. This value helps avoid calibration errors
in automatically generated points when the stylus is extremely short or has an extremely small
diameter.
Input specified offset distance: (1 or 2mm is a good number)

The stem diameter is the diameter of the post as it attaches to the sphere.
This value is used in the automatic generation of points to avoid collisions with the stem.
Enter the diameter of the stem where it joins the sphere. (This value does not need to be
extremely accurate.)

Left click the “Define” button to generate the new calibration sphere.

- 31 -
Calibrating a sensor

The sensor must be calibrated or verified before it is used for actual measurement!

Within RationalDMIS a sensor can be calibrated using a few different methods. For the purpose
of this Quick Use Guide, we will show a common method of sensor calibration.

If the sensor database is not shown in the double database, right click on one of the two
tabs in the dual database and left click on the Sensor icon.

Hint: you can use “Alt+S” shortcut key to switch to sensor data window.

There will be a Sphere gage tree node in the sensor database. If the Sphere Gage node is not
expanded, left click on the + icon to expand the node. You should see the name of the sphere
gage.
If you don’t see a name for a sphere gage, refer to “Creating a Sensor Calibration Gage” in this
Quick Use Guide.
To the right of the calibration sphere name, you can left click to open the drop down and select
the number of points to be measured during the sensor calibration process.

A guick and simple method to calibrate a single sensor is to left click on the name of the sensor to
be calibrated, then drag it to the sphere gage and drop it onto the sphere gage name.

- 32 -
The machine will show a prompt in order for you to move the sensor to a safe location before
beginning the calibration process. Left click on ”continue” to allow the sensor calibration process
to begin.

If the sensor has been satisfactorily calibrated, the name of the sensor will turn green in sensor
database.

You can also select multiple sensors and drag and drop them to label of standard sphere for
calibration of multiple sensors.

- 33 -
Quick Use Guide – Coordinate Systems
Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System

The Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System in RationalDMIS is a very quick and simple way to create a
complete coordinate system.
This method involves direct measurement of the part through simple graphical prompts to guide
you through the measurement and coordinate system creation process.

Left click on the coordinate system icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open the Coordinate System operations toolbar.

Left click the Quick 3-2-1 icon on the toolbar.

The quick 3-2-1 coordinate system panel will prompt you to measure points in approximate
locations in a defined sequence.
The Red ball in the graphics is used to indicate the next point to be measured. Move to that
approximate location on the physical part and take a point on the part. After the measurement of
the point, the previously RED ball will now turn GREEN indicating that point has been measured.
The next point will turn red indicating the approximate location on your part to measure the next
point until 6 points are measured.

After the 6 points are measured, the Preview, AddCrd and Add/Active buttons will become
enabled. You can left click on the “Preview” button to preview the coordinate system in the main
graphics.

A left click on the “Add Crd” button, will add the coordinate system to the coordinate system
database but will not activate the coordinate system as the current coordinate system in use.

- 34 -
If you want to use the coordinate system immediately, left click the “Add/Active Crd” button and
the coordinate system will then be added to the coordinate system database and will become the
current active coordinate system.
If a wrong point is measured during the creation on the Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system, you can

left click “Delete Point” to delete the last point. The graphics will show that point as
not measured. If you wish to delete all points, let click on the “Delete All” icon.

Additional options
If the coordinate system axes are pointing in the wrong direction for your needs, a left click on
the coordinate trihedron graphics will rotate the coordinate system. Each time the graphic is
clicked the coordinate system will rotate.

When creating the Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system we only measured points. We did not measure
features such as a plane or line. If you wish to create features from the measured points, check
the “Create features” check box.

- 35 -
Using Create Coordinate System

The Create Coordinate System tool in RationalDMIS allows the use of previously measured
features and/or previously constructed features to create a coordinate system.

Left click on the coordinate system icon in the operations toolbar.

You can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open the Coordinate System operations toolbar.

Left click the “Create Crd” icon in the Coordinate System operations toolbar.

You will be presented with the Create Crd panel.

On the left hand side of the Create Crd panel, the current active coordinate system will be
displayed in the Cur Crd text-box. A default label name for the new coordinate system will be in
the New Crd text-box. This default label name can be changed by entering a new name.

In the middle of the Create Crd panel there will be 3 empty text-boxes arranged vertically with a

icon beside them. These 3 text-boxes are the 3 features that will be used to create your

coordinate system. Feature label names can be entered or can be dragged from the Feature
database.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

- 36 -
In the Feature database, left click on the desired feature label to activate it then drag it over one
of the 3 feature boxes in the Create Crd panel. A small “+” will appear indicating that the
feature can be dropped.

Once the feature has dropped, the icon will change into an icon that represents the feature

type and the text in the text-box will become the feature label text.
There are two column's in the Feature database, an ACT column and a Nom column.
If the feature has been pulled from the ACT column, the feature icon will be RED, indicating that

the feature is an ACTUAL measured or constructed feature.

If the feature has been pulled from the NOM column, the feature icon will be BLUE, indicating

that the feature is an NOMINAL value of a measured or constructed feature.

Most of the time you will want to use an ACTual feature. If the feature icon is BLUE showing a
NOMinal, simply left click on the blue icon and it will turn red and use the ACTual data rather
than the nominal.

IMPORTANT
As with any coordinate system, there is a primary feature, secondary feature, tertiary feature or to
put it another way, a level, an align and a datum, or another way, plane , line, point. They all
mean the same thing.
The 3 text-boxes in the center of the Create Crd panel behave in the same manner with the top
taking the primary or level feature, the middle box taking the secondary or align feature and the
lower box taking the tertiary or origin feature.

After dragging and dropping all the features, the new coordinate system will be automatically
highlighted and flashed in the graphical area as a preview.
A left click on the “Preview” button will show the preview in the graphical view.

A left click on the “Add Crd” button, will add the coordinate system to the coordinate system
database but will not activate the coordinate system as the current coordinate system in use.
If you want to use the coordinate system immediately, left click the “Add/Active Crd” button and
the coordinate system will then be added to the coordinate system database and will become the
current active coordinate system.
Other options:

- 37 -
The direction of the primary level feature can be changed by clicking the drop-down list to the
left of the top primary feature text-box and select a different direction.

The same can be done for the direction of the secondary alignment feature in the 2nd box.
The third box is an origin and therefore cannot change direction.

On the right side on the Create Crd panel there are 3 boxes that will say X value of this feature, or
Y value of this feature, or Z value of this feature.
These three boxes can accept both numerical input or dropped features. They are used to
represent the location value of that feature in the new coordinate system.

As shown in the view above we have used three different methods for input.
The first box contains numerical input indicating the Z value (in this example case) of the primary
feature in the new coordinate.
The second box contains a feature label name, indicating the Y coordinate value of the feature in
the new coordinate system.
The third box contains a mathematical expression formula, indicating the feature X value of the
feature under new coordinate system.
Please note: the above is an example only. Different settings/values will be required in real use.

If value has been input, we will see the icon turn from to .

- 38 -
Moving a coordinate system

The function of moving or translating a coordinate system will move the coordinate system origin
by the feature or value described in the axis text-box.

Left click on the coordinate system icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open the Coordinate System operations toolbar.

Left click on the Translate Crd icon in the operations toolbar.

You will be presented with the Translate Crd panel.

On the left hand side of the Translate Crd panel, the current active coordinate system will be
displayed in the From Crd text-box. If you want to change the From Crd, you can drag a previously
created coordinate system from the Coordinate database and drop it into the From Crd text-box.
A default label name for the new coordinate system will be in the New Crd text-box. This default
label name can be changed by entering a new name.

The 3 text-boxes is the center of the Translate Crd box contain the values of the X,Y and Z axis in
the new coordinate system. The boxes can accept numerical values, drag and drop of features or
formulas or variables.

- 39 -
There could be 1 of 3 different icons to the immediate left of the axes text-boxes:

indicates there is no input or an illegal input;

indicates a legal value input or actual variable input;

indicates a feature input. Red indicates ACTual feature and blue indicates NOMinal feature.

After the desired data is in the text-boxes, the new coordinate system will be automatically
highlighted and flashed in the graphical area as a preview.
Note: not all text-boxes are required to have a value.
A left click on the “Preview” button will show the preview in the graphical view.

A left click on the “Add Crd” button, will add the coordinate system to the coordinate system
database but will not activate the coordinate system as the current coordinate system in use.
If you want to use the coordinate system immediately, left click the “Add/Active Crd” button and
the coordinate system will then be added to the coordinate system database and will become the
current active coordinate system.

- 40 -
Rotating a coordinate system

A coordinate system can be rotated around an axis by a value or to a feature.

Left click on the coordinate system icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open the Coordinate System operations toolbar.

Left click on the Rotate Crd icon in the operations toolbar.

You will be presented with the Rotate Crd panel.

On the left hand side of the Rotate Crd panel, the current active coordinate system will be
displayed in the From Crd text-box. If you want to change the From Crd, you can drag a previously
created coordinate system from the Coordinate database and drop it into the From Crd text-box.
A default label name for the new coordinate system will be in the New Crd text-box. This default
label name can be changed by entering a new name.

The Rotation axis is a drop-down list to select the desired axis.

A value can be entered in the Rotation angle text-box.
In the example below, the coordinate system will rotate around the Z axis by 45°.

- 41 -
Features can also be used in place of specific axis.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

In the Feature database, left click on the desired feature label to activate it then drag it over one
of the Rotation axis drop down in the Rotate Crd panel. A small “+” will appear indicating that
the feature can be dropped. In the example below, the new coordinate system will rotate around
the feature LN1 by 45°.

After the appropriate entries have been made in the Rotate Crd panel, the new coordinate
system will be automatically highlighted and flashed in the graphical area as a preview.
A left click on the “Preview” button will show the preview in the graphical view.

A left click on the “Add Crd” button, will add the coordinate system to the coordinate system
database but will not activate the coordinate system as the current coordinate system in use.
If you want to use the coordinate system immediately, left click the “Add/Active Crd” button and
the coordinate system will then be added to the coordinate system database and will become the
current active coordinate system.

Additional options
On the lower left of the Rotate Crd panel, there is a “Using feature” check box.

When using feature is checked, the interface will change slightly. A line reducible feature can be
dropped from the Feature database into the empty text-box on the right, directly below the Align
direction drop down. The new coordinate system will use the line reducible feature as the
coordinate system rotation feature.

- 42 -
- 43 -
Quick Use Guide – Feature Measurement
Intelligent Measurement

RationalDMIS includes Intelligent Measurement to automatically determine the type of feature

being measured. At anytime before completing the measurement the operator can override the
RationalDMIS feature choice with a left click of any feature measurement icon.
Intelligent measurement cannot be used when running programs or running automated
measurement.

Left click on the feature measurement in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Feature measurement operations toolbar.

The Intelligent measurement icon is a toggle on/off icon.

Click the “Intelligent measurement” icon in measurement operations toolbar. When intelligent
measurement is active the intelligent measurement icon will be highlighted.

Click the intelligent measurement icon again and it will be closed automatically. The intelligent
measurement icon will no longer be highlighted indicating intelligent measurement is not active.

When intelligent measurement is activate, the feature measurement box is used in the
measurement process. As points are measured, RationalDMIS will analyze the point location and
vector to determine the type of feature being measured. Once RationDMIS has determined the
type of feature being measured, the icon for that feature will become active.

The feature type decision made by RationalDMIS can be overridden to your own choice by simply
left clicking on the desired feature type.

If you want to delete single point, you can click “Delete” icon

If you want to delete all points, you can click “Delete all” icon

When the minimum number of points for the feature type have been measured, the green
measurement completion check-mark will become enabled.

- 44 -
 .
Left click on the green check-mark to complete the measurement. The newly measured feature
will be added to the Feature database under the node for the feature type.

- 45 -
Measuring a point feature

A measured point requires 6 parameters: X,Y,Z and I,J,K.

These parameters will be obtained automatically during a point measurement.
Left click on the feature measurement icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Feature measurement operations toolbar.

Left click on the “Point” icon in the measurement operations toolbar.

The Measurement operations panel will be displayed.

To measure a point, drive the machine to touch the part at the desired location. As the part is
touched a point will be measured and the counter will increase by one.

To delete a single point left, click the “Delete” icon.

To delete all of the points, left click the “Delete All” icon.

When the desired points have been measured, left click on the green check-mark to complete the
measurement and add the feature to the feature database.

- 46 -
Measuring 2D features

The measurement of 2D features utilizes a work plane in order to correctly create the feature. In
the vast majority of cases, RationalDMIS will determine the required work plane automatically.
2D features in RationalDMIS include:
⚫ Line
⚫ Circle
⚫ Arc
⚫ Oval
⚫ Slot
⚫ Curve

Left click on the feature measurement icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Feature measurement operations toolbar.

Left click on the desired 2D feature icon in the measurement operations toolbar.

The Measurement operations panel will be displayed with the feature type highlighted in the
operations toolbar and a default label name in the Label text-box.

The default label name can be used, or you can enter a new label name for the feature in the

Label text-box. .
To the right of the Label text-box, you will see a button, for now this button should read “Work
plane”.
To the right of the button is a drop down list containing work planes.
If “Closest CRD Plane” is selected, then RationalDMIS will automatically determine which work
plane is suitable for the 2D feature being measured.

- 47 -
The RationalDMIS selected work plane can be overridden by selecting an alternate work plane
from the drop down or by dropping a planar feature from the Feature database.

Move the machine and take a point on the part at the desired location. The point will be added to
the point counter and will be visible in the histogram in the center of the measurement panel.

To delete a single point left, click the “Delete” icon.

To delete all of the points, left click the “Delete All” icon.

When the desired points have been measured, left click on the green check-mark to complete the
measurement and add the feature to the feature database.

- 48 -
Measuring 3D features

The measurement of 3D features does not require a work plane. The work plane drop down be
automatically disabled.

3D features in RationalDMIS include:

⚫ Plane
⚫ Sphere
⚫ Cylinder
⚫ Cone
⚫ Circular ring
⚫ Curved surface

Left click on the feature measurement icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Feature measurement operations toolbar.

Left click on the desired 3D feature icon in the measurement operations toolbar.

The Measurement operations panel will be displayed with the feature type highlighted in the
operations toolbar and a default label name in the Label text-box.

The default label name can be used, or you can enter a new label name for the feature in the

Label text-box. .

Move the machine and take a point on the part at the desired location. The point will be added to
the point counter and will be visible in the histogram in the center of the measurement panel.

- 49 -
To delete a single point left, click the “Delete” icon.

To delete all of the points, left click the “Delete All” icon.

When the desired points have been measured, left click on the green check-mark to complete the
measurement and add the feature to the feature database.

- 50 -
Quick Use Guide - Feature Constructions
Using Best-fit construction

While RationalDMIS has a vast array of feature construction tools, we will be discussing the Best
Fit construction here.

Left click on the Feature Construction icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F4 to quickly open the Feature Constructions operations toolbar.

Left click on the “Best-fit” icon in the feature constructions operations toolbar.

The best fit construction operations panel will be displayed.

On the right side of the operations panel there is a feature input list. This list houses the features
to be used in the best-fit construction. To add features to the list, drag and drop a feature or
multiple features from the Feature database.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the

- 51 -
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

Red indicates an actual measured or constructed feature.

Blue indicates a nominal feature.
A feature can be quickly switched from nominal to actual by clicking on the blue icon. The icon
will turn red, and the actual data will be used.

To delete a feature in the feature input list, click on the list to make it active, then left click either
the Delete or Delete All buttons.
Delete will delete the currently highlighted feature in the feature input list.
Delete All will delete all features in the feature input list.

RationalDMIS will automatically calculate all possible constructions using the features in list on
the right side of the panel.

To rename a result feature, double click the left mouse button a little slower than a normal
double click. The feature name can then be edited and a new name entered. After entering a new
name, click anywhere outside of the new feature name to accept it.

To preview a newly constructed feature, left click on the desired feature to select it and left click
the “Preview” button.

- 52 -
To add a newly constructed feature, left click on the desired feature to select it and left click the
“Add Result” button. The feature will be constructed and added to the Feature database.

- 53 -
Using intersect construction

While RationalDMIS has a vast array of feature construction tools, we will be discussing the
intersect construction here.
The interface and operation of the intersect construction is quite similar to a number of
construction types.

Left click on the Feature Construction icon in the operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F4 to quickly open the Feature Constructions operations toolbar.

Left click on the “intersect” icon in the feature constructions operations toolbar.

The intersect construction operations panel will be displayed.

To create an intersection construction, drag a feature from the Feature database and drop it onto
the Feature1 drop down. Do the same for Feature2.

The result feature list will show the possible intersect constructions based on Feature1 and
Feature2.

- 54 -
Hint: When the feature can be dropped, a small “+” symbol will appear under the mouse.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

Red indicates an actual measured or constructed feature.

A blue icon indicate a feature nominal.

A feature can be quickly switched from nominal to actual by clicking on the blue icon. The icon
will turn red, and the actual data will be used.

To rename a result feature, double click the left mouse button a little slower than a normal
double click. The feature name can then be edited and a new name entered. After entering a new
name, click anywhere outside of the new feature name to accept it.

- 55 -
To preview a newly constructed feature, left click on the desired feature to select it and left click
the “Preview” button.
To add a newly constructed feature, left click on the desired feature to select it and left click the
“Add Result” button. The feature will be constructed and added to the Feature database.
A left click on “Add All” will add all the features shown in the result feature list.

- 56 -
Quick Use Guide - Tolerance
Using distance tolerance

All RationalDMIS tolerance evaluations are standardized and are PTB certified.
We will examine the distance between tolerances in this Quick Use Guide.

Left click on the Tolerance icon in the operations toolbar:

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Feature Constructions operations toolbar.

Left click on the “distance” tolerance icon in the tolerance operation toolbar.

The distance between evaluation panel will be displayed.

On the right side of the distance between panel, you will see 3 text-boxes, “Tol Label”, “FLabel1”,
and “FLabel2”. To evaluate a distance between tolerance, drag and drop one feature from the
Feature database to the “FLabel1” box. Drag and drop another to the “FLabel2” box.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the

- 57 -
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

Red indicates an actual measured or constructed feature.

A blue icon indicates a feature nominal.

A feature can be quickly switched from nominal to actual by clicking on the blue icon. The icon
will turn red, and the actual data will be used.

If “Use evaluated nom dist” is checked on, the “Nominal Distance” text-box will be disabled and
will use feature nominal data to automatically calculate the nominal for the distance tolerance.

To enter your own nominal distance, left click on “Use evaluated nom dist” to un-check it.
The Nominal Distance text-box will be ena ble to allow manual entry of a nominal distance value.

Lower and upper tolerances are entered into the “Low Tol” and “Up Tol” text-boxes. If the “Low
Tol” value is negative, it must be entered as a negative value.

The “Eval Method” drop down allows the selection of evaluation types. Selecting min or max will
give you either the min or max distance evaluation.

For example, the min distance between two circles would be:

The max distance between two circles would be:

- 58 -
Selecting “none” or “average” will show the standard center to center distance.

Below the “Eval Method” is the “Distance Type” drop down list to select the how the distance
evaluation calculates the distance between.

There are 4 distance types, including “X Axis”, “Y Axis”, “Z Axis”, “PT2PT”(meaning point-to-point).
It is very important to select the correct distance type as the results can vary a great deal
between distance types.

The left side of the distance between panel contains the “Actual” text-box and the “Deviation”
text-box. The “Actual” will show the actual calculated distance between evaluation result.
If the result is outside of the tolerances then the out of tolerance result will be shown in the
Deviation text-box. If the result is in tolerance, “In Tol” will be shown in the Deviation text-box.

A left click on the “Preview” button will show the two features in the main graphics view. To
accept the evaluation left click the “Accept” button. Once accepted, the tolerance information is
saved to the Tolerance database.

- 59 -
Using diameter tolerance

All RationalDMIS tolerance evaluations are standardized and are PTB certified.
We will examine the diameter tolerance in this Quick Use Guide.

Left click on the Tolerance icon in the operations toolbar:

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Feature Constructions operations toolbar.

Left click on the “diameter” tolerance icon in the tolerance operation toolbar.

The diameter evaluation panel will be displayed.

Unlike distance between which evaluates two object, diameter is a property of feature.
Hence, the nominal diameter cannot be edited in the tolerance operation panel, but must be
edited in the Feature database.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

Locate the label name of the feature you wish to evaluate and double click on the feature label
name. A feature property pane will be displayed on the opposite dual database panel.

- 60 -
The feature property pane has two columns. The Act column cannot be changed, but the
information in the Nom column can be edited by double clicking on the parameter that needs to
be edited. After entering the specified nominal diameter data, click anywhere outside of the Nom
column to update the value. The newly edited data will be displayed in blue text.

Once a value has changed, the green check-mark icon will become enabled.
Left click on the green check-mark to accept the new nominal values and close the feature
property pane.
The feature with an updated nominal diameter can now be dragged from the feature database
and dropped onto the FLabel text-box on the right side of the panel.

The updated nominal diameter will now be displayed in the Nominal diameter text-box.
Lower and upper tolerances are entered into the “Low Tol” and “Up Tol” text-boxes. If the “Low
Tol” value is negative, it must be entered as a negative value.

- 61 -
If the upper or lower tolerance is not exceeded in the diameter evaluation, “In Tol” will be
displayed in the Deviation text-box on the left side of the panel.

If the tolerances are exceeded, then the out of tolerance value will be displayed in the Deviation
text-box.

To change the tolerance label name, click the Tol Label text-box on the right of the panel and
enter a new label name.

A left click of the “Accept” button will add the evaluated tolerance to the Tolerance database.

- 62 -
Quick Use Guide - Reporting

RationalDMIS can generate a wide variety of data reports.

In this Quick use Guide, we will look at some simple options to quickly generate inspection
reports.

In the upper main tool bar, left click on the Output icon.

Hint: You can use the F5 shortcut keys to quickly switch to the output view.

The graphical display and toolbar will be changed to the output display and toolbar.

If the Feature database is not shown in the dual database, click on the small arrow to the
lower right on the current icon to show a list of available database icons. Left click on the
Features icon to view the Feature database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+F shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Feature database.

To add a feature to the output report, drag the feature from the Feature database and drop it
onto the output report area.

- 63 -
The output parameters can be setup by left clicking on the output setup icon.
A tree will be displayed with numerous output setup options.

To modify the feature output parameters, left click on the Feature Definition node, then left click
on the feature type to be modified. To enable a parameter, left click on the parameter to add a
check-mark. To disable a parameter, left click on the parameter to remove the check-mark.

- 64 -
Once the changes have been made, the next time a feature is dragged from the Feature database,
the reported parameters will be as configured in output setup. When satisfied with the output
parameters, left click the output setup icon again to close the output setup pane.

To output a previously created tolerance, left click on the Tolerance icon in the dual database.

Hint: You can use the Alt+T shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Tolerance database.

Drag and drop the desired tolerance from the Tolerance database to the output report.

To delete an output result, right click the output result and select “Delete” from the popup menu.
To delete multiple outputs, hold down the CTL key and left click on the items to be removed.
When the selection is complete, right click and select Delete from the popup menu.

- 65 -
To preview print report, left click the “print preview” icon in the output toolbar.

To print without a preview click the “print” icon in the output toolbar.
To save the report as either a web page or a PDF file, left click the Save button in the output

toolbar.

- 66 -
Quick Use Guide - DMIS Programming
Create a simple DMIS program

RationalDMIS uses DMIS 5.0 as its internal programming language. With DMIS as a native
language, RationalDMIS can run DMIS programs without a need to translate or import and send
out programs without having to go through an export routine.

There are two methods that can be used to create a DMIS program.
One is to use a text programming development environment to manually write DMIS code, the
other is to “teach” the DMIS program through the RationalDMIS interface.

While RationalDMIS can make extensive use of CAD data within programs, we will not be using
CAD for this particular programming guide. The program to be generated in this section of the
Quick Use Guide makes use of topics already covered so far in this guide. Please refer to them as
necessary.

To begin teaching a program, turn Learn Mode on.

In the top right hand corner of the RationalDMIS interface you will see an icon that looks similar
to two pieces of paper with a red x between them. This is the icon to turn on or off Learn mode.
Left click the teach icon to toggle its modes.

When the arrows are green, we are in learn mode and can begin to teach a program.

Left click on the Program database icon in the dual database area.

Hint: You can use the Alt+P shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Program database.

There is a useful vertical toolbar to assist in DMIS programming in the Program database.

- 67 -
 If the vertical toolbar is not visible, place the mouse cursor over the small arrow
on the left near the top of the Program database. The toolbar will expand
automatically. To lock the vertical toolbar in place, click on the pin at the top of
the toolbar.

Left click on the Mode icon in the vertical toolbar.

There will be three different modes displayed in the popup context menu.
Left click “MODE/MAN”.

When that mode selection occurred, RationalDMIS wrote the code for the MODE/MAN DMIS
statement. As this mode change was the 1st thing recorded in our program, RationalDMIS
automatically created some header code before the MODE/MAN statement. This header can be
user configured before programming. Refer to the Program database section in the User’s Guide.

The MODE/MAN statement has changed the mode to manual allowing the operator to drive the
machine. In this case we will setup a simple 3-2-1 coordinate system in our program.
Measure a plane on the top of the part.
Measure a line on the part. Make the line somewhat parallel to the plane as this line will be used
as the coordinate system alignment feature. Next, measure a point of line on a surface roughly
90° to the just measured line.

- 68 -
 While the measurements have been taking
place, RationalDMIS has been generating the
DMIS code.

Go to the coordinate system menu as use

“Create Crd” to create the coordinate system.
Once satisfied with coordinate system set up,
set the top plane as a clearance plane. A
clearance plane is used to ensure the machine
clears the clearance plane before any other
moves.

In the same manner that MODE/MAN was set,

change the mode to “MODE/PROG,MAN”.
Note: if using a manual machine (not DCC or
CNC), changing modes will have no effect on a
manual machine.

- 69 -
 Continue measuring some additional features
on the part.

With some features measured, tolerance and

output those features.
Once the features have been toleranced, the
program is complete and should contain the
code for both the measurement and
Tolerancing of the features.
To tell RationalDMIS that the program is
complete, add an “ENDFIL” statement to the
end of the program.

At the beginning of the program, a plane, a line and a second line were manually measured. It
would be helpful when running the program to be prompted to measure these features. The
quickest and easiest way to add simple prompts to a DMIS program is to add them manually
through editing the DMIS code.
To edit DMIS code, there will be a horizontal toolbar near the top of the Program database. Left
click the “To Editor” icon.

- 70 -
The DMIS editor will display syntax highlighted code for the program.
To add an empty line to the
program, just like any text editor,
place the cursor where you would
like to insert the text and hit Enter
of the keyboard to an empty line.

In the newly created blank line type “text”

followed by a “/”. When the “/” is entered a
popup auto-complete menu will be displayed.
The auto complete menu contains the DMIS code
words that follow “text/”. Left click on “OPER”
to select it and hit the Enter key on the keyboard.
The selected word “OPER” will be added to your
DMIS code.

After “OPER” add a “,” (comma) and enter some prompt text.

Hit the Enter key to accept the prompt text.

After completing edit, send the program back to the Program database by left clicking the “To
Program” icon in the DMIS editor toolbar.

- 71 -
As an alternate to sending the program to the editor, clicking on the Insert Comment Line icon on
the vertical toolbar will present comment, text/outfil and text/oper. Click on TEXT/OPER to
display a small text-box at the bottom of the DMIS Program database.

To run the program, scroll to the top of program database and left click the gray area between
the “push-pin” and the DMIS line number. This will select that line.
Ensure that the machine is in a safe location and click the “Run” icon.

The program will begin to execute.

- 72 -
Opening a DMIS Program

Opening a DMIS program in RationalDMIS is no different than opening a file in Windows.

DMIS programs have a “.DMI” extension.
The DMIS program should open in the Program database in the dual database area.

Hint: You can use the Alt+P shortcut keys to quickly switch to the Program database.

Left click the “Open” icon in the toolbar at the top of the Program database.

A Windows file open dialog box will be displayed.

Left click on the desired program to select it, then click the “Open” button.

- 73 -
Running a DMIS program

A DMIS program can only be run if a program is loaded and visible in the Program database.

Make sure the Program database is visible.

Select the first line at the top of the program and, click the “Run” icon to run the
program.

- 74 -
Stopping a running DMIS program

Make sure the Program database is visible.

When a DMIS program is running, there is a large red stop sign available to stop the program.
Double click red “STOP” icon to stop program.

Or click the “Stop Immediately” hand icon.

If the program is using DMIS high-level language

at the time it was stopped, the high level language
execution should also be stopped.
When DMIS high level language is running a “Stop
high level language” icon will be present beside
the stop hand in the Program database top toolbar.
Left click the “stop high level language” icon to
stop and clear the high level language.

- 75 -
Introduction to the main menu area

The RationalDMIS main menu includes the following functions: New, Open Solution, Save
Solution, Save Solution As, Import Data From Solution, Import CAD, Export CAD, Import, Export,
Options, Window, Help, Recent Solutions and Exit.

- 76 -
Main Menu - New

Left click “New” to create a new solution.

Hint: you can use shortcut function key “Ctrl+N”

When a new solution is created, RationalDMIS will clear all contents under current the program
and return RationalDMIS to a default status:
Clear all features in the Feature database
Clear all tolerances in the Tolerance database
Clear all defined variables in the Variable database
Clear all custom views in the Custom view database
Clear DMIS program in the DMIS Program database
Clear all output contents in the Output window
Clear contents in DMIS the Edit window
Clear contents of the Form error window
Clear all report windows in the Graphical report window.

- 77 -
Main Menu - Open Solution

Left click “open solution” to open a previously saved solution.

The menu item “Open Solution” is used to open a previously saved solution file.
A solution file can contain the following:
Nominal values and actual values of all the features in the original solution
Any imported CAD models in the original solution
All tolerances in the Tolerance database
All coordinates in the Coordinate database
The DMIS program in the DMIS Program database
All output contents in the output window
Contents in the DMIS edit window
Contents in the Form error window
All report windows in the Graphical report window
All custom views in the Custom view database
Note: Solution files do not contain sensor data. Sensor data will not be touched when opening a
solution.

- 78 -
Main Menu - Save Solution

Left click “Save Solution” to save current solution.

“Save Solution” is used to save current program and to save the RationalDMIS environment
contents including:
Nominal values and actual values of all the features
Any imported CAD models in the original solution
All tolerances in the Tolerance database
All coordinates in the Coordinate database
The DMIS program in the DMIS Program database
All output contents in the output window
Contents in the DMIS edit window
Contents in the Form error window
All report windows in the Graphical report window
All custom views in the Custom view database
Note: Solution files do not contain sensor data. Sensor data will not saved with a solution file.

The “Save Solution” dialog box will appear after clicking “Save Solution”.

Navigate to a location to save the solution, enter a name for the solution and click the “Save”
button.

- 79 -
Main Menu - Save Solution as……

Save Solution as will allow the current open solution to be saved with a different name.
Left click “Save Solution As” to save the current solution.

“Save Solution As” is used to save current program and to save the RationalDMIS environment
contents including:
Nominal values and actual values of all the features
Any imported CAD models in the original solution
All tolerances in the Tolerance database
All coordinates in the Coordinate database
The DMIS program in the DMIS Program database
All output contents in the output window
Contents in the DMIS edit window
Contents in the Form error window
All report windows in the Graphical report window
All custom views in the Custom view database
Note: Solution files do not contain sensor data. Sensor data will not saved with a solution file.
A “Save As” dialog will appear and behaves in the same manner as Save Solution.

- 80 -
Main Menu - Save as old version solution

Click “Save as Old Version Solution” to save current solution:

Move the mouse arrow to “Save as Old Version Solution” to pop up function menu: it makes
saved solution can be opened in older version software.

Save as old version solution will not cover date of original solution, this data inlcudes:
Nominal value and actual value of all features in the solution
Imported CAD model in the solution
All tolerances in tolerance data zone
All coordinates in coodinate data zone
DMIS application of the workpiece in DMIS program data zone
All output content in output window
Content in form error window
All report window in graphic report window
All custom view in custom view data zone

- 81 -
Main Menu - Import Data from Solution

Hover the mouse pointer over “Import Data From Solution” to make a sub-men appear.
The sub menu allows the import of the following from another solution:
Tolerance database
Feature database
Feature database (Load ACT as NOM)
Coordinate database
Variable database
Variable database: allows user to reuse variable data file
DMIS program
NOTE: When importing a database from an existing solution, the imported database will
overwrite the database removing any contents in the current database.

- 82 -
Main Menu - Import CAD

Hover the mouse pointer over “Import CAD” to make a sub-men appear.
The sub menu allows the selection of the import CAD file type.

As defaults, RationalDMIS supports IGES, STEP and DXF

files.
Additionally RationalDMIS offers direct CAD interfaces
with ParaSolid XT, CATIA, UG, ProE, SolidWorks, JT3D,
Inventor3D and SolidEdge. The direct CAD interfaces are
license controlled and should be purchased through your
RationalDMIS distributor.

Select the type of CAD mode file to be imported.

CAD direct interface supports:

Acis : up to 2016 1.0 (SAT & SAB)
CatiaV4 : 4.15 to 4.24
CatiaV5 : R10 to R28 = V5-6R2018
Inventor : 10 to 2018
Parasolid : up to 30
Pro/Eng-Creo : 2000i to WF5, Creo up to 4.0
SolidEdge : 10 to ST10
SolidWorks : 1999 to 2018
UG-NX : 15 to NX 12

- 83 -
 JT(BREP) : up to 10.0

Native CAD translator supports Point import. Points will be input as Point Cloud.

When the CAD format is selected, a file open dialog will appear.

There are four check-boxes at the bottom of the dialog box.

Shape: this is the default which imports all of the CAD 3D data and displays as a solid model
Wire: imports 3D data the same as shape, but displays the wire-frame as well as the 3D model
Outline: imports only the 3D outline of the model.
Create DMIS DID: If a DMIS program is being created, this will create the Device ID DMIS code to
open the file and add that code to the DMIS program as well as import the model.

Left click the “Open” button and the CAD model will begin to load. Some CAD models can take a
while to load. You can check the status of the CAD import in the status bar at the bottom of the
RationalDMIS window.

Can simultaneously select multiple CAD files.

- 84 -
 When the CAD model loading is complete, the CAD
will be shown in the Feature database just like a
regular feature and will be displayed in the graphics
view. The CAD origin will be at the home position of
the machine (MCS).

CATIA import separates menu to CATIA V4 and CATIA V5.

RationalDMIS changes all native CAD format import to dongle control

PMI development: PMI is supported for CATIA 5 import. PMI is dongle controlled option. At the
moment, PMI module reads PMI information from Native CAD datafile, converts it to graphics
display of PMI information, and automatically defines tolerance.
PMI license: PMI is separate license from all other license. In order to import PMI information
from CATIA 5, CATIA 5 license must be installed.

- 85 -
Main Menu - Export CAD

Hover the mouse pointer over “Export CAD” to make a sub-men appear.
The sub menu allows the selection of the import CAD file type.

RationalDMIS supports export of CAD as IGES files.

The sub menu will contain IGES,dxf and Solution.

Selecting Solution will automatically export any CAD that is

in the current solution to a new solution that only contains
CAD.

If IGES is selected, an “Export CAD” dialog will be displayed.

A left click on the ellipses button (button with the 3 dots)

a file save dialog box will be displayed allowing the
selection of a file path and name for the exported CAD
to be saved.

All existing features are automatically arranged under

feature type nodes. An individual feature cannot be
selected/deselected, but the feature type can. The
feature types that are checked will be exported.
If a CAD model has been imported, that CAD model can
be exported.

- 86 -
There are additional CAD export options and functions at the bottom of the Export CAD dialog.
Export nom features: Will export the nominal features from the Feature database as IGES.
Export act features: Will export the actual features from the Feature database as IGES.
Include measurement points: Will export the measured points as a point cloud in the exported
CAD model.
Export measurement points only: Will only export the measured points as a point cloud with
nothing else exported.
Select all: The Select all button will check on all of the feature types listed in the Export Features
tree.
Deselect all: The Deselect all button will deselect all of the feature types in the Export Features
tree.

After setting the desired export parameters, left click on the OK button to export the items into
an IGES CAD file.

DXF output doesn’t include planar feature, but only includes linear feature.

- 87 -
Main Menu - Import

RationalDMIS supports the import/export of sensor data from/to an external file.

Hover the mouse pointer over “Import” to make a sub-men appear.

“Import Sensor Database” will appear as a sub-menu.

When Import Sensor Database is clicked, an Open Sensor Database dialog will appear.
RationalDMIS sensor files have a “.sdata” extension.
Select an existing sensor file in the dialog and click the Open button.

The sensor data will be imported. Any sensors that are present now, but not in the imported data
are kept.

- 88 -
DXF import supports direct feature extraction. DXF import from this option will not display DXF
as CAD. Instead, the features will be extracted during importation such as Circle, Line, and Curve.
And they will be displayed as features in the current coordinate system;

Import feature from DXF filename import window via drop-n-drop from Browser.

From DES
Import GM data file DES files

From Text File

Import feature from text file or csv file. The file should contain only XYZIJK per line or XYZ per line
delimited using either or combined SPCE, COMMA, TAB keys.
The feature imported will be either POINT or CURVE

- 89 -
Main Menu - Export

“Export” includes the export of existing data as sensor data, DML, Q-Das and BCS data.
Hover the mouse pointer over “Export” to make a sub-men appear.

Export sensor database: Saves the current sensor data as a .sdata file.
Export as DML: Export feature data as a DML file with a .xml file extension.
DMIS template command:

DML output from UI also creates these DMIS functional block

Export as Q-Das: Export feature and tolerance data as a Q-Das file.

Export as BCS format: Export as .bcs including x, y, z data of feature measurement points.
Export as AS9102 format: AS9102 is part of the international aerospace quality standard. It
stipulates requirement, range, evaluate and record content of inspection of aerospace initial
workpiece;
Export as C3DF format

- 90 -
Main Menu - Options

“Options” in the main menu include “Load Machine Model”, “Create Machine Model”, “Import
Application Setup”, “Export Application Setup”, “Application Setup” and “Keyboard Input
Mapping”.
Hover the mouse pointer over “Options” to make a sub-men appear.

Load machine model Loads an existing machine model into RationalDMIS

Create machine model Creates a new machine model for RationalDMIS
Application setup Presents numerous configuration options for RationalDMIS
behavior and the RationalDMIS environment.
Import Application Setup Can import application setup information saved by the software
on other computer.
Export Application Setup Can save application setup information on the computer to a file.
Keyboard input mapping Allows the mapping of keyboard keys to RationalDMIS functions to
allow quick navigation or use of a remote wireless keyboard.

- 91 -
Options - Load Machine Model

Import an existing machine model through “Load Machine Model” sub-menu under the
“Options” menu.
Hover the mouse pointer over “Options” to make a sub-men appear, then left click on “Load
Machine Model”.

After clicking “Load Machine Model” an open file dialog will appear. Navigate to the directory
where the machine model is located and left click the Open button.

Previously created machine models will have a .gmm extension (Generic Machine Model).
The gmm file is created when a machine model is created in RationalDMIS.
Before opening the model, it can be previewed by checking the Preview check-box at the bottom
of the file open dialog.

- 92 -
Options - Create Machine Model

The machine model in RationalDMIS is a kinematic model used to move the sensor.
As the machine model carries the sensor, if there is no machine model, there is no graphic of the
senor. There are 9 in-built machine model templates in RationalDMIS to cover a number of
possible machine configurations.

Hover the mouse pointer over “Options” to make a sub-men appear, then left click on “Create
Machine Model”.

The Machine Model Creation Utility dialog will be displayed.

To create a machine model:

Enter a name for the machine
under the top Machine Name
text-box.
Left click on the machine type that
best represents the machine in use.

Define the home point (origin) of

the machine model to match the
home position of the real machine.
Left click on a sphere in 1 of the 8
possible locations to define.

Enter the X,Y,Z machine travels in

mm in their respective text-boxes.

Select the coordinate system

direction to match the real
machine.

When all the machine model requirements are entered or selected, the “Make Model” button
will be enabled. Left click on the Make Model button to create the model and close the dialog.
Cantilever machine model adds left z mounting model; the model name of left mounting model
needs to start with “ZL”;

- 93 -
If you are not able to see the new machine model in the graphics area, zoom in and zoom out of
the graphical area using either the middle mouse wheel or by using Ctrl+Shift+left mouse button.

- 94 -
Options - Application Setup

The behavior and environment of RationalDMIS can be user configured in the Application Setup
sub-menu of the Options menu.
As for modified options in application setup, modified option in red font can come into effect
after “restarting software” and that in black font can come into effect immediately.

Hover the mouse pointer over “Options” to make a sub-men appear, then left click on
“Application Setup”.

Hint: “Ctrl+D” will also go directly to Application Setup.

The Application Setup dialog will be presented.

Left click the Apply button on the lower right if any modifications have been made before going
to another page or exiting Application Setup. Items in RED require a re-start of RationalDMIS.

- 95 -
Application Setup - General Setup - Default Directories

RationalDMIS uses 6 main directories: IGES directory, STEP directory, DMIS directory, Dbase
directory, output directory and blade directory.

With the Application Setup dialog visible, double click on General Setup to present the General
Setup parameters.
Double click on the
item to establish a
default directory for
and left click the
ellipses button (3
dots) to display a file
browser dialog. Select
the desired directory
and left click the OK
button.

Directory Update Option

Persistent: Directory is set by Application Setup, never change
Session Non-Persistent: Directory changes to the last directory that User browsed to. Restart
software will go back to the default directory
Non-Persistent: Directory changes to the last directory that User browsed to event after restart the
software

After the default directories have been satisfactorily modified, left click on either the “Apply”
button or the “OK” button. “Apply” will accept the changes, but leave the Application Setup
dialog open, while “OK” will accept the changes then close the Application Setup dialog.

- 96 -
Application Setup – General Setup - Default Language

RationalDMIS has language options for both “UI Language” and “Output Language” providing the
ability to run the software in one language and generate reports in another language.
Left click to on the arrow on the text to the right of either “UI Language” or “Output Language” to
display and drop down list containing the available languages.

- 97 -
Application Setup – General Setup – Persistent Coordinate.

The default coordinate system in RationalDMIS is MCS (home location). MCS is always available at
anytime in RationalDMIS. A Persistent CRD is another coordinate system can also be made to be
available globally in the same manner as MCS.
If “Yes” is selected for Persistent CRD, then the current coordinate system active at the time of
the next RationalDMIS exit will become a Persistent CRD. The persistent CRD will be present the
next time RationalDMIS is opened and will be selected as the active coordinate system.

Left click to on the arrow on the text to the right of either “Persistent CRD to select either Yes or
No for Persistent CRD.

- 98 -
Application Setup – General Setup – Decimal Places.

The number of decimal places for different values can be user defined in RationalDMIS. Separate
decimal place counts can be set for DMIS GOTO, DMIS PTMEAS, DMIS VECTOR and other DMIS
numbers, Nominal Size, Nominal Location and Property Page values.

Left click on the number to the right of the desired parameter to make the value editable and
change the value to the desired new value.

- 99 -
Application Setup – General Setup – Temporary File Management

During the installation of RationalDMIS, a folder called “Temp” is created to store temporary files
created by RationalDMIS during use. These temporary files are only needed briefly and may not
get deleted. These files can either be manually deleted by a double click on “Double click to clear
files” or RationalDMIS can be set to remove them after a specific time period.

“Temp files folder” shows the location of the temporary folder and cannot be edited.
A left click on the value to the right of “Days to keep temp files” will make that value editable.
Enter a new value to set the number of days to keep the temp files after which RationalDMIS will
automatically delete them.
The temporary files can be deleted with a double click on “Double click to clear files”.
The temporary files can be viewed with a double click on “Double click to view files”.

- 100 -
Application Setup – General Setup – Error Log

This error log is always ON. It records each error into the file when error occurs. The error log
file is ASCII format and open with any text editor.

- 101 -
Application Setup – General Setup –Socket data pack delimiter

A delimiter can be input here as the last character of Socket data:

- 102 -
Application Setup – UI Setup – User Interface

3D Graphics Quality
Left click the arrow on the right side of the 3D Graphics Quality drop-down menu and left click
the desired graphics quality setting.

The graphics quality levels range from None through Level 9. The larger number represents a
better graphics quality. None is the default which is the same as Level 1.

When the 3D graphics quality is set to one, some aliasing can be seen along the CAD model
edges.

- 103 -
When the 3D graphics quality is set to 9, the aliasing is removed.

Increasing graphics quality may negatively impact computer performance. Some experimentation
may be required to obtain the best settings for your CAD and PC.

3D Graphics Background
Left click the arrow on the right side of the 3D Graphics Background drop-down menu and left
click the desired background setting.

The 3D Graphics Background setting is used to control the background appearance of the
graphics area.
There are 3 options:

Single Color: Will show the selected background color as a solid color.

Gradient Color (Fade Up): Will fade up from the selected background color to the gradient color.

- 104 -
Gradient Color (Fade Down): Will fade down from the background color to the gradient color

3D Graphics Transparency Type

Left click the arrow on the right side of the 3D Graphics Transparency Type drop-down menu and
left click the desired blend type.
“Blend” is the default setting, and will use the least resources.

Increasing graphics quality may negatively impact computer performance. Some experimentation
may be required to obtain the best settings for your CAD and PC.

Toolbar Icon Size.

Left click the arrow on the right side of the Toolbar Icon Size drop-down menu and left click either
“Normal Icon” or “Large Icon”.

The large icon setting can be used for extreme high resolution to make the icons more visible, or
to make the icons more visible from a distance.

Allow access Xecute Interface from UI

Left click the arrow on the right side of the Allow access Xecute Interface from UI drop-down
menu and left click either “Yes” or “No”.

- 105 -
If you select “Yes”, is selected, the “Display Xecute” icon will appear on the top right corner
RationalDMIS by the Learn icon.

A left click on the “Display Xecute” will present a message box asking if you want to switch to the
Xecute Interface.

- 106 -
Application Setup – UI Setup - Windows

Sensor Preview
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Sensor Preview drop-down menu and left click either
“Mouse LB” or “None”.

“Mouse LB” indicates that a preview of a sensor

selection will be displayed in the lower portion of
the Sensor database.

Custom View Preview

Left click the arrow on the right side of the Custom
View Preview drop-down menu and left click either
“Mouse LB” or “None”.

- 107 -
 “Mouse LB” indicates that a preview of custom
view selection will be displayed in the lower
portion of the Custom View database.

Auto Expand Sensor Tree

Left click the arrow on the right side of the Auto Expend Sensor Tree drop-down menu and left
click either “Yes” or “No”.

If Yes is selected, a sensor tree parent node will

automatically expand to display the child sensors under
that node.

Coordinate system database Expand/Collapse behavior is controlled by Application Setup

- 108 -
Auto Expand Coordinate system Tree

DMIS summary
Left click the arrow on the right side of the DMIS Summary drop-down menu and left click either
“No” or “After DMIS Run”.

“After DMIS Run” indicates a small summary of features measured and execution time will be
displayed at the lower portion of the Program database.

- 109 -
Show Feature Label Index
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Show Feature Label Index drop-down menu and left
click either “No” or “Yes”.

Selecting “Yes” will show a numerical count of features under each node of the Feature database.

- 110 -
Show Property Deviation Column
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Show Prop Dev Column drop-down menu and left
click either “No” or “Yes”.

A “No” selection will not show Nom vs Act deviation in the feature property pane.

A “Yes” selection will calculate and show the deviation between Nom and Act in the feature
property pane.

- 111 -
Allow DRO Reset zero
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Allow DRO reset zero drop-down menu and left click
either “No” or “Yes”.

A “Yes” will add A0,X0,Y0 and Z0 to the DRO window. A left click on “A0” will automatically set
each axis to zero and create a new coordinate system origin and the center of the sensor.

Clicking on X0, or Y0, or Z0 will make the clicked axis zero and create a new coordinate system will
the selected axis having an origin at the current sensor location.
Acceptable Drop Tyep Tooltip
For those label edit window accepting feature Drag-n-Drop, When mouse pointer is on the
windor for seconds, the Drop hint window is automatically pops up. To disable this Hint window
go to Application Setup->UI Setup. There is a setting for "Acceptable Drop Tyep Tooltip".

- 112 -
- 113 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup - Indicators

There are three permanent indicators in the RationalDMIS environment, Show Logo, Show FPS
indicator and Show CRD indicator.

Show logo
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Show LOGO and select either None or Show Logo.

After selecting Show Logo, the RationalDMIS logo is shown at the upper right corner of the
graphical window.

- 114 -
Show FPS indicator
Left click the arrow on the right side of the Show FPS Indicator drop-down menu and left click
either “None” or “Show FPS”.
NOTE: RationalDMIS must be re-started for the change to take effect.

FPS (frames per second) shows the speed of graphical rendering as

Frames per Second.

Show CRD indicator

Left click the arrow on the right side of the Show FPS indicator drop-down menu and select None,
Lower Left, Lower Right, or Center.

Below the CRD indicator is shown in the lower left of the graphical interface.

- 115 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup - Graphic Report Option

There are numerous configuration options for graphical reports.

Auto arrange
Automatically arranges graphical report data in a selected arrangement. To auto arrange data
check on the Auto arrange check box to check on, then click on the selection to the right of
Arrange Path and select either ellipse or rectangle path from the drop down.

Transparent Windows
Data Windows in the graphical report can be displayed as either opaque or transparent windows
as shown below. To create transparent windows click on the Transparent Windows check-box to
check it on.

Auto create new session

When the Auto arrange is enabled and the graphical report is no longer able to arrange data
windows, the current graphical report will be saved and a new graphical report will be created to
contain the new data windows.
To enable Auto create new session, click on the Auto create new session check-box to check it on.
Note: Auto create new session will only apply if Auto arrange is enabled.

Create report for UI actual

When an actual feature is created through measurement or construction, it will automatically be
added to the graphical report if the graphical report is the active view.
To enable Create report for UI actual, click on the Create report for UI actual check-box to check it
on.

Show solid CAD model

If Show solid CAD model is enabled the current CAD model (if available) will be displayed as a
solid, otherwise when not checked, the CAD will be displayed as a transparent model.
To enable Show solid CAD model, click on the Show solid CAD model actual check-box to check it
on.

- 116 -
Update when feature associate tolerance changes
If “Update when feature associate tolerance changes”, is checked on, any change in the feature
associated tolerance will automatically be updated in the graphical report.
To enable click the Update when feature associate tolerance changes check box to check it on.

Compact Mode for SPC Report

ADd it allows display more report windows in one screen.

- 117 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup - Form Error Option

Like graphical reports, there are a number of ways to control the behavior and appearance of
form error reports.

Auto arrange
Automatically arranges form error report data in a rectangular arrangement. To auto arrange data
check on the Auto arrange check box to check on. Form error report arrange path supports “ellipse
path and rectangle path”;

Max Form Error Window Counts

As a detailed feature analysis could contain thousands of points and thus thousands of data
windows, Max FormErr Window Counts can limit the number of windows to the assigned value.
The default number of data windows is 100. To change this value, double click on the number to
the right of Max FormErr Window Counts to make the value editable, then enter a value.
Use caution when increasing the number of windows above 100 as graphics performance can be
degraded.

Graphic anti-aliasing
Graphic anti-aliasing has a number of setting depending on the graphical requirements.
The settings include “None”, “Line Anti-aliasing”, “Full-screen Anti-aliasing”, and “All” to
correspond to different graphical display requirements within the form error window.
The default option of “None” has the smallest impact on graphics resources.
Increasing graphics quality may negatively impact computer performance. Some experimentation
may be required to obtain the best settings for your CAD and PC.

Display feature/Display Cad model

Both Display feature and Display CAD model select between solid and transparent graphic
representation.

Display tolerance band

Control Form Error window tolerance graphical display

Curve Form Error evaluation

The default form error calculation for Curve is to calculate actual Ptmeas to nominal curve. This
option allows form error evaluation is to calculate nominal Ptmeas to Actual curve. Notice the
source of Drag-n-Drop. Drag nominal when using Act Ptmeas to Nom curve and Drag actual when
using Nom Ptmeas to Actual.

- 118 -
- 119 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup - Blade Option

Graph anti-aliasing options include “none”, “line anti-aliasing”, “full-screen anti-aliasing, “all” to
correspond to different graphical display settings for blade reports.

- 120 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup - Improt Graphics Perspective Setting from
Solution

Application setup adds an option to control whether import graphics perspective setting from
solution;

- 121 -
Application Setup - Graphic Window Setup – 3D Connection

3D Connexion SpaceMouse for graphics viewer

Driver download link for 3DxWare: (This driver is required)
http://www.3dconnexion.com/service/drivers.html

- 122 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Feature Associate Tolerance

Update FAT during DMIS run

Left click on the right side of the Update FAT during DMIS run drop down menu and select “Yes”,
“Delayed” or “No”.
Selecting “Yes” will allow you to change the upper and lower tolerance bands for the feature
associated tolerances and run the DMIS program.
Selecting Delayed” will ask whether or not to update the feature associated tolerances.
Selecting “No” will not update the feature associated tolerances.

Sync output with FAT

Left click on the right side of the Sync Output with FAT drop down menu and select “Yes”, or “No”.
“Yes” will automatically update and output Feature Associated Tolerances.

- 123 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Nominal Features

From CAD update with CAD

Left click on the right side of the From CAD update with CAD drop down menu and select “Yes”,
or “No”.
Selecting “Yes” will move any previously selected nominal features with the CAD model when
setting the model to a new coordinate system.
Selecting “No” will not move the feature nominal data with the CAD model.

Write DMIS when creating Nom from CAD

Left click on the right side of the Write DMIS when creating Nom from CAD drop down menu and
select “Yes”, or “No”.
Selecting “Yes” will create the DMIS code for each feature nominal extracted from the CAD
model.

Hide CAD surface in feature recognition

Left click on the right side of the Hide CAD surface in feature recognition drop down menu and
select “Yes”, or “No”.
Selecting “Yes” will hide the corresponding surface when picking features from CAD.

For coordinate transfer

Left click on the right side of the Hide CAD surface in feature recognition drop down menu and
select “Update”, or “No Update”.
If “Update” is selected the nominal features will move with the CAD model during the Coordinate
Transfer operation.

For coordinate recall

Left click on the right side of the For coordinate recall drop down menu and select “Update”, or
“No Update”. If “Update” is selected the nominal features will move with the CAD model during
the Coordinate Recall operation.

- 124 -
Using CAD to update POINT after MEAS
Left click on the right side of the Hide CAD surface in feature recognition drop down menu and
select “Nominal”, “Actual” or “No”.
Selecting “Nominal” will update to the center of the stylus.
Selecting “Actual” will project the actual point onto the nominal and update.
DMIS template command：

Write DMIS Feat/Gcurve during curve scan path creation

Left click on the right side of the Write DMIS Feat/Gcurve during curve scan path creation drop
down menu and select “Yes” or “No”.
Select “Yes” to re-define the nominal using the generated scan point nominals.
Select “No” to keep using the same curve nominal.

- 125 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Actual Features

Number of actual feature stored: feature data zone supports to save historical measure data;
default number is 10, for computer memory, it requires 4G at least;

Historical measure data record can be drag and drop to output window to output;
Historical measure data of feature can be drag and drop to SPC to make statistics.

When coordinate system moved: actual value of feature will update when coordinate system
moved
When coordinate system activated: actual value of feature will update when coordinate system
activated

- 126 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Construction Features

“Middle line using feature reducible” of construction features is added in application setup.
When using line segment to construct middle line, the option can set whether use middle point
of line to construct result;

Yes: multiple results

No: result will be simplified as 1

- 127 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Feature Display

Left click on the right side of the desired feature display option to change display parameters.

Display point feature as

Dot Vector Sphere type

， ，

Display line feature as

Dot or Vector in the same manner as the Point feature above.

Display Plane feature as

Plane display can be set to Wire

- 128 -
Display arc center line,circle center line,cylinder center line,slot center line,ellipse centerline
No Yes

Display line feature as

Display clear surface
Selecting “Yes” will display the clear surface as a semi-transparent plane.

Highlight geometry when selected feature

If “Yes” is selected, when a feature name is clicked in the Feature Database, the feature will be
highlighted.

- 129 -
Flash feature time
A right click on a feature in the Feature Database shows Flash Feature to flash the graphic of the
feature on and off for a period of time.
The Flash Feature time parameter controls the duration of the flashing on and off. Select “Short”,
“Medium”, or “Long”

Curve display quality

This parameter controls the quality of the displayed curves. The selections are:
default, fine and very fine.
Selecting a fine display will show the curve as smooth, but will take more graphics resources to
do so.

- 130 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Last Feature Setting

In some user interface tools, the last number of features can be selected from a drop down list.
The Last feature setting parameter controls the number of features to display and how to display
them.

Double click on the right side of the “Number of features” drop down to select the number of
features to be displayed from 0-10.
Left click on the right side of the “Actual only” drop down menu and select “Yes” to display only
Actual features or “No” to display both Actual features and Nominal features.

- 131 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - Point Cloud Setting

Left click on the right side of the desired feature setup option to change the parameters.

Can point cloud convert to point without CAD

Allows the creation of points from a point cloud without the use of CAD data.

Point cloud on CAD tolerance:

Allows the setting of a tolerance for the point cloud distance to CAD point data.

- 132 -
Application Setup - Feature Setup - CAD Setup

Left click on the right side of the desired CAD feature setup option to change the parameters.

Rotate CAD at MEAS to make feature visible

Selecting “Yes” will automatically rotate the CAD model to make the feature visible during
program measurement

Min deflection
Any CAD with less than the minimum deflection value will not be read. Increasing the minimum
deflection value can reduce the resources required to import the CAD.

Import IGES invisible entities

If “Yes” is selected, hidden IGES entities will be imported along with the visible entities.

Import CAD with color

If “Enable” is selected, then the CAD will be imported with color and additional layer information.

CAD material
Select “None” to import CAD as made, or select a material type for the CAD to be displayed as.

Meshing method
Select default, fine or very fine. Very fine will display the CAD with higher quality, but may use
extra graphics resources to do so.
Skip duplicate IGES entity
Selecting “No” will not import and duplicate entities found in the CAD data.

- 133 -
Split C0 BSpline curve
Selecting “Yes” will split a C0 BSpline entity in multiple entities.

Decompose shape to face when it is

The STEP file import/export can require a great deal of continuous memory and depending on
the size and complexity can cause the import/export to fail. The decomposition of complex
shapes to faces may ease the memory requirement to enable a successful import/export
operation. Some experimentation may be required to select the best option.

- 134 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Virtual Joystick

If “Yes” is selected, the Virtual Joystick in the Machine Status panel will be able to measure in
off-line mode.
If “No” is selected the Virtual Joystick will only be able to move the virtual machine offline and no
offer any measurement capabilities.

- 135 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Fitting Algorithm

Algo setting change effecting: tolerance support is realized; evaluated feature and reference
feature will be changed according to settings;
Left click to the right of the desired parameter drop down to change the setting.
Algo setting change effective when
Determines when the feature is fit using the selected algorithm.
DMIS template command

$$ Set.AppSetting.AlgoChangeEffect(Output)
$$ Set.AppSetting.AlgoChangeEffect(Meas)

Circle
The fitting algorithm options are Least Square, Min Circumscribed, Max Inscribed or Min Radial
Separation.
NOMR in this case only try to find location. The Radius will be the same as nominal radius

Arc
The fitting algorithm options are Least Square or Min Radial Separation.

Plane
The fitting algorithm options are Least Square, or Min Planar Distance.

- 136 -
Cylinder
Original option for cylinder fitting assumes when more points are taken (200 - 1000), the points
are circularly even distributed. With this option, cylinder fitting algorithm can be optimized for
speed. A case cylinder fitting fails. The pattern of the points is shown below. Application setup
adds a new option to disable quick fit so that the original algorithm will take over, a bit slower

Using even distribution Point quick fit

DMIS template Set CylinderQuickFit On and Off, same function from Application Setup
DMESW/COMAND,'CylndrQuickFit/ON'
DMESW/COMAND,'CylndrQuickFit/OFF'

Curved surface
Options include: fit actual surface and only fit surface point; only fit actual surface will not show
actual surface graph;

Round Slot
Set measurement method of round slot as only collecting points on circle at the 2 ends or at
straight flange;

Nominal PTMEAS for curve compensation

If “Yes” is selected, measured points for a curve will be compensated.
If “No” is selected, no compensation will occur.

Min best-fit iteration

Establishes the MINIMUM iterations to be used to best-fit curve of surface feature.

Bestfit option
Application Setup->Measure Setup adds a new option "Bestfit option", least square is default,
and all previous versions only support this option; a “Chebyshev” is added, and Chebyshev bestfit
is to minimize the absolute maximum error;

- 137 -
Curve Bestfit

Normally, the transform is done on Nominal features. This option is allowing Curve Bestfit to
transform actual Curve.
Curve feature property window Bestfit indicates the method used.
The picture below shows a identical feature bestfit when transfer nom and transfer actual .

- 138 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Quick Measure

Left click to the right of the desired parameter drop down to change the quick measure setting.

Point pick & measure retracts to clear surface

If “Yes” is selected, the probe will retract to the clear surface during a point pick & measure.
Search distance of Find Nom:
Enter a value to define the search distance for a feature during quick measure. If the feature is
not found within the specified distance an error will be generated.

- 139 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Scan Setting

Left click to the right of the desired parameter drop down to change the scan setting.

SP25 Calibration deflection

Enter values to define the minimum and maximum deflection values to be used when calibrating
an SP25 scanning probe with a Pantec controller.

Scan density
Enter a value to define the scan density in distance from point to point.

Curve scan points sequence definition

“1-2-3” will use the define the curve scan direction by using 1st point as the start of the scan,
while the 3rd point defines the end of the scan.
“3-2-1” will use the 1st point as the end of the scan, while the 3rd point defines the start of the
scan.

Desired deflection [0.2-0.7]

Enter a value between 0.2 and 0.7 to define the probe deflection required to begins gathering
point data during an analog scan.

Create GOTO for scan path

Selecting “Yes” will automatically generate GOTO DMIS statements within the scan path during
programming.

- 140 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Point Generation Rule

Left click to the right of the desired parameter drop down to change the point generation setting.

Curve point generation rule

Selecting “Equal Distance” will generate curve points at an equal distance regardless of curve
shape.
Selecting “Fixed Curvature” will generate the points based on amount of curvature. For example
a hairpin will have an increased number of points in the curved portion and fewer points in the
straight line section. “Fixed Curvature” generally gives a more realistic result.

Lead for auto circle

When measuring a circle in automate, it may be desirable to define a pitch for a spiral pattern to
be used in the automated measurement. Enter the value desired for the pitch.

ARC, Curve, Line start clearance/ARC, Curve, Line end clearance

Enter a value for the distance from the start of the feature that the 1st point is to be taken.
Enter a value for the distance from the end of the feature that the last point is to be taken.
The distance between the 1st and last point will determine the point density for the number of
points to be measured.

Automatic adjust approach/retract for inner feature

Selecting “Yes” will automatically adjust the approach and retract distances to allow the inner
feature to be measured. These changes are written to a DMIS program if learn is on.

- 141 -
Application Setup - Measure Setup - Math Option

Left
click to the right of the desired parameter drop down to change the math option setting.

Using unbound features:

If “No” is selected, intersecting features will be used to control the length of the feature during
feature fitting.
If “Yes” is selected, then no additional features will be used to establish the length of the feature
during fitting.

Enable surface point

If “Yes” is selected, the point will NOT automatically be projected to find the nominal from the
surface.
If “No” is selected, the point will automatically be projected to the surface

Pick curve continuity

C0 and G1 curve modes allow picks to control curve continuity.

Edge finder skips inner bound search

If “Yes” is selected, inner searches are not performed when selecting an outside edge point to
provide improved performance.

Point best-fit using nominal vector information

Bestfit using nominal vector algorithm works after initial estimated coordinate system created.
The nominal and actual points pair must be close enough for iteration requirement. The override
distance here is to disable the Using Nominal vector option. During iterative coordinate system
setup, the first menual measurement points usually are far away from the nominal. The point to
point bestfit works better in this case.
DMIS implementation:
dmesw/COMAND,'PtBFOnNom/on'
dmesw/COMAND,'PtBFOnNom/off'
dmesw/COMAND,'PtBFOverRide/20'"

- 142 -
Filter blade overlap measure point
If “Yes” is selected, overlapping points will be filtered out when performing a blade measurement.

Filter blade measure points

Applies the selected filter method to the measured blade points.

Closed curve tolerance

Any value between the curve end and start lower than the entered value will automatically create
a closed curve.

Point project on extrude surface

All points are slightly outside of the theoretical surface when makes the surface tolerance
evaluation. Point projection on to theoretical would fail if there is no extrusion";

Curve formerror probe using

When Actual curve measurement has sufficient points and the resulting curve describes the true
curve well, Compensation on actual produces better result.
When Actual curve has less measurement points and the resulting curve doesn't represent the
true curve, compensation on theoretical produces better result. Default is to use Actual curve,
consistent with all previous versions"

Curve form error projection on endpoint

What it means is that when actual curve points are outside of theoretical curve, the projected
theoretical points are the closest theoretical curve end point. For form error report, this error is
misleading sometimes. The option “No” is to ignore those actual points that can't project onto
the theoretical point"

Nominal curve flatness less than

To control nominal curve 2d/3d property at the time of definition using DMIS command
FEAT/CURVE, PTDATA. The default is 0.01.

- 143 -
Application Setup - Output Setup - UI Output Control

Actual creation
When “Output” is selected the actual measured or constructed feature will automatically be sent
to any open output devices.

Tolerance evaluation
When tolerance evaluation is set to “Output” the current tolerance being evaluated will
automatically be sent to any open output devices.

Remove output when feature is deleted

If “Yes” is selected, when a feature is deleted, it’s corresponding outputs will also be deleted from
any open output devices.

CART|POL output control

The CART/POL settings for reporting can be set by the current system CART/POL status or by the
feature nominal definition.
Selecting “Based on feature” will use the feature nominal definition to determine how to report
the feature regardless of current coordinate being in Cartesian or polar.
Selecting “Based on status” will use the current coordinate system status to determine polar or
Cartesian reporting.

Output Excel using

RationalDMIS can integrate with either Microsoft Office or OpenOffice to implement Excel
spreadsheet reporting.
Note: RationalDMIS will need to be re-started to reflect any changes to this setting.
Output DMIS summary after DMIS program run
If “Yes” is selected, summary of the run start/end and duration, as well as number of features
measured and number of features OTOL will automatically be sent to the report.

- 144 -
Open PDF file after save
If “Yes” is selected, a report saved as a PDF will automatically open the new PDF.

Embed PDF font

The default is “Yes” to enable the current font to be written as an internal part of the PDF to
avoid requiring the end reader to have the same font installed.

Deviation calculated using visible decimal digits

For example, when Yes is set, the following output:

will become below:

Notice that the exact same output changes from Outol to Intol so use it carefully.
VD is at the end of the information description. This VD is Visual Deviation indicating that the
deviiation is calculated using visible numbers.

- 145 -
Application Setup - Solution Setup

Recent solutions
Enter a value to set the number of solutions shown under Recent Solutions in the File menu.

Recent import CADs

Enter a value to set the number of recently imported CAD models shown under Recent in the File
menu.

When file new

When file new can be set to either recall MCS or save all of the coordinate systems in the current
solution.

Auto save Solution

Select “Enable” to automatically save the solution as a temp solution after a user defined period
of time.

Auto save interval:

Set the period of time in minutes between automatic solution saves.

Save CAD model

Select “Yes” to save the CAD model with the auto-saved solution, or No to not save the CAD.
NOTE: Setting Save CAD model to Yes may show a brief period where RationalDMIS is not
responding while performing the CAD save.

- 146 -
Application Setup - DMIS Setup - Start DMIS

Start up DMIS
Click to the right of Start up DMIS to select a DMIS program to run automatically every time
RationalDMIS is started.

- 147 -
Application Setup - DMIS Setup - Compatibility

Click to the right of the parameter to change the compatibility options

DMIS compatibility
DMIS compatibility allows RationalDMIS to be used seamlessly with other DMIS generators.
Select Option 1 to be directly compatibly with programs generated by Virtual DMIS.

SNSDEF Format 1
DMIS compatibility allows RationalDMIS to be used seamlessly with other DMIS generators.
Select Option 1 to be directly compatibly with programs generated by Virtual DMIS.

Apply clear surface in Mode/Prog,Man:

Check on Apply clear surface in Mode/Prog,Man to automatically use the clear surface in
MODE/PROG.

Create PTMEAS with Apprch/Retrct

If “Yes”, then the generated DMIS code will include the Apprch/Retrct settings.
Create MEAS with Clear Surface setting
If “Yes” the clear surface code will be included in the generated DMIS.

Evaluate last Tol/DIAM in Tol/Pos calculation

Check on Evaluate last Tol/DIAM in Tol/Pos calculation to automatically evaluate the diameter for
feature modifiers in position tolerances.

- 148 -
Xtern execution
If set to Reset at DMIS XTERN, each time a DMIS XTERN is called, any other external macro will
not be available without defining the EXTRN again. If “Save in Memory” is set, multiple XTERNs
can be used without having to define more than once.

GOTO/X[YZ]AXIS
There are two settings.
“Incremental” will move from the current location by the values specified in the GOTO/
statement.
“Absolute” will move to the location specified in the GOTO/ statement.

Maximum DMIS character per line

Enter a value to specify the maximum number of characters in a line of DMIS code. If the DMIS
statement is longer than the entered value, the DMIS code will automatically wrap to the next
line.

SNSLCT activates calibration motion parameters

If “Yes” is selected then the speed parameters will be changed to the speed parameters used in
calibration.

Point group measurement DMIS

If “Yes” is selected, multiple point feature definitions can be dropped onto the program to create
a group measurement to encapsulate the measurements in a group.

VECBLD sample points in PROG mode

If set to “DMIS”, the program will continue and use the points defined in the program as vecbuild
sample points.
If set to “USER”, the program will pause to allow the user to measure the vecbuild sample points.

Supports to use DMESW command to set vector build measure point using user/DMIS format
DMESW/COMAND,’VecbldSample/USER’
DMESW/COMAND,’VecbldSample/DMIS’

Planar TOL/ANGLB evaluation

- 149 -
If “Yes” is selected, a work plane can be selected to ensure a 2D evaluation in that work plane.

Internal code for predefined macro when available

If after setup, you should run to drag and drop feature measure point as statement of point
feature. Macro statement will not run every time. It runs in the software to improve efficiency;

Profile tolerance evaluation

A profile tolerance will be evaluated using either the ANSI Y14.5 standard or the ISO1101
standard.

Slot true position evaluation:

A slot can either be evaluated as parallel lines or the center point of the slot.

Construct line by 2 points using macro for nominal

Select “Yes” to automatically include a macro to ensure the resulting line always goes the same
direction.

Obtain Points when coordinate type is POL

Obtain RAH if the current coordinate type is POL

Informess
There are two characteristics for Infomess:
1> PROFS output format becomes
TA(l) = TOL/PROFS, ActValue, AVGDEV, INTOL[OUTOL]

Note: There is a slight difference from DMIS output format. DMIS output format is AVGDEV,
ActValue. But infomess sequence is reversed.
2>When informess is enabled, DMIS generated adds addtional line
No infomess:
OUTPUT/FA(), TA()

- 150 -
 infomess enabled
OUTPUT/F(), T()

OUTPUT/FA(), TA()

Default: No

Tolerance operation panel created DMIS implements Nominal output.

- 151 -
Application Setup - DMIS Setup - DMIS Font

DMIS editor font

Click on the current font name to select a font for the DMIS editor.

DMIS program font

Click on the current font name to select a font for the DMIS Program database in the dual
database.

MEAS/POINT sets DRO in MAN mode

Select either DRO1 or DRO2 to display the radial distance of the probe to the point nominal when
in manual mode.

Generated DMIS automatic remove comment and empty line

Select “Yes” to automatically remove empty comment lines.

High Level Language Windows Line Count

DMIS HLL execution window can set number of lines display. The default is 5 lines. The input
range can be from 5 to 25

- 152 -
Additional Character allowed in DMIS Label

- 153 -
Invalid characters are the following when Additional Characters allowed in DMIS Label
_T(',') _T('=') _T('(') _T(')') _T('/') _T('[') _T(']') _T('\'') _T(':') _T('$') _T(' ') _T('\t')

Generate internal DMIS marco syntax when CALL is generated

Internal DMIS macro with EASI is written out to DMIS program window whenever the
corresponding CALL is generated. It can be controlled by this option. Internal Macro is not
required to be in the DMIS program when CALL is generated. When internal macro is called but it
is not in the DMIS program, the loading of such macro is automatic.

DMIS Statement：ENDFIL
DMIS: close all output devices, same as default before;
“Open output save dialog": output content save window will be pop up automatically to prompt
user to save output report and output panel will be not cleared;
“Unmodify solution”: after this option is configured, the software will consider solution data has
no changes and will not prompt to save when close the software;

It can set Show NG/OK after application running is completed.

The logic for judging OK/NG is:
OK: out of tolerance number of tolerance evaluation is 0;
NG: out of tolerance number of tolerance evaluation is not 0;
If there is no tolerance evaluation in DMIS program, this icon will be not displayed;

- 154 -
If user needs to activate this function, the operation is Application Setup-DMIS setting-Show
NG/OK, select Yes by clicking little arrow at right side.

DMIS Outlinning
Active shows the function of Outliningprogram transfer from the KNeptuenRegUtil to the
program setting. The default is unable.

When Outlining is enabled, there will be a new Icon at the DMIS program window. The Submenu
for this icon has "Enable Outlining", "Collapse All", and "Expand All".
Enable Outlining includes DMIS program logic outlining and user defined Outlining. DMIS
program logic include such as MEAS/ENDMES block, IF/ELSE etc... User defined Outlining is to use
following $$/* and $$*/ keyword
$$/*
......
......
$$*/

- 155 -
Outlining is only supported in the DMIS program mode. It is not supported in Edit mode.
DMIS Execution at the Outlining block will automatically expand the bock and automatically
Collapse after the execution

DMO
SNSCT/OFFSET is not DMIS standard format. It is made to be compatible with WV Infomess
system

- 156 -
Application Setup - Warning Setup - Play Sound

Click on the setting to the right on the parameter to change.

To enable a file open dialog, click on the “ ”
Both Taking Meas point and Zoom target alert offer sound customization.
To make no sound, select “Empty” from the drop-down menu.
To use the default sound select “Sound” from the drop down menu.
To make use of a user WAV file, select WAV File and browse for the desired file in the file open
dialog box.

Speech notification
Selecting “Enable” will allow the use of the current computer voice to provide speech notification
of events.
Selecting “Disable” will disable any speech notification.

Voice Reminder When MEAS

If “Enable” is selected, the current computer voice will state the name of the feature to be
measured when running a program.
Selecting “Disable” will disable voice measurement reminders.

- 157 -
Application Setup - Warning Setup - Warnings

Click on the current setting to the right of the desired parameter to change the warning setting.
Measure with un-calibrated sensor
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Measure without error compensation
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Measure with expired calibrated sensor
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Sensor calibration form error exceeds tolerance
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Incorrect calibration gage location
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.

Incorrect calibration gage size

Enter a value for deviation from the nominal calibration gage size.
If the calibration error exceeds the gage size by more than the specified amount, a warning is
created. Setting for that warning are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an

- 158 -
error which must be addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you
the message but still allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Machine travels out side of error map
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Sensor calibration data valid in
Sensor calibrations can be set to automatically expire after a pre-determined amount of time.
When the time has elapsed, the sensor will be shown in red in the sensor database.
Options for sensor calibration duration are:
4,8,12 hrs
1,2,3,4,5,6,7 days
Always – in which the calibration will not expire.
Update DMIS when rename
Selecting “Always” will automatically rename the corresponding feature in the DMIS program
when a feature has been renamed in the RationalDMIS environment.
Update DMIS when feature is deleted from feature tree
Selecting “Always” will automatically delete the corresponding feature in the DMIS program
when a feature has been deleted in the RationalDMIS environment.

Update DMIS when Tolerance is Rename

Selecting “Always” will automatically update the corresponding Tolerance in the DMIS program
when a Tolerance has been deleted in the RationalDMIS environment.

Update DMIS when Tolerance is deleted from Tolerance tree

Selecting “Always” will automatically delete the corresponding Tolerance sentence in the DMIS
program when a Tolerance has been deleted in the RationalDMIS environment.

MAN POINT measure off target

Enter a value for deviation of the measured point from the nominal point location.
If the measured point location error is greater than than the specified amount, a warning is
created. Setting for that warning are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an
error which must be addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you
the message but still allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Change from MAN to CNC warning
If set to “Prompt”, a prompt dialog will be presented when a running program operation mode is
changing from manual to DCC/CNC.
Probe change warning in DMIS MODE/MAN mode
If set to “Prompt”, a prompt dialog will be presented when a probe change is going to occur in a
program while in manual mode.
Redefine coordinate label
Settings are “Accept” to ignore the message, or “Error” to generate an error which must be
addressed before RationalDMIS can continue, or “Speech notify” to tell you the message but still
allowing RationalDMIS to proceed.
Machine model show RED when out of travel
If “Yes” is selected the machine model will turn to red when it has traveled outside of the
pre-defined axis travels.

- 159 -
Application Setup - 5 Axis Setup

When using a 5 axis probe system such as the Renishaw Revo or the Renishaw PH20, there are
some user defined parameter settings. Click on the setting for the desired parameter to change
the setting.
Create 5-Axis command in
5-axis commands can either be generated in DMIS or I++ formats.

Create probe direction in DMIS using

There are two options to define head position.
Selecting “HEADCS” will keep all head positions relative to the fixed head mount location.
Selecting “PCS” will apply head positions relative to the current coordinate system

PH20 touch angle in degree

Enter a value to establish the probe angle used during 5-axis head touches

Circle points generation

Automatic generation of points for a circle can use different methods.
Selecting “min angle change” will try to keep the head angle at a fixed location and move the
machine to complete the measurement.
Selecting “min travel” will try to keep the machine in a fixed location and use head touches to
measure a circle.

PTMEAS uses current head touch controls I++ command

If “Yes” is selected, then the DMIS will be generated based on the current head touch parameter.
If set to “No”, the current head touch parameters will be ignored and global parameters applied.

- 160 -
HeadCS angle sequence inDMIS
DMIS 5-axis syntax HEADCS angle input sequence option setting. By defalut, RationalDMIS
interprets HEADCS, A, B input angles. Some other software defines HEADCS, B, A. This option is
to allow DMIS program created by other software to be run in RationalDMIS environment.
DMIS syntax affected by this change
GOTO/X,Y,Z, HEADCS, Ang1, Ang2
GOTO/HEADCS, Ang1, Ang2
GOTO/ARC, ... HEADCS, Ang1, Ang2
PTMEAS/CART, X,Y,Z,I,J,K, HEADCS, Ang1, Ang2
SNSLCT/SA(L), HEADCS, Ang1, Ang2
P(Label) = PATH/CURVE, PTDATA, x1, y1, z1, i1, j1, k1, HEADCS, a1, b1
P(Label) = PATH/CURVE, PTDATA, x1, y1, z1, i1, j1, k1, HEADCS, a1, b1, scnvel, s1[, dist, d1]

PH20/Revo2 probe change using

Change I++ probe change format

DMIS command
DMESW/COMAND,'IppProbeChange/Tool.Alignment'
DMESW/COMAND,'IppProbeChange/Tool.A(),Tool.B()'

- 161 -
Application Setup - Probe/Styli Changer

Probe/styli changer
Double click to the right of Probe/Styli changer and select the type of changer that is on your
machine.
RationalDMIS supports four kinds of sensor change systems:
MCR20,
SCR200,
FCR25-L3,
FCR25-L6,
MRS,
Once the selection is made, RationalDMIS will need to be re-started.
Once re-started the changer will be shown in the sensor database.

- 162 -
 If the tool holder needs to be temporarily disabled, right click
the changer label to display a context menu, then click
Disable Toolholder to disable. RationalDMIS will behave as
though there is no toolholder.

This does not require a re-start.

To assign a sensor to a port, drag and drop sensor label name from the list of sensors to the
desired port on the changer.

The rack shown in the graphics will show the contents of the newly assigned port.
The semi-transparent graphic depicts a sensor that is currently out of the rack in use on the
machine.
If you wish to unassign a sensor from a port, right click on the port name and select “Unassign
port”.

There are some additional parameters that can be set in Application setup.

At the end of the change cycle

If “same probe head position” is selected, then the probe will move to the same head orientation
that was used before the sensor change, but will stay near the rack.
If “same ruby position” is selected, the probe will move back to the location at which the sensor
select command was issued.

- 163 -
Rotary table
If the machine has a rotary table, click Yes to enable. No re-start is required.

Left click the Machine Status icon to open the machine status operation
toolbar. An icon depicting a rotary tabled has been added to the toolbar.
Click on the rotary table icon to open the rotary table Operations Panel.

Hint: Use Ctrl+F6 to quickly switch to the status panel.

Enter the table diameter, the table height from the base, the base diameter
and height

Left click the “Make Table” button to create the graphical table.

To calibrate the rotary table,

measure the top plane and
the rotary diameter. Drag &
drop those features into the
Table Calibration boxes and
click the Apply button to
apply the calibration.

Set the table type, coordinate update options, direction, angle type and initial rotation angle and
left click the Apply button to apply those settings.

When the table is created it is added to the sensor database.

- 164 -
Right click on Rotary Table and check on “Enable” to use and “Show” to make the table visible.

Sensor change moves above specified height

If “Yes” is selected the sensor will move above a specified height prior to the change routine to
avoid collisions.
In ‘sensor change moves above specified height’, Z height adds to accuracy allowance tolerance,
tolerance allowable is 50mm; when difference between machine reached position and setup
height is within 50um, the software will consider that the machine is in place and can change
sensor;

Disk stylus calibration:

A disk stylus can be calibrated using either the end face or the equator.

If “End face” is selected, a point at the top of the calibration sphere will be measured at the
bottom of the disk stylus.
If “Equator” is selected, all measured points will be distributed near the equator of the calibration
sphere.

OBTAIN sensor offset from

The default is to Obtain offset from the end of Z. The option is to Obtain sensor offset from the
probe center of rotation;

- 165 -
Application Setup - Prefix Setup

Prefix Setup is added in application setup;

User can custom default prefix of coordinate system, sensor, feature, tolerance and construction
feature

- 166 -
Application Setup - Tolerance Setup

Application Setup→Tolerance Setup, the purpose of setup is creating tolerance for feature; The
older version used feature relevant tolerance to output feature tolerance, this function is for
generating DMIS; when creating feature (UI output control set as output actual generation) while
evaluating tolerance and outputting checked tolerance item. While generating DMIS, tolerance
statements are generating as well;
Tolerance without evaluated uses default tolerance, evaluated tolerance uses related tolerance.

“Drag and drop output” in DMIS toolbar also can output tolerance

- 167 -
When drag and drop feature to output window, hold SHIFT button, output feature will output
tolerance. Generated tolerance statement will output nominal tolerance first, and then output
actual tolerance. This is DMO format requirement of VW;

OUTPUT/F(L), T(L), T(L)...

OUTPUT/FA(L), T(L), T(L) ..

2 line reducibles evaluates angle useing positive direction

To resolve the condition that the evaluating angle theoretical is symmetrical to 90 degrees. Two
lines compute an angle from positive line directions and supplementary angle. The tolerance
evaluation chooses the one closest to the theoretical angle. When YES is selected, the behavior
will change to using two lines positive direction to evaluate angle and no supplementary angle in
consideration"

Enable 2D zero theoretical angle direction checking

For the Tol/Angle: When the theoretical angle is ZERO, the actual angle will not indicate whether
it is +deviation or -deviation.
New setting is added to enable 2d Zero angle direction check"

2 Move the “Planar TOL / ANGLB evaluation to the Tolerance settings;

See the following image, open these two settings, and the theoretical angle must be 0 degree;
select XY / YZ / ZX to calculate the plane;
The angle from LN1 to LN2 is positive and while from LN1 to LN3 is negative;

- 168 -
TOL/CONCEN to be evaluated with material condition
Y14.5 evaluates concentricity always on a RFS basis.
China tolerance standard allows material condition to be applied;
Application Setup->Tolerance Setup adds a new setting "TOL/CONCEN to be evaluated with
material condition” setting as “YES”;

Default tolerance when new solution

By Default, a New Solution will remove all tolerances but to keep the Default tolerance under the
condition of “Keep Default”. The label of this tolerance is from the previous solution. A new
option of "Reset" is added. This is to reset tolerance labels to the default labels

Profile tolerance evaluation

Standard:
Dev = |MaxError| > |MinError||? MaxError:MinError
Intol when MaxError > Lotol and MaxError < Uptol
and MinError > Lotol and MinError < Uptol
Max-Min:
Dev = MaxError * MinError > 0? |MaxError|:|MinError|
Intol when Dev < Uotol

- 169 -
Absolution error.
The absolute error is very close to ISO1101. ISO1101
takes maximum error and multiply it with 2 to become the actual profile. Absolute error is just
the maximum error, without multiply by 2. Absolute error is always positive.
The output sample on the right shows the Y14.5 tolerance on the first line and absolute error on
the second line

DMIS template DMESW/Command to switch Profile evaluation standard

Using characteristic point for DISTB single axis evaluation

IF the setting is YES means to calculate the single distance. It will not be parallel inspection,
directly use of single-axis coordinates for distance calculation;

ANGLB tolerance angle options

- 170 -
DEFALT: is the same method that angleB has always been using
COMPLN: Complementary angle
SUPPLM: Supplementary angle
ESPLEM: Explementary angle
Note: COMPLN angle calculation always calculates acute angle and then find the complementary
angle

Slot is used as point datum

As a datum feature, Slot is using major axis as an axis datum. When Point datum is specified, Slot
center point is applied.

- 171 -
Options -Import Application Setup

Import Application Setup can import saved application setup file, application setup information
of the software will be overwrote.

If check “Ignore ‘Directory’ Settings”, directory information of application setup will not be taken
effect.

- 172 -
Options -Export Application Setup

Export Application Setup can save application setup information of the computer software to a
file.

Input file name, suffix is .xml

- 173 -
Options-Keyboard Input Mapping

Keyboard input mapping can be selected from the Options menu under Keyboard Input Mapping.

Digital keyboard mapping controls with external digital keyboard.

Select option of keyboard input mapping to activate definition window of keyboard mapping.

A left click on Keyboard Input Mapping will present a

mapping window.
The left list contains functions that can be mapped directly
to the keyboard.
The right list shows the available keys to map.
Drag and drop a key value from the right list onto a function
on the left list.
Make sure Enable keyboard mapping is checked on. Press
the OK button to accept the changes and close the window.

Pressing the key or key combination on the keyboard will

now activate the mapped function.

- 174 -
Main Menu-Window

The Window setting is located in the Main menu under Window.

Window functions allow user control of the window locations and display options.

- 175 -
Main Menu-Window-Switch Viewer and Data Window

Left click on the “The Switch viewer and data window” to move the dual database panel to the
opposite side of the screen. Clicking on F11 on the keyboard will accomplish the same.

- 176 -
Main Menu-Window-Restore Default Window Position

To restore window positions to their default location left click Restore default window position
under the Window menu of the Main Menu.

All windows of RationalDMIS will be moved to their default locations. The dual database will be
restored to its default width and both panels in the dual database will be restored to their default
width.

- 177 -
Main Menu-Window-Data Window

To show or to hide the dual database left click on Data Window under the Windows menu of the
main menu. The F12 key on the keyboard will perform the same operation.

- 178 -
Main Menu-Window-Operation Window

To show or to hide the operation window left click on Operation Window under the Windows
menu of the main menu. Pressing CTRL + F11 simultaneously will perform the same operation.

- 179 -
Main Menu-Window-Status Bar

To show or to hide the status bar at the bottom of the screen left click on Status Bar under the
Windows menu of the main menu.

- 180 -
Main Menu-Window-Shortcut Window

To show or to hide the Rational shortcut window left click on Shortcut window under the
Windows menu of the main menu. Pressing the CTRL key twice in rapid succession will perform
the same operation.

The Rational shortcut window updates with shortcuts that can be performed with the last
measured features. The items that appear can be user customized.

Shortcut window adds “Write DMIS” for construction. But this function needs “Learn” is on.

When selected feature shows possible shortcut operation icon, click icon, the interface will switch
to operation interface related this icon;
Adds a row of quick construction icon to make feature drag and drop switch decreases drag and
drop distance;

- 181 -
Customize the Rational shortcut area
To customize the Rational shortcut window, left click on the arrow at the top right of the Rational
shortcut window.

Left click the Customize menu item to display a Custom icon dialog box.

The Custom icon dialog allows adding of shortcut icons by selecting the icon in the left window
and then clicking the “Add” button.
To remove an icon, select the icon in the right window and click the “Remove” button.
Clicking on the “Reset” button will return the shortcut icons back to their default values.
Click “Close” to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

- 182 -
Main Menu-Window-Data Window Shortcut

To show or to hide the data window shortcut window left click on Data window shortcut under
the Windows menu of the main menu.

The data window shortcut is two small toolbars above each panel of the dual database to allow
you to very quickly switch between visible databases. The icons within the toolbars are user
customizable.

After clicking on “Data window shortcut” a Data window shortcut setup window will be displayed.
Click on “Enable data window shortcut” to enable the shortcuts.
Icons can be added to either the “Left Data Window” or the “Right Data Window” by selecting
the icon from the list of available buttons on the left of the window, then click the “Add” button
on either the Left Data Window or the Right Data Window.
To remove a shortcut, select the icon from the list under either Left Data Window or Right Data
Window and click the corresponding “Remove” button.

Click the “OK” button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

- 183 -
Main Menu-Window-Drag Bin

If there are more applications require multiple features to connect surface. To Select these
multiple features is chanllenge if there are not of the same feature type and not in order from
the feature database tree. To drag one or more features to the DragBin or add to the DragBin,
then Drag the Bin to where you normally drag the multiple features to

Button <Add Group> allowing multiple Drag storage to be created and dragged.

- 184 -
Main Menu-Help

RationalDMIS includes a number of items to aid in the learning and use of RationalDMIS.

Help Electronic help manual

Show Assistant Real-time context driven tool-tips
Show License Agreement Display the Software license agreement
Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer Display the machine checking gage program tools
Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer Display a summary of program runs
Show Sensor Calib History Viewer Displays a historical summary of sensor calibrations
Show App Log Viewer Display RationalDMIS usage information with log-in
names.
Support Tools Access a number of RationalDMIS support tools.
Check for update Checks for available RationalDMIS updates (requires
an internet connection)
About RationalDMIS Display a window with RationalDMIS version
information, licensing information and installed
modules.

- 185 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Help

To access the RationalDMIS Help file, click “Help” under the Help menu of the main menu.
You can also access context sensitive help by pressing the “F1” key while hovering the mouse
over an interface object.

- 186 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Assistant

To show the RationalDMIS assistant left click on Show Assistant under the Help menu of the main
menu.
When the RationalDMIS assistant is show, the menu item changed to Close Assistant. Left click
Close Assistant to close the RationalDMIS assistant.

The RationalDMIS assistant can provide real-time context driven help during the day to day
operation of RationalDMIS. As it difficult to keep track of all the possible drag and drop
opportunities, the RationalDMIS assistant provides details on any available drag and drop
possibilities during regular day to day use.

The RationalDMIS assistant is a cartoonish measuring machine image that can be moved
anywhere on the screen.
Below is an example of the RationalDMIS assistant offering help on the drag & drop of a sphere:
When the user start to drag a sphere from the feature database, the RationalDMIS assistant
appears and offers a tip.

- 187 -
When the user drags the sphere to other locations the RationalDMIS assistant offers news tips in
the context of that action.

The RationalDMIS assistant has some additional control options.

Right click on the assistant to display the menu of options.

Show Tip Provides a real time tip related to the current operation.
Clicking show tip if a tip is no longer displayed will display the tip.
Pause speech Temporarily pauses the assistant’s voice message. Pressing “Ctrl+F12”
will preform the same operation.
Hide agent Hides the agent from view.
Start voice command Prepares the assistant to begin listening to voice commands.
Add/remove voice words Add/remove voice commands from the assistant’s voice library.

Voice command
When “Start Voice Command” is clicked, the assistant will be prepared to listen for commands.

When the assistant is listening, “ears” will be displayed on the assistant.

- 188 -
Main Menu-Help-Show License Agreement

Click “Show License Agreement” under Help on the main menu to display the license agreement.

The RationalDMIS License agreement shows the agreement between External-Array software and
the end user or company.

Click on the “OK” button to close the license agreement window.

- 189 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer

Click on “Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer” under Help on the main menu to display the
MCG Viewer dialog.

The “MCG” is a Renishaw Machine Checking Gage; a tool for quick accuracy checks between
machine calibrations. The MCG is NOT included with RationalDMIS and must be purchased from
Renishaw or an authorized dealer. Click on the “Open MCG File” button to open an MCG file to
display a history of runs and their data.

- 190 -
Main Menu-Help-Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer

Click on “Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer” under Help on the main menu to display the
DMIS Execution Viewer dialog.

Clicking the Open Log File button will present a file open dialog to open a saved log file (*.DMIS)
The log will be opened and display program runs with start and end times as well as run time,
feature count and OTOL feature count of the selected run.

- 191 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Sensor Calib History Viewer

Click on “Show Sensor Calib History Viewer” under Help on the main menu to display the Calib
Viewer.

Click the Open SCH File button to open a sensor calibration history file (*.sch).
A list of the sensor history is provided as well as details of the sensor and statistics over time.

- 192 -
Main Menu-Help-Show App Log Viewer

Click on “Show App Log Viewer” under Help on the main menu to display the App Log Viewer.

The App Log Viewer contains log-in/log-out times of each user.

- 193 -
Main Menu-Help-Support Tools

There are numerous support tools available in RationalDMIS.

To open the support tools menu, click on “Support Tools” under help in the main menu.
A fly-out menu will appear with support tool options.

WatchDog Tool
To show the watchdog tool click on Support Tools under Help in the main menu then click on
Watchdog tool in the fly-out menu.
The WatchDog is generally something that will be requested by a member of the RationalDMIS
support team to help diagnose an issue. The WatchDog records all software actions and both
software and controller communications.
To save the WatchDog report to a text file, click the “Save to a file” button.
Click the Quit button to close the watchdog and end logging.

ConfigSnap Tool
To show the configsnap tool click on Support Tools under Help in the main menu then click on
ConfigSnap tool in the fly-out menu.
The configsnap is very useful for duplicating RationalDMIS environments. If RationalDMIS is to be
run offline or on a different machine, ConfigSnap can record registry settings, configuration files
and probe model files. These settings can be saved to a file, then the file brought to the next
machine and the snapshot restored by clicking the “Restore Snap” button.

- 194 -
If an environment snapshot is applied to another RationalDMIS installation, RationalDMIS will
need to be shut down and re-started for the changes to take effect.

Run Time Statistic：

This tool is used for showing software run time and total time of machine move; active and reset
needs to input password by administrator. Default password is serial number of the software;

Export in ACSII and Excel format.

Euler angle calculator:

This window works when current sensor has 2 rotation axes, such as PH10, PH20, REVO, etc.

UCC Commad Log and Error Log utility

UCCServer 5.0 or higher is required."

- 195 -
Adding DMIS support to UCCLog
DMESW/COMAND,'UCCLog/Comand,C:\Neptune\ UccLog1.txt'
DMESW/COMAND,'UCCLog/Error,C:\Neptune\ UCCLog2.txt'

- 196 -
Main Menu-Help-Check for Update

Click on “Check for update” under Help in the main menu to check for any available RationalDMIS
updates.

A “Check for updates dialog will be presented with information about the current software
installed on the machine. It will then connect to a web service to check if there are any updates
that the licensed software is eligible.

NOTE: An internet connection is required to check for updates.

- 197 -
Main Menu-Help-About RationalDMIS

Click on “About RationalDMIS” under Help in the main menu to display the About window.

The About window contains version information as well as details about the particular installation
and licensing.

- 198 -
To view the enabled/disabled status of optional modules, click on the down arrow on the drop
down list to the right of “Optional Modules”.

- 199 -
Main Menu-Manage Recent Solutions

“Recent Solutions” will list link of recent opened solution

Manage Recent Solutions...

Recent solutions support to fix common use or important solution path
Fixed path will not be washed out by new shortcut path; fixed path will be always sticky displayed;
Open manage dialog box from manage recent solution, select path needs to fix and click ‘Pin’
button, a little pin icon will be seen. Solution path will be sticky displayed in recent solution after
applied.

- 200 -
File List window Browser to the File location Icon:
Click this Icon will open a Browser to the File location, similar function as Windows "Find
Target"

- 201 -
Graphics Area

The main view window is located in the center of the RationalDMIS interface.
The main view can display one of 5 views at a time (additional views in optional modules).
In each of those views the main toolbar updates to show the tools only available to that view.

Graphics view: The graphics view shows measured features, CAD if used, the virtual
Shortcut: F3 machine. It is the main view used most in RationalDMIS.
DMIS Editor view: The DMIS editor view display the built in DMIS editor. The editor
Shortcut: F4 includes syntax highlighting and code auto-complete.

Output view: The output view is used in the creation of reports and can set a wide
Shortcut: F5 variety of report data and appearances.

Graphics Report view: The graphics report view creates a graphical report with feature
Shortcut: F6 labels and tolerance boxes. It offers extensive customization.

Form Error view: The form error view can create a graphical form error analysis as
Shortcut: F7 well as color mapped points. Simple drag & drop operation.

- 202 -
Graphics View

Selecting the “Graphics View” tab or pressing the F3 key will display the graphics view.
The toolbar will update to display the tools associated with the graphics view.

There are 3 different kinds of icons in the graphics view toolbar:

The drop-down icon group shows These icons include two views.
current checked icon: The first view is with the icon in its collapsed state.
The displayed icon is the current selected function
Sample: The second view is the drop down list expanded to
(drop-down arrow is on the right of show all the available functions. A left click on a
icon) function will select that function and that icon will
be the displayed icon.

Drop-down icon group: In this group the displayed icon does not change.
Click on the arrow to display the list of functions or
Sample: view states. Clicking on the desired icon will
(drop-down arrow is a part of the icon) immediately execute that function or view state
represented by the icon.

Direct manipulation icon: This icon group does not have a drop down and
executes the single function when clicked.
Sample:
(icon has no drop-down arrow)

- 203 -
The graphics view has 2 modes of interaction: the view mode and the select mode

View mode
The graphical view is in View Mode when the mouse cursor turn to the above graphic. The View
Mode allows the manipulation of the displayed graphics. Zoom, pan and rotate can all be
manipulated in the View Mode.

“Zoom”: If the mouse is equipped with a center wheel, rolling the center wheel will zoom in or
out. Rolling the mouse wheel while holding the “SHIFT” key will reduce the zoom factor.
If a middle mouse wheel is not available, then holding down the “CTRL+SHIFT” buttons while
moving the mouse up and down will zoom in or out.

“Rotate”: Rotate is performed by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse.
The graphics will rotate about the graphics rotation center, however this rotation center is not
displayed.
Changing the rotation center is explained below in the Select Mode.
The graphics object can be rotate about a screen axis by placing the mouse close to the graphics
view edge. You will see the mouse cursor change indicating the graphic can be rotated about a
screen axis by rolling the mouse middle wheel.

“Move”: If the mouse is equipped with a middle mouse button or wheel, an object can be moved
by pressing the middle mouse button or wheel while moving the mouse.
If a middle button or wheel is not available, the graphics can be moved by holding down the
“SHIFT” key while moving the mouse.
NOTE: as you will see RationalDMIS uses a perspective view in the graphics, thus a small amount
of rotation may occur due to the perspective change when moving an object.

Select mode
The graphical view is in Select Mode when the mouse cursor turns to the above graphic.
In select mode you can select a graphics point by placing the mouse cursor in the desired location
and clicking the left mouse button. When the mouse turns to this shape in graphic window, it
means that current graphic window is in Select mode. There are two different methods of
operation detailed below.

1. While in the Select Mode, pressing the “S” key will change the cursor to a cross indicating a
search and position operation. To begin performing a search and position operation, left click on
a graphical feature while the mouse cursor is a cross. The graphics will then display the selected
feature as the graphics center, and the object will become the center of rotation.

2. While the pick mode is set to “Pick Actual”, or “Pick Nominal” (detailed under Pick Option),
clicking on a graphical feature and pressing the “N” key will move and rotate the graphics so that
the view is looking directly at the feature .

- 204 -
Graphics View - View Selector

The View Selector can switch to 1 of 6 views.

NOTE: Views are based on the currently active coordinate system, not of the machine.

Front view :
The front view is set to
the ZX plane of the
current coordinate
system.

Back view :
The back view is set to
the negative ZX plane of
current coordinate
system.

- 205 -
Left view :

The left view is set to the

YZ plane of current
coordinate system.

Right view :
The right view is set to
the negative YZ plane of
current coordinate
system.

Top view :
The top view is set to the
XY plane of current
coordinate system.

- 206 -
Home view :
The home view is the
view that was displayed
when RationalDMIS was
started.

Any graphical view can be saved as custom views to be recalled at a later time.
Refer to “Custom View” for more details.

Graphics window view setting toolbar updating, the action used to align single axis to ensure
normal view to the selected axis for front/back/left/right/top view icons when PCS is current
coordinate system; the change is to make these view icons action the same as PCS coordinate
system;

- 207 -
Graphics View - View Mode selector

Auto switch: The view mode can be automatically switched depending on

the current items under the mouse cursor. If “Auto Switch” is
checked on, when the mouse pointer is above a CAD model or
various features, it will automatically switch to Select mode to
allow the picking of items. When not over CAD or features,
the mouse cursor will switch to View mode to allow view
manipulation.

Show feature name: If “Show Feature Name” is check on, if the mouse cursor stops
over a nominal or actual feature, a tool-tip with the feature
label will appear. See the picture below:

Auto show vector: If “Auto Show Vector” is checked on, if the mouse cursor stops
over a nominal or actual feature, a whisker depicting the

- 208 -
 feature vector will be displayed. See the picture below:

Show mouse over coordinate: If “Show Mouse Over Coordinate” is checked on, and the
mouse cursor is over a feature or a CAD model, the status bar
at the bottom of RationalDMIS will display the coordinates of
the mouse cursor in the current coordinate system. See
picture below:

- 209 -
Graphics View - Zoom Window

When the zoom window icon is clicked, hold down the left mouse button while drawing a box
with the mouse cursor, the graphics will zoom to show only the approximate size of the box.
See the picture below:

- 210 -
Graphics View - View All

Clicking the “View All” icon will zoom and/or pan to show all of the graphics on the screen. If
there are no graphics objects outside of the screen, View All will not do anything.

- 211 -
Graphics View - View Rotation Mode

The View Ration Mode drop down allows the selection of different rotation modes to use when
the graphic view is in View Mode.
1. Rotate about axis center will move the graphics to place the center of the current coordinate
system in the center of the Graphics View and rotate around the current coordinate system
center.

2. Set Rotation target will allow the mouse selection of a graphical target to rotate about. The
mouse cursor will turn into a cross to allow the selection of the graphics object. Once the target
has been selected, the graphics are moved so that the target is the center of the screen. The
target then becomes the rotation center.

3. Rotate about CAD model will select the center of the CAD model as the rotation center and will
rotate about the center of the CAD model.
NOTE: this operation selects the CENTER of the CAD model, not the CAD ORIGIN

4. Rotate about sensor tip will set the sensor tip as the center of graphics and the center of ration
to allow rotation about the sensor tip.

5. Rotate about X axis will rotate about the X axis of the current coordinate system.

6. Rotate about Y axis will rotate about the Y axis of the current coordinate system.

7. Rotate about Z axis will rotate about the Z axis of the current coordinate system.

8. Rotate about selected vector will turn the mouse cursor into a cross to allow selection of a
feature. That feature will become the center of graphics and rotation will occur about the
feature’s vector.

- 212 -
Graphics View - Display Settings

At anytime the user can choose to display or hide numerous graphical objects.
To show/hide objects, left click the “Display settings” icon (eye), a list will drop down with the
items that can be shown/hidden. Id an item has a check mark to the left of it, then it is visible.

Machine
Left click on “Machine” to show/hide the machine model. When the machine model is visible
there will be a check mark beside Machine.

Probe
Left click on “Probe” to show/hide the model of the probe. Probe will only show/hide the probe
body. The stylus visibility is handled by the Stylus menu item. When the probe model is visible
there will be a check mark beside Probe.

Stylus
Left click on “Stylus” to show/hide the model of the stylus. The stylus command will only
show/hide the stylus. The probe visibility is handled by the Probe menu item. When the stylus
model is visible there will be a check mark beside Stylus.

- 213 -
Probe Locator

The Probe locator is an imaginary line

extending from the sensor tip. The probe
locator makes it easier to position the sensor
during a move. When the Probe Locator is
enabled there will be a check-mark beside
Probe Locator.

CRD Graphics
Left click on “CRD Graphics” to
show/hide the red/green/blue
coordinate system indicator. The
indicator is referred to as a trihedron.
When the trihedron is visible there will
be a check mark beside CRD Graphics.

Hide Nom Features / Hide Act Features

As defined, measured or constructed, a graphic of both the nominal definition of the feature and
the feature itself are shown in the graphic. In many cases the graphic of the feature nominal and
the actual feature are in very close proximity making it hard to pick on or the other. Left click on
“Hide Nom Features” to hide the all feature nominal graphics or “Hide Act Features” to hide the
graphics of all of the actual features. When feature nominals are hidden there will be a
check-mark beside “Hide Nom Features”. The same applies to “Hide Act Features”.

CAD Model
If a CAD model is being used left click on “CAD Model” to show/hide the CAD model. When the
CAD model is visible there will be a check mark beside CAD Model.

Motion Path
Left click on “Motion Path” to show/hide the machine motion path. The motion path is an
imaginary line that extends from the stylus tip and draws each machine move as it occurs. With a
length program with extensive machine motion, this can easily become difficult to follow. When
the motion path is visible there will be a check mark beside Motion Path.

Meas Points
Left click on “Meas Points” to show/hide measured points. As points are gathered during
measurement of points or other features, a small graphic of the points are displayed. When the
measured points are visible there will be a check mark beside Meas Points.

- 214 -
Move as Wire
Left click on “Move as Wire” to move the CAD model as a wire-frame. When move as Wire is
selected, the CAD model will be displayed as a wire-frame during graphical movement of the
model. Moving as wire reduces the graphics overhead of having the computer have to redraw the
entire model many times during a move. When move as wire is enabled there will be a
check-mark beside “Move as Wire”.

Environment Light
Left click on “Environment Light” to enable/disable the use of ambient light in the graphics. With
environment light enabled, the CAD model will appear more 3D and have more contrast as if
there is a light shining on it. Disabling will present a flatter lit image. Environment light is enabled
when there is a check-mark beside “Environment Light”

Environment light enabled Environment light disabled

Perspective
Left click on “Perspective” to enable/disable the use of perspective in the graphics. With
perspective enabled, the CAD model will appear more realistic and more 3D as lines will appear
to to get closer in the distance. Disabling will present a flatter almost 2D image.

- 215 -
Perspective enabled Perspective disabled

Environment Light
Environment light provides additional lighting to the CAD model. Left click on “Environment
Light” to enable/disable. Some models are more easily read with environment light enabled,
others disabled.

Environment light enabled Environment light disabled

- 216 -
Graphics View - Color Settings

Left click on the Color Settings icon to display a drop down list of color settings for various graphic
objects. The graphics objects that permit color setting are:
Background Color
Actual/Nominal Feature Color
Highlight Color
CAD Model Color
Motion Path Color
Measured Points Color
Graphical Report Line Color

After selecting the desired object to set, a Select Color dialog will be shown. As with many
Windows color selectors, there are basic colors, and custom colors are available by clicking on the
Custom Color button.

- 217 -
Graphics View - Auto Function Settings

Click on the Auto Function Settings icon to display a drop down with a series of automatic UI and
measurement functions.

Collision detection
If “Collision Detection” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically detect a potential collision
with a CAD model or existing feature. When a potential collision is detected, RationalDMIS will
abort movement and present a waning message.

There are three modes of collision detection:

Not detect:
This is the default. Collision detection is disabled.

Path Detection：
If “Path Detection” is selected, RationalDMIS will evaluate the path of the stylus tip for possible collisions.

Entity detection:
If “Entity detection” is selected, RationalDMIS will evaluate the path of the whole probe head for possible
collisions.
Collision detection supports to set ‘collision detection escape distance’ by user.

- 218 -
Auto Target Zoom
If “Auto Target Zoom” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically move and/or pan the graphics
so that the next point to be measured is centered in the graphics screen.
The point to be measured can be a point or other feature in a program or a feature selected from
the Feature Database. During the measurement, RationalDMIS will display an “R” at the bottom
of the DRO to indicate the radial distance from the nominal point. At the same time a tone is
sounded that increases in pitch as the probe moves closer to the nominal point. A white line is
displayed that goes from the sensor tip to the nominal point.
NOTE: Auto Target Zoom and Auto Probe Zoom cannot be enabled at the same time.

Auto Probe Zoom

If “auto probe zoom” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically move the graphics to display
the probe and the center of the graphics view.
NOTE: Auto Probe Zoom and Auto Target Zoom cannot be enabled at the same time.

Auto Show CRD

- 219 -
If “Auto Show CRD” is selected, the coordinate system trihedron will be displayed for easy
verification of the coordinate system. If a coordinate system is selected from the Coordinate
System database, a preview of the selected coordinate system will flash in the graphics view.

Graphics adjustment
Point Vector adds Range Icon. The length setting has three ranges,
(0.01->1)(0.1->10)(10->100) .Thickness range setting (0.001->0.1)(0.01->1)(0.1->10). Icon is toggle
icon. Each click changes to next working range setting. The window can also be pinned to stay.

- 220 -
Graphics View - Remove

Left click on the “Remove” icon to display a drop down list of items than can be removed from
the graphics display.

Remove All Actual Features

All graphics of actual features will be removed. This only removes the graphics and does not
remove the features themselves. Features can be accessed a re-displayed through the Feature
database.

Remove All Nominal Features

All graphics of nominal features will be removed. This only removes the graphics and does not
remove the features themselves. Features can be accessed a re-displayed through the Feature
database.

Remove Motion Paths

All motion path graphics will be removed. Once removed, the path cannot be re-displayed.

Remove All Measured Points

All graphics of measured points will be removed. This does not affect the features in the Feature
database.

- 221 -
Graphics View – Pick Option Toolbar

The Pick Setting toolbar defines what action will be taken during a mouse pick on a graphical
object or a CAD model.
A left click on the Pick Option icon will display the Pick Option toolbar.

Once a function is selected on the Pick Option toolbar, that function will be active until another
function is chosen.
The Pick Option toolbar can be pinned in place for quick access. Click just to the left of the
pushpin at the top of the toolbar and drag the toolbar to a desired location. Click on the pushpin
to pin the icon to that location.

- 222 -
Pick Option Toolbar - Pick None

When Pick None is selected in the Pick Option toolbar, graphics objects on the screen
cannot be picked regardless of Selection mode or Auto-switch. In addition, if there are
any CAD models in use, they will be displayed translucent.

- 223 -
Pick Option Toolbar - CAD Geometry Definition

When CAD Geometry Definition is selected, a 2nd toolbar will be displayed to define what to do
with the CAD Geometry pick.

Nominal definition
Nominal Definition will define the picked CAD entity as a nominal feature.

Nominal & actual definition

Nominal & actual definition will define the picked CAD entity as both a nominal feature and a
corresponding actual feature. The actual feature will have the same values as the nominal feature.

MEAS
Meas will create a measurement path for the picked entity and display a small “Run DMIS”
window. A click on the Run DMIS window will run the automatically generated measurement.

The number of points measured in the automatically generated measurement sequence are
controlled by the value in the Setting Window of the Measurement panel.

- 224 -
If Learn mode is enabled, DMIS code will be generated and added to the DMIS program, but the
measurement will not be performed until the generated code is run.

Menu at Pick
When Menu at Pick is selected, a small menu will be displayed over the picked entity with the
following options:
Nom/Act Definition will create both a nominal feature and actual feature from the picked entity.
The actual feature will have the same values as the nominal feature.

Meas will automatically create and execute a measurement sequence of the selected entity.

Meas DMIS will generate the DMIS code for a measurement of the selected entity, but will not
execute the measurement. The generated DMIS code will be added to the program (Learn must
be enabled).

- 225 -
Sub CAD model will create a new CAD model of the selected entity. The original CAD model will
remain as it was. The new CAD model will be created after a left click on Create CAD in the Sub
CAD window.

- 226 -
Pick Option Toolbar - CAD Wire Definition

When CAD Wire Definition is selected, a 2nd toolbar will be displayed to define what to do with
the CAD Wire pick.

Nominal definition
Nominal definition will define a nominal 2D feature from CAD.

Nominal & actual definition:

Nominal & Actual definition will define a both a nominal 2D feature from CAD and the
corresponding actual feature. The actual feature will have the same values as the nominal feature.

MEAS
Meas will automatically create a measurement path based on the selected 2D entity. A small
“Run DMIS” window will be presented. The measurement will not start until the Run button in
the Run window is clicked.

VECBLD MEAS
Vecbld meas will automatically create a VECBLD measurement to determine the actual vector of
the selected 2D entity and then measure the 2D entity. The measurement will not start until the
Run button in the Run window is clicked.

- 227 -
MEAS DMIS
Meas DMIS will automatically create DMIS code for the measurement of the 2D feature and add
it to the existing DMIS program (Learn mode must be enabled). The measurement will not take
place until the DMIS code is run.

VECBLD DMIS
Vecbld DMIS meas will automatically create DMIS code for a VECBLD measurement to determine
the actual vector of the selected 2D entity and then add the code to the existing DMIS
program.(Learn mode must be enabled). The measurement will not take place until the DMIS
code is run.

Menu at Pick
Menu at Pick will display a small menu to allow selection of one of the items described above.

Note:
Any automatically generated measurements or DMIS code is controlled by the values in the
Setting Window of the Measurement panel.

There are some modifications that can be applied to automatically generated measurements and
code:
An offset value can be entered in the offset text-box to move the points by the offset value.
If the vector of the selected entity is wrong, it can be inverted by clicking on the Reverse Vector
icon.

- 228 -
When CAD Wire Geometry is selected, there is an additional drop down list available for some
advanced measurements.

Edge Line
Edge Line will automatically create the path to measure the line as an edge line projected to a
face.
U Flow Line & V Flow Line
If the picked 2D entity is at the edge boundary a CAD model, then U Flow Lines(horizontal) and V
Flow Lines (vertical) can be automatically created to generate U/V points.

3 Point Line

Pick 3 points on CAD to define a nominal curve.

- 229 -
Function description: Pick three points on CAD. The first point is the starting point, second point
is direction point, and the third point is the ending point. Three points define a plane and the plane
sections the CAD to a Curve. The final nominal curve is defined as a segment of the sectioned
curve between three picking points.
The data window is used to keep the picked points. The data cell is editable. Manually modified
XYZ will be used for Curve construction.

- 230 -
Pick Option Toolbar - CAD Point Geometry Definition

When CAD Point Definition is selected, a 2nd toolbar will be displayed to define what to do with
the CAD Point pick.

Nominal Definition
Nominal Definition will define a nominal point feature at the pick location.

Nominal & Actual Definition

Nominal & Actual Definition will define both a nominal point feature at the pick location and an
actual feature at the picked location. The actual feature will have the same value as the measured
feature.

Meas
Meas will automatically create a measurement path based on the selected point. A small “Run
DMIS” window will be presented. The measurement will not start unti the Run button in the Run
window is clicked.

VECBLD MEAS
Vecbld meas will automatically create a VECBLD measurement to determine the actual vector of
the selected point and then measure the selected point. The measurement will not start unti the
Run button in the Run window is clicked.

- 231 -
MEAS DMIS
Meas DMIS will automatically create DMIS code for the measurement of the selected point
feature and add it to the existing DMIS program (Learn mode must be enabled). The
measurement will not take place until the DMIS code is run.

VECBLD DMIS
Vecbld DMIS meas will automatically create DMIS code for a VECBLD measurement to determine
the actual vector of the selected point and then add the code to the existing DMIS
program.(Learn mode must be enabled). The measurement will not take place until the DMIS
code is run.

Menu at Pick
Menu at Pick will display a small menu to allow selection of one of the items described above.

Note:
Any automatically generated measurements or DMIS code is controlled by the values in the
Setting Window of the Measurement panel.

There are some modifications that can be applied to automatically generated measurements and
code:
An offset value can be entered in the offset text-box to move the points by the offset value.
If the vector of the selected entity is wrong, it can be inverted by clicking on the Reverse Vector
icon.

- 232 -
When CAD Point definition is selected, there is an additional drop down list available to define
additional point measurement options.

Surface point
The selected point will be generated on the CAD surface.

Edge point
The selected point will be generated at the intersection edge of 2 features.

Wire point
The selected point will be generated along a set scribed line.

- 233 -
Angle Point and Corner Point
Angle Point and Corner Point might not be visible on the CAD Point Geometry toolbar.
If the icons are not visible and you wish to enable them a change in an external application is
required. Locate “KNeptuneRegUtil.exe”, it should be in the root RationalDMIS directory.
Start the “KNeptuneRegUtil.exe” application and make sure Internal Registry is selected and the
selected user is correct. Look for the item “Angle Point & Corner Point UI Show/Hide and select
show in the Settings to the right. Re-start RationalDMIS and make sure the items are visible.

Pick Angle point or Corner point

The left side of the image below shows and angle point.
There are some rules to be met before and angle point can be defined:
1. The point must be on the intersection of 2 lines or planes.
2. The point must occur at the location closer to the red pick point
3. The point vector divides the nominal vectors of two planes equally.
Note: In order to correctly define an angle point vector, 2 planes must be visible.

The right side of the image above shows a corner point.

In order to define a corner point:
1. The point must be the intersection of 3 planes.
2. The point vector must be the arithmetic mean of the nominal vectors of 3 planes.
Note: in order to correctly define a corner point vector, the 3 planes must be visible.

- 234 -
Measurement of an Angle Point or a Corner Point

During the measurement of an angle point or a corner point, 3 measure points will automatically
created on each plane. The angle point always uses 6 measure points and the corner point always
uses 9 measure points. Distance between the vector build sample points can be set in the Sample
dist text-box on the right.

Angle Points and Corner Points cannot be directly measured through the feature measurement
interfaces. After the nominal point has been picked the generated DMIS code for an angle point
is:
RMEAS/ANGLEPT, F (AP1), 6, VECBLD, 6.000000, 6
ENDMES
The generated DMIS code for a Corner Point is:
RMEAS/CORNERPT, F (CP1), 9, VECBLD, 6.000000, 9
ENDMES
Some notes on angle points and corner points
● Angle points and corner points cannot be defined with standard DMIS statements and
therefore must be picked on CAD.
● Angle points & corners points can be tolerance using the following tolerances:
Point profile
Coordinate tolerance
Distance between tolerances
Symmetry tolerance
● Angle points & corner points support graphic reports, SPC, and graphic view windows

- 235 -
Sheet edge point
A small window will appear with selections for: straight line, circle, ellipse, round/square,Regular
polygon keyway picked from a thin walled or sheet work-piece

In the example below, a point was picked on the model with Sheet Edge selected.
Then a square key-way was selected from the feature window and accepted by clicking the green

check-mark.

Sheet metal point

Selecting sheet metal point point will present an interface to collect a number of control points,
enter additional measurement parameters and selecting the feature type to be created.

There
are additional parameters to aid in the measurement of the feature:
Pitch: Pitch is a value representing the density of the measured points

- 236 -
Offset: Offset is the offset between control points and desired nominal point.
Create surface point: Create surface point creates a point on the control surface
Create edge point: Creates a point perpendicular to the control point surface
Nominal point: Creates a nominal point from the point data.
Measure point: Measure point will drive the machine to take the defined measurement.
Learn mode must be OFF.

Pitch: density of controlled measure points

Offset: distance between controlled offsetting measure points
Create surface point: measure point created on the surface of control point
Create edge point: created measure point perpendicular to control point surface
Nominal point: turn measure point to nominal point
Measure point: after closing self-learning, clicking “measure point” will drive the machine a make
a measurement

- 237 -
Pick Option Toolbar - Select Nominal

When “Select Nominal” is selected, if a CAD model is in use it will become translucent.
A mouse pick on a feature will select the nominal of that feature. The selection will also
be selected in the Feature database.

Once a nominal feature is selected, there are drag & drop operations that can be performed.
A nominal feature can be dragged from the graphics and dropped onto a feature type node of the
Feature database to create a new feature from the selected feature.

- 238 -
Multiple nominal features can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while dragging a box
around the desired features in the graphics area.

When Pick Nom or Act tool is active, there is a Window selection setting Icon added. Press this
Icon popup a setting window and select by pressing “Ctrl +mouse left button”.
Selection will select those features in the Window and its type icon is selected. The result of the
selection is to highlight selected feature Labels in the feature database window
Rectangle selected features tool, in addition to single clicking toggle ON/OFF function already
supported, the new function is added for multiple icons selection and deselection. To use
multiple icon selection, click the mouse button and hold while hold down an Alt key, the mouse
over icons will automatically change to the state of the first Click icon.

Window selection of multiple features to high light features

- 239 -
- 240 -
Pick Option Toolbar - Select Actual

When “Select Actual” is selected, if a CAD model is in use it will become translucent.
A mouse pick on a feature will select the actual feature. The selection will also be
selected in the Feature database.

Once an actual feature is selected, it can be dragged into numerous areas such as construction,
tolerance evaluation etc.
As with Pick Nominal, multiple features can be selected y holding down the CTRL key while
dragging a box around the desired area.

- 241 -
Pick Option Toolbar - Create/Edit Measure Points on Geometry

If the feature measurement windows are open and Create/Edit Points on Geometry is selected, a
pick will create a point to be measured in a feature.

If the current measurement window is the histogram view, the

picked point will be measured immediately.

If current measurement window is measure point management, the

point will be added to the measure points window.

Once points have been added click either the Preview icon to preview the
measurement or the Measure icon to perform the measurement.

- 242 -
DMIS Editor View

DMIS programs cannot be edited in the DMIS program portion of the dual database area. They
must be edited in the DMIS editor.
Selecting the “DMIS Editor” tab or pressing the F4 key will display the DMIS Editor.
The toolbar will update to display the tools associated with the DMIS Editor.

An extensive menu of DMIS programming tools is available on a right click in the DMIS Editor.

To get an existing program over to the DMIS editor from the DMIS Program database, click on the

“to DMIS Editor” icon on the upper toolbar of the DMIS Program database.

To send a program from the DMIS editor to the DMIS Program database, click on the “to

program” icon.

- 243 -
DMIS Editor - File Options

New
Click the “New” icon to create a new blank file.

Open
To open an existing DMIS program, click the “Open” icon. A Open DMIS File dialog will be
presented to select the DMIS file to open.

Save
Click the “Save” icon to save the current DMIS program. A Save DMIS File dialog will be displayed
to select the path and enter the save file name.

- 244 -
Print
Click the “Print” icon to print the current contents of the DMIS editor.

Print preview
Click the “Print Preview” icon to preview the printed document.

- 245 -
DMIS Editor - Edit Options

Undo
Click the “Undo” icon to undo the last edit. There are items stored in the Undo buffer. To undo
previous edits, click the Undo icon until the desired edit is undone. If there is nothing to undo,
the icon will be disabled.

Redo
If a the Undo function was used to undo an edit, clicking on the Redo icon will restore the edit
that was undone.
If there is nothing to redo, the icon will be disabled.

Cut
To cut DMIS code from a program, select the text to be cut, then click the “Cut” icon.
The text will be removed from the program, but will be available in the Windows Clipboard.
If no text is selected, the Cut icon will be disabled.

Copy
To copy DMIS code to the Windows Clipboard, select the text to be copied, then click the “Copy”
icon. The selected text will now be copied to the Windows Clipboard.
If no text is selected, the Copy icon will be disabled.

Paste
Clicking the “Paste” icon will paste the contents of the Windows Clipboard to the current cursor
location.
If there is no text available in the Windows Clipboard, the Paste icon will be disabled.

In addition to clicking icons on the DMIS

Editor toolbar, a right click will display a menu
that contains the functions detailed above.

- 246 -
DMIS Editor - Search and Replace

The Search & Replace section of the DMIS Editor toolbar consists of a drop-down edit box, and
some binoculars.

Search content drop-down

The search content drop down is used to input text to be searched for. Recently
entered search terms may be selected by clicking on the down arrow and clicking the desired
item.

Search down
The Search Down icon will attempt to find the text displayed in the search content box.
The search will occur from the current cursor location down to the end of the document.

Search up
The Search Up icon will attempt to find the text displayed in the search content box.
The search will occur from the current cursor location up to the start of the document.

Replace
Clicking the Replace Icon will display a Replace Dialog. Enter the text to find in the “Find what”
text-box and the new replacement text in the “Replace with” text-box. Additional parameter can
be selected at the bottom of the dialog.

You can search and replace one by one using the “Find Next” and “Replace” buttons, or replace
every occurrence of the found text with the replacement text by clicking the “Replace All” button.

- 247 -
DMIS Editor - Bookmarks

Toggle bookmark
To mark a location in the DMIS program to find later, “Toggle Bookmark” will create a bookmark
at the current line. Bookmarks can be identified as a blue dot to the left of the editor.
If a bookmark is present on the current line when Toggle Bookmark is clicked, the bookmark will
be removed.

Next bookmark
A left click on Next bookmark will search down to the end of the document from the current
location for the next bookmark. If a bookmark is found, the line with the bookmark will be made
visible and the cursor will be located at that line.

Previous bookmark
Previous bookmark behaves the same as Next Bookmark but searches from the current location
up to the start of the document.

- 248 -
Clear all bookmarks
Clicking the Clear all bookmarks icon will remove all the bookmarks from the document.
This cannot be undone.

- 249 -
DMIS Editor - Formatting Options

Comment selection
A program comment is a portion of code that is still visible in the program, but ignored when the
program is run. In DMIS a comment is two dollar signs $$.
To comment a selection, select the text to be commented then click the Comment Selection icon.
Two dollar signs will be inserted at the beginning of each selected line to indicate a
comment.

Uncomment selection
To remove comments from a previously commented selection of DMIS code. Select the desired
text, then click the Uncomment selection icon. The two dollar signs $$ will be removed from the
selected line.

- 250 -
Increase Indent
Indenting of code in certain places makes the code easier to read.
To increase an indent, select the desired code and click then Increase Indent icon. The selection
will be indented the equivalent of one tab.

Decrease Indent
If text has been indented, the indent can be reduced by selecting the desired text, then clicking
the Decrease Indent icon. The selected text will move to the left the equivalent of one tab.

Set Break Point

Clear all Break Points

- 251 -
DMIS Editor - To Program

To run a program after it has been edited, click the “To program” on the right side of the DMIS

Editor toolbar.
The DMIS program will move from the DMIS editor to the DMIS Program database. From there
the program can be run.

- 252 -
DMIS Editor – Layout

This limited alignment function aligns the same command group into the same format. To align a
group of command, highlights the group text and press the alignment icon.
Note: Meas block containing more than one type of syntax needs to include the MEAS for Align to
work correctly.

- 253 -
DMIS Editor – Remove Continuition

Remove DMIS continuity and combine the DMIS line to ONE line

- 254 -
Output View

The output view houses the RationalDMIS reporting functions.

Selecting the “Output” tab or pressing the F5 key will display the Output View.
The toolbar will update to display the tools associated with the Output View.

The Output view is comprised of the main output window and output setup.
The main output report is displayed in the main output window.

The output view includes the output toolbar, the main output window, custom output and Excel
output. The output toolbar allows switching to different output functions, access to detailed
output setup, saving, print preview and printing of reports.

- 255 -
Output - Set Default Save Path

A default save path can be created to avoid the need to always specify a save path.
To set of modify the default save path, click on the “File” menu, then select “Options” then
“Application Setup” or press CTRL-D.

The “Application Setup” window will be displayed. Select “General Setup”.

Under the Directory node, there will an “Output Directory”.

Left click in the blank area just to the right of the current Output Directory entry.

Left click on the button that is shown.

- 256 -
A Browse for folder dialog will be presented. Navigate to the desired directory folder or enter a
new folder. Click the OK button when complete.

- 257 -
Output - Output Toolbar

Open/close output setup window

The Output setup icon is a toggle on/off icon.
If the Output Setup window is not visible, click on the Output setup icon.
To close the Output window, click on the Output Setup icon again.

Open output file

A previously saved Excel report can be re-opened by clicking on the Open output file and
selecting the desired file.
Note: This icon opens Excel ONLY and thus is only shown when the Output View is Excel.

Save output file

A RationalDMIS report can be saved as an Adobe PDF file or as an HTML file by clicking the “Save
File Icon”. If the Output View is set to Excel, then the report can be saved as an Excel file.

Delete all output items

All reporting items in the Output view can be deleted from the report by clicking on the “Delete
All icon. There is a confirmation prompt before the items are deleted.
This icon is not available in the Excel view.

Delete selected output item

To delete a single item from the report, select the item to be deleted by clicking on it, then select
“Delete Selected item”. There is a confirmation prompt before the item is deleted.
This icon is not available in the Excel view.

Not selected Selected

Add Text
To add user text to a report, click the “Add Text” icon. A text input box will appear near the
bottom of the output view. Enter the text to add to the report and then hit the “Enter” key on the
keyboard. This icon is not available in the Excel view.

- 258 -
 Add Manual Item
For example: a workpiece that size is measured by caliper manually, measure result can be added
into CMM measurement report; user needs to input size name/nominal/actual/tolerance, the
result will be displayed in output window after clicked add.

Export data to Excel

Please refer to the “NeptuneExcel Instructions” document for detailed information.

Synchronize feature associate tolerance

Synchronize feature associated tolerances to the output window.

Print
Click to print the contents of the output report.

Print preview
Click to preview the report before printing.

Screen output
If in the Excel view click to return to the main output view.

Excel output
If in the main output view, click “Excel Output” to switch to the Excel view”.

Report
Please refer to the “RationalDMIS-Custom Report.doc” document for detailed information.

- 259 -
Custom output

Custom output formats can be selected. Those familiar with XML can create their own custom
formats.

Note: The Excel output window only available if Microsoft Office OWC dlls are installed. If no
Microsoft Office OWC dlls are installed the Excel icon will be disabled. Please refer to Microsoft
for assistance with OWC dlls.

Template output: Output toolbar adds a new icon "Template output". This output is mostly
customer driven output and template is supplied from the InstallDir/Template/TemplateOutput/
directory. The current template is 5x5 ""point"" XY deviation output.
In the sample output on the right, the numerical value is the Theoretical and Actual difference on
the XY plane. The direction of the text indicates the direction of the deviation.

- 260 -
Output – Main Output Window

By default when you open the output view, the main output window will be displayed.
Items that can be sent to the main output window to be reported include features, tolerances,
graphical objects and text. Some items can simply be dragged and dropped on the report, others
can be sent via the user interface or created during the execution of a DMIS program.

The main output windows is divided into three parts:

the header
output column headings
Output content

Output report header

The output report header can show information about the report, such as company name date,
part number, operator, etc. The output report header is setup in Output setup under “Report
Header”. Please refer to Output Setup for more detailed information.

Output column headings

The Output column headings indicate the type and/or meaning of the data shown in the report
tables. The Column headings include nominal values, actual values, deviation values, lower
tolerance, upper tolerance and trend.

- 261 -
Trend can display data in one of three formats:

It indicates that the value is within the scope of tolerance.

It indicates that the value exceeds the scope of lower tolerance.

It indicates that the value exceeds the scope of upper tolerance.

Output column headings allow some customization. Output column heading customization can
be found in Output Setup under “Format Definition”. Please refer to Output Setup for more
detailed information.

Output content window

The report can include features, tolerances, variables and images.

When a feature is output, the output content table contains the feature name, environment
parameters such as coordinate system and measurement units, and also contains reported
parameters such as X,Y,Z, form, diameter etc. The feature name is displayed in the upper let of
the output content table. The environment parameters are displayed on the upper right of the
table. The left side (shown in a green box) of the table contains output parameters.
In the example below, the X,Y,Z,Dia and Form for CIR3 which was measured in Cartesian, in MM in
the XYPlane of the CRD5 coordinate system.

The output content table can be customized in the “Feature Definition” section of “Output Setup”.
Please refer to Output Setup for more detailed information.

When tolerances are reported, the output content window contains the label names of output
tolerances, the feature name(s) used for evaluating the tolerance and system measurement
environment information.

In the example above, the coordinate system is MCS, the units are MM and angles are reported
as decimal degrees. All are shown in the upper right of the output content table. The upper left
contains the label name of the tolerance; TPOS2D1 and the label name of the feature being
evaluated; CIR1. There may be additional information such as bonus tolerance listed.

When a variable is reported, only the value of the variable will be reported. The label name of the
variable will not be reported.

- 262 -
Images can be reported in the output report. The images can be from saved custom views, or
form error reports or graphical reports. Any graphic views that are saved in the Custom view
database can be dragged from the Custom View database and dropped directly on the report.

An Output content window can be deleted with a right click and selecting Delete.

Multi-select same type feature output in output panel can modify output parameter together;

Output panel allows user to remove page break, right click on output content to popup menu and
select ‘remove page break’.
After save as PDF report, it will be a new page behind page break content.

- 263 -
Output - Excel Output Window

The Excel Output Window is an Excel spreadsheet contained in RationalDMIS to allow reporting
directly to a spreadsheet.

The Excel output window operates the same as Microsoft Excel in Office. Both measured features
and tolerances can be reported in the Excel output. Items can be added by dragging from the
feature database to the Excel report, or through evaluating tolerances or through DMIS programs.

Advanced Excel interaction such as writing specific data to specific cells for reading data from a
cell can be performed. Please refer to the “NeptueExcel Instructions” document for specific
operation methods.

Note: The Excel output window can be used with Microsoft Office XP or newer.

- 264 -
Output - Output Setup Pane

The Output setup window is used to configure a number of settings within the output window
including output styles, output device settings, and output parameters of features and tolerances
plus more.
The Output Setup is a toggle on/off icon. To view Output setup, click on the Output Setup icon on
the left side of the Output Toolbar. To close Output Setup click the Output Setup icon.

The Output Setup Pane is displayed on the right side of the Output View. A tree structure is used
to manage the output settings. The main tree nodes are “device definition”, “format definition”,
“feature definition”, “decimal places”, and “output style”.

Undo Remove

When a selected output item is removed, the UNDO icon will be enbled. Click this icon will
restore the deleted output item.

- 265 -
Output Settings - Device Definition

The Device definition node is used to set output devices and associated settings.
RationalDMIS employs three main kinds of output devices: File, Printer and Screen.
The File node also includes Excel as well as default text files.

There are check-boxes to left of each device. A checked box means the device is open and ready
to accept data. An un-checked box indicates the device is closed. Devices can either be
opened/closed in this interface or may be opened/closed within a DMIS program using the DMIS
OPEN/DID and CLOSE/DID commands.

Declaring a new output device

A new output device can be declared inside a DMIS program or from the user interface.
To declare a new device in the user interface, right click on “Device Definition”, then click on the
“Declare Device” menu item.

After clicking on “Declare Device”, a dialog box will be displayed to set the new output device.

There are 4 different types of report devices, but only STOR (file storage) devices can be declared
through the Declare Device dialog. Enter a label name for the device in the “Device ID” text-box.
Click the browse button to the extreme right of Device Name to select a path and enter a name
for the new storage device. Click on the OK button to setup the device and close the dialog. The

- 266 -
new device will be added to the “File” node under “Device Definition”.

New devices may created in a DMIS program using the DMIS keywords (DEVICE/ [STOR, TERM,
PRINT, EXCEL, INCR]).
EXCEL is an extended DMIS word and can be used to create a new device as shown in the
example below:
DID (ExOut) = DEVICE/EXCEL,'C:\TextExcel output.xls'

INCR is an extended DMIS word to be used in SPC file creation. In the example below the new
device called SPC_DATA will increment the file name “Test_Part” by one each time the program is
run, creating Test_Part1.mea and Test_Part2.mea etc.
DID (SPC_DATA) = DEVICE/INCR,'C:\SPCDATA\Test_Part.mea'

Tolerance Template
Output custom excel template files

Click Template Tolerance will show Template designer

- 267 -
GDIS output
To activate GDIS output, select GDIS as file extension. GDIS has fixed output width. To
ensure the output format, decimal places should set to 4 or less.
Red underlined output is Feature Comment. When Comment doesn't exist for a feature,
FEATURE NO. + Feature label is output here.
Greeen underlined output is Feature Type : Feature Label

Print function
When “Printer” is selected in “Device Definition”, all outputs will be automatically output to
printer. When a printer page is full, it will automatically be printed and the page number
incremented. If a page is not full at the end of a program it will not print automatically.
To print any remaining pages in a program, use the DMIS ENDFIL statement to close and flush all
output devices. If not using ENDFIL in a program, clicking the print icon will print any remaining
pages. A page break is illustrated by the arrow below:

- 268 -
- 269 -
Output Settings - Format Definition

The Format Definition node is used to set a number of report formatting options.

Compact Output: apply to screen output and excel output. Some parameters will be deleted
after check compact output, space usage will become smaller.

DMIS template command to switch output window Compact mode ON and OFF

Show Item Grid

- 270 -
When it is enabled:

When it is not enabled:

Direction
Direction is used to set the direction of the output content tables either horizontal or vertical. If
the direction is set to Horizontal, the output columns headers are displayed at the left of the
output content table, while the parameters are displayed across the top.

If Vertical is selected, then the column headers will be across the top and the parameters along
the left side.

Vector
The vector setting is used to determine how vectors are displayed.

Show out tolerance item only

If “Show out of tolerance items only” is “enabled”, then only items that are out of tolerance will

- 271 -
be reported. Items that are in tolerance will not be reported.
Show out of tolerance items only is disabled below:

Show out of tolerance items only is enabled below:

Show parameter descriptions

When Show parameter descriptions is enabled, measurement parameters such as coordinate
system, length units etc will be displayed in the upper right of the output content table.

When parameter descriptions are disabled, nothing is displayed in the upper right.

Show feature output options

When show feature output option is enabled, a summary of the feature parameters that are
being reported is displayed in the upper left of the output contents table.

When show feature output options is disabled, there is no parameter summary shown.

- 272 -
Show feature label
When “show feature label” is enabled, the feature label name will appear in the upper left of the
output contents table.

When show feature label is not enabled, the feature label name is not shown.

Show Tolerance Label

Active：

Not actived:

Output trend with OK or NP

When “output trend with OK or NP” is enabled, any values that exceed the specified tolerance
are reported with “NP” rather than the out of tolerance value. Items that are in tolerance are
reported as a green “OK” rather than the green trend indicator.

- 273 -
When “output trend with OK or NP” is disabled, out of tolerance items are reported as the out of
tolerance values and in tolerance items are reported with a green trend indicator.

Combine same feature tolerance

When combine same feature tolerance is enabled, consecutive tolerances that apply to the same
feature will be combined into a single output content table.

When combine same feature tolerance is not enabled, outputs will all be in separate output
content tables.

Operation document
The Operator document records certain events and reports them as part of the output report. An
event may be the time a feature was measured, or coordinate system changes, sensor changes
etc. The operation document is not available in Excel output.

- 274 -
Shown below are the details for the creation of CRD1 included in the operation document.

Don’t show zero Tol item

When “don’t show zero Tol item” is enabled, parameters that do not have a tolerance specified
will not be reported.

When “don’t show zero Tol item” is not enabled, the parameters with no tolerance are reported
and will show deviation.

Don’t show feature not evaluated tolerance

When don’t show feature not evaluated tolerance is enabled, any feature that does not have a
tolerance evaluation will leave the upper and lower tolerances blank in the output content table.

- 275 -
When don’t show feature not evaluated tolerance is disabled, any not tolerance item will apply
the default tolerances.

Show print page number

When “show print page number” is enabled, a page number will be added to each report page
when the reported is printed.

The page number will not be shown when this option is not enabled:

Drag & drop new item before selected item

When Drag & drop new item before selected item is enabled, new report items will be added in a
position BEFORE the selected output content table.

Use default tolerance table

Tolerances have used defined default tolerances, when “Use default tolerance table” is enabled,
the report will make use of the default tolerances for feature parameters. Items toleranced in the
Tolerance operation panel do not apply to this setting.

- 276 -
Title text for each item
When “Title text for each item” is enabled, column headers will have titles on every output
content table rather than just the first.

When Title text for each item is disabled only the 1st output content table will show column titles.

Show description of tolerance datum

When “show description of tolerance datum” is enabled, a more detailed description of the
tolerance is included in the output.

When “show description of tolerance datum” is disabled, a detailed description of the tolerance
is not shown.

Compatibility Format
Enable ‘Compatible Format’ will show bilateral tolerance:

- 277 -
Print full header on each page
When Print full header on each page is enabled, each printed report page will have a separate
header rather then just the first page.

No print page margin

When “no print page margin” is enabled, the print formatting will reduce the margins at the edge
of the page to allow more data on a single sheet.

Print Scale

- 278 -
Apply: some customers require to print report on a small piece of paper, it can modify final size
by set print scale.

Compatibility-use absolute value as coordinate tolerance

When “use absolute value as coordinate tolerance” is enabled, the nominal value is the same as
the absolute measured value resulting in zero deviation on coordinate tolerances only.

Output original negative values when this option is enabled:

Compatibility-use absolute X/Y/Z value to evaluate X/Y/Z error

When “use absolute X/Y/Z value to evaluate X/Y/Z error” is enabled, the sign of the nominal vs
actual is ignored and the deviation is reported as though the signs were the same.

When “use absolute X/Y/Z value to evaluate X/Y/Z error” is not enabled, the sign difference of
nominal vs actual is included in the deviation calculation.

- 279 -
Integer seconds in DD: MM: SS

When you want to display the angle in form of “DD: MM: SS”, you can “enable”
and then relevant angle value will be output in integer seconds:

When it is not enabled:

Add Apostrophe before Excel Text

Excel output default behavior is to add apostrophe (') before text. This behavior is causing some
user who program Excel macro that cell text without apostrophe.

Default
The Default node allows extensive customization of how data is reported in the output content
table.
Nominal (Nom), Actual (Act), Deviation (Dev), Tolerance (TOL) can be turned on or off. If the box
to the left of the desired parameter is not checked, it is off and not reported, click to check on or
off. The order that the Nom, Act, Dev, Tol appear can be changed by dragging the desired word to
the desired position and dropping. The tolerance order can be changed from lower/upper to
upper/lower or back by clicking on the drop down list to the right of “Tol”

Change the sequence of the Nom/Act/LwUp/Dev by drag-n-drop one item to a new position

- 280 -
Custom VForm
“VForm” is vendor format. It allows multiple output content table formats in a single report
rather than just one.
To create a custom format, right click on the Format Definition node and select “Create VForm

A dialog box will be presented. Enter a label name in the text-box beside “VForm Label” then
check on or off the parameters to report.

Click on the OK button to accept and create the new VForm. The new VForm will be added below
the Default VForm.

Once the new VForm has been created, a program can now switch between multiple VForms
using the DMIS VForm statement.

Different VForm formats can be selected for screen output, printer output, file output and Excel
output. Click on the drop down list beside Format for the desired output device and select the
format.

Customized formats can be called directly from the program in the OPEN/DID statement. Eg:
OPEN/DID (stor1), FDATA, V (VForm1), OUTPUT, OVERWR.

- 281 -
Output Settings - Report Options

VECBLD point reports actual projected on to nominal

When VECBLD point reports actual projected on to nominal is enabled, the VECBLD created point
will be projected onto the nominal.

When VECBLD point reports actual projected on to nominal is not enabled, there is no projection.

All point report actual projected on to nominal

When “All point report actual projected on to nominal “is enabled, all POINTS are projected onto
the nominal.

- 282 -
When “All point report actual projected on to nominal “is NOT enabled, automatic projection will
not occur.

Point reports in major coordinate only

When “Point reports in major coordinate only” is enabled, only the coordinate axis for the major
vector will be output. If a point has a vector close to 0,0,1, then only Z will be reported.
If a point has a vector of close to -1,0,0, then only X will be reported.

When “Point reports in major coordinate only” is not enabled, all axis will report regardless of
vector.

Custom PROFP nominal value

A point profile tolerance normally has a nominal of 0. A custom nominal can be entered to the
right of Enable.

When “Custom PROFP nominal value”, the value entered becomes the point profile nominal.
The results are calculated and reported to the new nominal.

- 283 -
PTMEAS to calculate Dx, Dy Dz, Dr
When “PTMEAS to calculate Dx, Dy Dz, Dr” is enabled, PTMEAS points within a measurement will
report X,Y,Z and radial deviations from the nominal PTMEAS.

- 284 -
Output Settings - Feature Definition

The Feature definition node has multiple output parameters for features, sensors, coordinates
systems and images.

A check-box is located to the left of each parameter. If a box is

checked on, then it will be reported. If it is not checked, then it
will not be reported.
In the example on the right, the X,Y,Z and diameter have been
checked. Only the X, Y, Z and diameter are reported in the
report below.

- 285 -
The parameters for an image differ from the other feature setting parameters.

Click to the right of Align to change the alignment.

If an image is too large it can be scaled to auto-fit.
If an image is too wide for the printed page it can automatically be rotated to fit.
The image can be set to print on a separate page.
No Print Picture option to enable and disable print picture.

- 286 -
Output Settings - Text Setting

Text setting in Output setting is similar to Graphical report

- 287 -
Output Settings - Decimal Places

The number of decimal places used for report data can be changed under the “Decimal Places”
node. Click on the value to the right of Angle, Dist, or Dev and enter a new number.

The number of decimal places for a report can be set programmaticly with the DMIS code
DECPL/[angle, dist, dev].

Decimal control:
If the decimal value is changed, there are 2 different ways to implement that change.
Global: The new decimal place value will be used for new report items and well as replacing the
decimal place value in existing report data.
New Item: The new decimal place value will apply to new report items only. Existing report items
will not be changed.

User decimal control by column:

DMIS is the original decimal control. By column can specify the decimal nominal, actual, deviation
individually.

DMIS for Decimal control:

$$ Set.OutputCtrl.Decpl(DMIS)

$$ Set.OutputCtrl.Decpl(USERDF)

$$ Set.OutputCtrl.USERDF.Decpl.Dev({#})

- 288 -
$$ Set.OutputCtrl.USERDF.Decpl.Act({#})

$$ Set.OutputCtrl.USERDF.Decpl.Nom({#})

$$ Set.OutputCtrl.USERDF.Decpl.Tol({#})

- 289 -
Output Settings - Output Style

The Output style node is used to set report header information and overall report appearance
and front and colors. In addition to custom styles, RationalDMIS includes 3 pre-defined styles.

Report header:
To display the report header, make sure the check-box to the left of the Report Header node is
checked on. If Report Header is not checked, the header will not be shown.
To customize the report header data, click to the right of the parameter to be changed and enter
a new parameter.

The company name is taken from the USB hardware key and cannot be modified.
The time and date are taken from the computer clock and cannot be modified.

Load header from solution file for output style;

- 290 -
Save header to Solution file
Uncheck this option, output Header information will not be available from the Solution.

Output window user-defined header can be controlled by program

DMIS template adds DMESW statement support:
$$ Set.OutputCtrl.CustomHeader({header}:{Data})
Bracket and content in brace in template statement is entries by user, colon and content in entry;
{header} and {Data} can use variable, for example as below:

Table Style Header

Default blank 4x4 output table is created
Double click a Cell to enter design mode. Tool window is created
Double click a Cell in design mode enter Cell assignment. Selecting pre-programmed Cell input

- 291 -
Current style
With Current Style, fonts for various areas of the report can be set as well as colors for all of the
report elements.

To change a font, click on the existing font name to the right of the parameter you would like to
change and click on the font selection button with the 3 dots. Select the desire font fron the font
selection dialog and press the OK button to close.
To change a color, click on the existing color bar, and then on the button to the right with 3 dots.
Select the desired color from the color chooser dialog and press OK to close the dialog.

Once a custom style has been created, it can be saved by right clicking on the Current Style node
and selecting Save as custom style

- 292 -
Custom output style
In addition to the default style, RationalDMIS includes 3 predefined custom styles.
Under the Storage Styles node, click the check-box to the left of the desired style to enable or
disable the style. When the check-box is checked on, the style will be used.

Only 1 custom style may be selected at a time.

- 293 -
Output - Various Output Forms Samples

Traditional output report

A standard traditional report can be generated by dragging features from the Feature database or
tolerances from the Tolerance database and dropping onto the output view, and/or by
Tolerancing features in the tolerance panel.
Multiple selection from the database area can use the standard Windows “CTRL” or “SHIFT”
while selecting items to select multiple items.

Output report with texts and pictures

Text and pictures can be added to a report to provide additional information.
To add text, click the Add Text icon in the output toolbar and add the text in the text-box near the
bottom of the report. Press the “ENTER” key when complete.
To add graphics from the graphical report view or the form error view, click on the “To Report”
icon to send the image directly to the report. Please refer to “Graphical report view” or “Form
error report” for additional information.

- 294 -
Graphical Report Example 1 Graphical Report Example 2

Form error report Example 1 Form error report Example 2

User customized output report

As shown in the Output Setup section of this document, extensive customization can be applied
to the report to ensure the report meets the needs of the end user.

Screen Output Report Example 1

- 295 -
EXCEL form output report
If Office XP or above is installed with the correct Microsoft OWC dlls, then the Excel view icon will
be enabled.
Click on the “switch to Excel” icon to switch to the Excel spreadsheet report view.

Report data can be added by dragging features from the Feature database or tolerances from the
Tolerance database and dropping onto the output view, and/or by Tolerancing features in the
tolerance panel.

More advanced Excel features such as writing to specific cells, or reading from specific cells etc
can be implemented using the NeptuneEXCEL functions. Please refer to the NeptuneEXCEL
documentation for additional information.

SPC statistical graph report

If the license controlled SPC module is enabled, Items can be statistically monitored by dragging
from the Feature database or the Tolerance database and dropping onto the SPC data pane.

Please refer to the SPC Module documentation for more details.

- 296 -
When items have been added for SPC monitoring, they will indicate the number of runs with a
number to the right of the item in the SPC data pane. When the sample spc requirement is met,
SPC charts can be created by dragging and spc item from the SPC data pane and dropping onto
the graphical report view. Please refer to the SPC Module documentation for more
details.

SPC Statistical Graph Report Example 1

Custom views
If a Custom View has been created, it can be added to the report by dragging from the Custom
View database and dropping directly on the Output view.

- 297 -
Graphical reports
If a graphical report has been saved, it can be dragged from the Custom Views database and
dropped directly onto the output view.

Note: When adding graphical reports to the output report, the graphical report will have a white
background.
Form error reports
If a form error report has been saved, it can be dragged from the Custom Views database and
dropped directly onto the output view.

- 298 -
Note: When adding graphical reports to the output report, the graphical report will have a white
background.

- 299 -
Graphical Report View

The Graphical Report view displays data windows with leader lines going to the reported features.
Selecting the “Graphical Report” tab or pressing the F6 key will display the Graphical Report View.
The toolbar will update to display the tools associated with the Graphical Report View.

Features or tolerances can be added to the graphical report by dragging from the Feature
database or from the Tolerance database and dropping directly onto the Graphical Report View.
Once dropped, a data window will appear with a leader line pointing to the feature or features
involved.

The Graphical Report view is comprised of the main graphical report windows and the report
setup panel and the graphical report toolbar. The graphical report toolbar replaces the existing
toolbar when switching to the Graphical Report view.

- 300 -
Graphical Report - Toolbar

The functions of most of icons in graphical report toolbar are the same as those in the Graphics
View toolbar with the exception of a few icons specific to the Graphical Report view.

View Selector
Identical to the View Selector icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions.

View Mode Selector

Identical to the View Mode Selector icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions.

Zoom Window
Identical to the Zoom Window icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions.

View all
Identical to the View All icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View toolbar
functions.

View Rotation
Identical to the View Rotation icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions.

Display Settings
Identical to the View Rotation icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions

Color Settings
Identical to the View Rotation icon in the Graphics View. Please refer to the Graphics View
toolbar functions

- 301 -
 Selection Alignment

After choosing an alignment mode, selecting a graphical report data window will align it using the
selected method.

Hide feature without graphical report

When “Hide feature without graphical report” is clicked, all graphics items that are not related to
the graphical report will be removed.

Create new graphical report

When “Create new graphical report” is clicked, the current graphical report will be removed and
a new graphical report will be started. RationalDMIS will prompt to save the old graphical report.

Save

Click on the Save icon and then select one of the 3 options.
Save as graphical report: After entering a report name in the dialog box, the graphical report will
be saved to the CustomView database.

- 302 -
Save as PDF file

A dialog box with PDF settings will be displayed. Click on the button with the 3 dots at the upper
right to select a save path. Select a template drop down. Select a window arrangement option
from the list:
Auto Arrange will automatically arrange the data windows regardless of where they are at the
time of saving.
Not change report position will keep the data windows exactly where they are.
Edit report position manually will permit ‘tweaking’ of the report windows before saving.

Save as Picture
Save as picture will save the graphical report as an image.
The available image formats are jpg, bmp, gif or png.

Graphical report settings

Graphical report settings is a toggle on/off icon. When Graphical report settings is on, a panel will
be displayed with all the object of a graphical report in a tree fashion.

- 303 -
Each node of the tree expands to display the parameters for the selected object. There is a
check-box to the left of each parameter. If the box is checked on, then the parameter will be
reported. If the check-box is empty, then the parameter will not be reported. Click on the box to
change between checked and empty.
The parameter selections in the example image to the left show
X,Y,Z and D checked. X,Y,Z and diameter data will be reported in
the data window in the graphical report as seen below.

Graphical report name selection drop down

Each saved graphical report name is listed in the graphical report name selection drop down.
Click on the arrow on the right to expand the drop-down then select a saved report from the list
of names. The selected report will be displayed.

To output
Clicking the “to output” icon will send the current graphical report to the output report. This
enables the inclusion of a graphical report directly in the data report.

Icon of size marking:

When this icon is pressed, graphical report window area will enter size marking status; please
refer to help menu of “size marking” for descriptions related to size marking function.

- 304 -
Graphical Report - Main Window

The main graphical report window behaves the same as the graphics view, except features or CAD
cannot be selected. Features from the Feature database, evaluated tolerances from the Tolerance
database and SPC from the SPC Data window can all be dragged and dropped onto the main
graphical report window. A line extends from the report data window to the feature graphic.

Graphical report data window

The parameters shown in the graphical report data window are set by the feature/tolerance type
and by the settings in Graphical Report setup.

The label name of the feature or tolerance is shown in the upper left of the graphical report data
window. Between the label name and the reported data, there could be a red line, a green line or
no line.
In cases where there is only a nominal and no actual feature is available there will
be a black line or no line between the label name and the data.

A green line indicates the feature is in tolerance.

A red line indicates the feature is out of tolerance.

- 305 -
The feature data is shown below the line area. The data is arranged in rows and columns and the
appearance/content is dictated by the report setup.

For measured or constructed features, depending on

the report setup, there can be up to 6 data columns.
The 1st column on the left is the parameter label.
The next column is the nominal value, shown in black
rd
text. The 3 column is the actual data shown in green text if in tolerance and red text if out of
tolerance. The next column is the deviation from nominal, again shown in green text if in
tolerance and red text if out of tolerance. The last two columns are the upper and lower
tolerances which are shown in blue text.

Tolerances display a green or red line at the top of the graphical report data window. The line is
green if the evaluation is in tolerance and red if out of tolerance. As there are different types of
tolerances, the type of data and the arrangement of data differs. Graphical report data windows
for tolerances use one of three different formats to cover differing reporting requirements.

Format 1
GD&T tolerances that have are evaluated based on a deviation from zero are included in the 1st
format. There are normally three data columns. The first column shows the deviation from 0, the
2nd column shows the unilateral tolerance zone, while the 3rd column shows the trend.
Tolerances of this type include:
angularity
Perpendicularity
2D/3D position
Cylindricity,
Concentricity
Circular runout
Total runout
Roundness
Flatness
Straightness
Symmetry

Format 2
The 2nd format displays tolerances that are based on a defined nominal value. These tolerances
include, distance between, angle between, diameter, radius, coordinate location, width and cone
angle. This format includes 6 columns of data with the 1st left most column showing the
nominal value in black text. The 2nd column is the actual value shown green if in tolerance or red
if out of tolerance. The 3rd column is deviation also in green or red. The next 2 columns are the
lower and upper tolerances in black. The last column shows the trend.

- 306 -
Format 3
The third format encompasses point profile, profile of a line and profile of a surface. There are
four columns of data with the 1st column showing the deviation. The 2nd and third column show
the lower and upper tolerances and the 4th column shows the trend.

PTMEAS points
When PTMEAS points from a measurement are reported, the left of the data window will show
the point index number, while the right side shows the deviation. The left and the right are
separated by a “|”. There is a green or red line at the bottom of the data window. The line will be
green if the point is in tolerance and red if out of tolerance.

A vector diagram can be displayed both with a measured point feature and a PTMEAS point.
When a vector diagram is selected, deviation values of the vectors for X,Y and Z will be displayed.
A red arrow indicates X direction (I vector), a green arrow indicates Y direction
(J vector) and a blue arrow indicates Z direction (K vector).

The vector diagram must be enabled in the Graphical Report setup. In Graphical Report set,
expand the “General” node. Make sure the check-box to the left of “Vector Diagram” is checked.

Graphical report window TEXT supports multiline display. To set a TEXT display a multiline display,
use right mouse menu to select Multiline";

- 307 -
Graphical report supports user-defined ‘Add Text’.
Click ‘Add Text’ with the mouse right button in graphical report, position of textbox is position
point-selected by the mouse; it can add multiple texts.

The background of added text can be white or transparent; click text with the mouse right button
can set;

Graphical report Text window popup menu "Text Format" to change the Font size and Color of
selection window

Create DMIS can be recorded as program;

$$Set.GraphReport.DataWin.Tex(TestofSizeand Color).at(90,384).Size(20).Color(255,255,255).Transparent

Graphical report node in DMIS template added the following template statement:
$$ Set.GraphReport.DataWin.Text({Input text here}).at({pixelx},{pixely}){.Transparent}

ALL Output
To create DMIS OUTPUT statement for all features in the current graphical report session

- 308 -
Graphical report supports to add rectangle box to label.
The aim is to prompt user to notice content in the box; position and size of box can be adjusted by
mouse, same report page can add multiple rectangle box;
DMIS template adds corresponding statement support;
$$ Set.GraphReport.DataWin.Windef({Width},{Height}).at({pixelx},{pixely})

Modify Column
To Show/Hide each parameter.
Manual modifed column display window will not be controlled by the general display setting in
the Setup

Auto Arrange
Graphical report data windows can either be arranged by the user, or can be Auto Arranged by
RationalDMIS. Auto Arrange will automatically arrange the data windows in an effective manner.

- 309 -
The Auto Arrange setting is in Application Setup under Graphic Report Option.

- 310 -
Graphical Report - Graphical Report Setup

Color settings
Various color settings can be set under the color setting node.
To change the color click to the right of the existing color bar, then click on the button with 3 dots,
and select a different color in the color chooser dialog.

Dev OutTol color

Dev OutTol color allows the selection of colors for out of tolerance upper and lower conditions.

Trend color
Trend color allows the selection of colors for Upper, Lower in and out of tolerance conditions.

- 311 -
Column option

The Column option allows the selection of columns to display in the graphical report data
windows. There is a check-box to the left of each column name. If the check-box is checked on,
then the column will be displayed. If not checked, then the column will not be displayed. Click on
the check-box to change between on and off.
All columns displayed below.

Only the Dev, Tolerance and trend columns shown.

Column Order
To change display order, Drag a display item and Drop onto another item to display after this
item.

- 312 -
Text setting
Text setting allows the modification of descriptive text displayed in the graphic report data
windows.

Here the text for ‘D’ has been set to ‘DIA’.

General setting
The General settings node contains settings that are global to the graphical report.
There is a check-box to the left of each setting. If the check-box is checked, then the setting is
enabled. If the check-box is empty, then the setting is disabled. Click on the check-box to change
the state of the check-box.

- 313 -
Update report when setting changes
When “Update report when setting changes” is checked on, anytime a setting has changed the
graphical report will automatically update to show those changes.

Show Feat title

When “Show Feat Title” is enabled, the names of the columns are displayed at the top of each
column.

Show Feature Label

When “Show Feature Label” is enabled, the feature label name is shown in the upper left.

Show Tolerance Label

When “Show Tolerance Label” is enabled, the tolerance label name will be displayed.

- 314 -
Show Eval feature Label
To Show/Hide of Feature label

Show Description of Tolerance Datum

When “Show Description of Tolerance Datum” is enabled, where possible the GD&T feature
control frame and the coordinate system feature labels will be displayed.

Vector diagram
A vector diagram can be displayed both with a measured point feature and a PTMEAS point.
When a vector diagram is enabled, deviation values of the vectors for X,Y and Z will be displayed.
A red arrow indicates X direction (I vector), a green arrow indicates Y direction
(J vector) and a blue arrow indicates Z direction (K vector).

No Tol indicator for label only

When “No Tol indicator for label only” is enabled, a feature label balloon will be displayed
without tolerance information. When disabled, tolerance indicators are displayed.
No Tol indicator for label only enabled.

No Tol indicator for label only disabled.

Show Gradient Background

When Show Gradient Background is enabled, the graphic report data windows will have a
gradient background.

- 315 -
When Show Gradient Background is enabled, the graphic report data windows will have a single
color background.

Show Out Tolerance Item Only

When “Show Out Tolerance Item Only” is enabled, only out of tolerance evaluations will be
displayed.

Don’t Show Zero Tol Item

When “Don’t Show Zero Tol Item” is enabled, if a feature has parameters that have a zero
tolerance, then no tolerance data is shown.

When ‘Don’t show Zero Tol Item” is checked, trend evaluation will be not involved and this item
will be showed in black, no more colors to distinguish;

All Point Report Actual Projected On To Nominal

When “All Point Report Actual Projected On To Nominal” is enabled, all point features will project
the actual measurement onto the nominal measurement for the major vector axis only.
When disabled, no point projection occurs.

- 316 -
Point Reports in Major Coordinate Only:
When “Point Reports in Major Coordinate Only” is enabled, only the coordinate axis for the major
vector will be output. If a point has a vector close to 0,0,1, then only Z will be reported.
If a point has a vector of close to -1,0,0, then only X will be reported.

Arrow style for tolerance deviation: graphical report tolerance guide line can be showed by
arrow style.

Decimal place
Click on the existing decimal place value to enter a new decimal place value.

Report font
Click to the right of the existing font name, then click on
the button with 3 dots to show the Font selection dialog.
Select font settings then click OK to select the font and
close the dialog.

- 317 -
Form Error Report

The Form Error Report graphically displays the form deviation of a feature.
Selecting the “Form Error Report” tab or pressing the F7 key will display the Form Error Report.
The toolbar will update to display the tools associated with the Form Error Report.

The Form Error Report is made up of the graphical form error report and the form error report
toolbar.

Form Error window supports picture attachment. DMIS template adds statement that supports
for run time picture insertion.
$$Set.FormError.Picture(C:\Neptune\NeptuneSolution\bin\Release\Image\3.jpg).at(585,228,100,
69)

- 318 -
Form Error Report - Toolbar

The Form Error Report toolbar is located at the top of the Form Error Report graphical window.

Set Operation Type

Form analysis can switch between a single feature or multiple features.

Set View Type

The form error can be displayed as cloud dots , vector whiskers or a color mapped

line .

Link Errors
All of the form error points can be linked with a line for easier viewing.

Show arrow
Form error points can be displayed as arrows pointing to positive or negative deviation.

- 319 -
 Show Index
Show Index will display the index numbers of the form points. The number of index windows can
be user controlled with the “Set number of output point” drop down.

Switch view
Form error report views can switch between rectangular views and perspective views.

Default view
Default view will return the form error report view back to its default state.

Amplification slider
The error indicators for form error reports can be magnified for easier viewing.
When the Amplification Slider icon is clicked, a small slider will appear. Move the slider to the
right to increase the magnification, or enter a value in the magnification text-box to the right.

- 320 -
 Definition of upper / lower tolerance (warning band)
To define the upper and lower tolerance bands, click on
the “Definition of upper / lower tolerance” icon. A dialog
will be presented to set the Upper/Lower tolerance and
also set the Warning Band Lower band and Upper band
values. If “Enable Warning Band” is checked on, then the
upper and lower warning bands will be visible in the form
error graphics along with the upper/lower tolerance
bands.

Decimal places
Use dicimal places setting for saving PDF file

Line width
Click to display a dialog to set the width of various lines.

- 321 -
 Selection range

When the display is showing the color mapped line, a click on Selection range will present a
re-sizable and movable selection window to select portions of the line to report.

Select external point

Selects points outside of the selection window

Select internal point

Select points inside the selection window

Add internal point

Add a point to the internal point selection

Select all points

Select all points regardless of location inside or outside of the selection window.

Input range

- 322 -
Enter a range to analyze either through entering a min/man value indicating the point indexes, or
by entering min max coordinate system values along an axis.

Reset selected point

Ignore the selected point.

Fitting
Select axis to define a best fit curve through the points.

Range of Form error

Range of form error will present a summary window with both graphical and numerical form
analysis.

Min / Max error

Min/Max error displays windows to shown the point index number, form deviation and
coordinate location of Max and Min errors.

- 323 -
Set number of output points

The Form error report Interval drop-down sets the interval of points reported in the output
boxes.
The interval is in a percent of the total number of points. 10% will display leaders and boxes to
10% of the points, were as 90% will display leaders and report boxes to 90% of the points.
Additional settings include displaying only the min/max, showing no points or adding specific
points. When Add New Point is clicked a small window will be displayed that allows new points to
be added either by an interval (percentage as above) or by a range of points.

Rotation
The Rotation text-box will rotate the object by the entered value. All rotations are per the right
hand rule.

Graphical report and Form Error report window Toolbar adds Auto Arrange Toggle Icon. It is the
same function as in the Application Setup. Adding here is for those who use Auto arrange and
manual adjustment.

- 324 -
 Background color
Click Background color to display a color setting dialog. The color setting dialog allows the
selection of colors for a number of form error report interface settings.

Background Color
Text Color
Nom Feat Color
Act Feat Color
Upper Tol Color
Lower Tol Color
Max Err Color
Min Err Color
In Tol Color
Upper Warning Band Color
Lower Warning Band Color

New Form Error

Clear content in FORM window

Save

- 325 -
Click to save the form error report to the Custom View database.

To output window
Clicking the “to output” icon will send the current form error report the output report. This
enables the inclusion of a graphical form error report directly in the data report.

Setting
Setting option contains Color \Decimal\Font size
Large font is useful for Picture Layout Design text readability.

- 326 -
Form Error Report - Main Window

To create a form error report, drag a feature from the Feature database and drop onto the form
error report.

If the Operation type is set to “multiple”, then multiple features can be on the graphical report at
the same time.

- 327 -
Graph error tolerance parameter box
The tolerance parameter box displays the feature label, evaluation
method. Upper/lower tolerances, min and max errors and point indexes
of min/max errors.

Schematic diagram of error graph (color map)

When a form error report is created, all of the points are assigned colors depending on their form
error values. A color map denotes what values the color indicate.

3d Curve form error displays tolerance band. The tolerance curve is generated using Nominal
Curve and Nominal Ptmeas point and vector.

Form Error window reports Standard Deviation

- 328 -
Patern display in form error window
a. Patern must be POINT group, only POINTS in this Patern.
b. Point to Point is connected with straight line.
c. Points sequence is responsible of Users.
d. Upper tolerance and Lower tolerance are using defult PROFP.

- 329 -
Double Database

The RationalDMIS interface displays two database areas simultaneously.

These two database windows show different databases at the same time. At the top of each
database window, there is a TAB toolbar. Use the mouse to click on the tab at the top of the
database to present a database toolbar. Select an icon to switch to that database.

Database navigation can be made a bit quicker by setting the “Data Window Shortcut”.
The data window shortcut allows the selection of often used database icons to be added to the
top of the databases. A click on these icons will bring up that database.

To enable the “data window shortcut” click on File in the main menu, then click on Window, then
select “Data window shortcut”

- 330 -
 Feature database (Alt + F)
Contains all measured and constructed features as well as CAD models.

Coordinate database (Alt + C)

Contains all coordinate systems and coordinate labels.

Probe database (Alt + S)

Contains sensors, calibration gage, rotary tables and change racks

Tolerance database (Alt + T)

Contains all tolerances, tolerance results and toleranced features.

Variable database (Alt + V)

Contains DMIS variables and DMIS macros used in High Level Language.

DMIS program database (Alt + P)

Contains a DMIS program and some programming tools. Used to start and stop a DMIS program.

User-defined view database (Alt + W)

Also referred to as Custom View. Stores all saved views, saved graphical reports and saved form
error reports.

Measurement methods (Alt + M)

Contains scanning and path generation routines.

SPC statistics (Alt + X)

Stores SPC data.
This is an optional add on RationalDMIS module.

Blade (ALT+B)
Contains blade information and blade manipulation routines.
This is an optional add on RationalDMIS module.

NOTE: Only 1 instance of a database can be displayed at a time. Duplicate databases cannot be
displayed side by side.

- 331 -
Feature Database

The Feature database contains all measured and constructed features as well as CAD models.

Click the Feature database icon in the dual database or press “ATL+F”.
It is divided into two columns: a nominal feature column on the left, and an actual feature
column on the right. A nominal feature is always created before an actual feature. The nominal
feature is what the corresponding actual feature should be. An actual feature MUST have a
nominal feature, but a nominal feature is not required to have an actual feature.

- 332 -
Feature Database - Drag & Drop of Nominal Features and Actual Features

A simple drag and drop of a feature from the feature database to a construction, or tolerance etc
greatly speeds up operation. The drag operation can be started from both the nominal column of
the database and the actual column. In some cases dramatically different results can come from
calculations using nominal features vs using the corresponding actual feature.
If in doubt as to if a nominal feature or actual feature is to be used, use the actual feature. In
most cases the actual feature correct.

When dragging a nominal feature vs dragging an actual feature, there is a distinct color difference
as soon as the drag operation begins.
A nominal feature will have a yellow background when dragging.

An actual feature will have a red section on the left of the background.

- 333 -
Feature Database - Point Cloud

The Point Cloud node is located at the bottom of the Feature database.
A point cloud is different in the Feature database in that the actual and nominal columns are not
used as such.
The nominal column contains the point cloud label, while the actual column displays the number
of point in the point cloud feature.

Note: If separate point data is included in an IGES or STEP file, the point data will become a point
cloud.

Point cloud operation

Point cloud operations are accomplished by a right click either on the point cloud feature or on
the Point Cloud node.

Enable operator
Enable Operator can be selected from a menu presented on a right click of the point cloud node.
Once selected Enable Operator will display a point cloud selection window. The selection window
is re-sizable and movable to select points from the graphics view. Details are provided later on in
this topic.

Delete all
Delete all can be activated from a right click on the point cloud node. It will delete all point clouds.

- 334 -
Read data from data file
When “Read data from data file” is clicked, a file open dialog is displayed to select the file path of
the point cloud data-file. The file must be in ASCII. The specific format and separators can be
selected in the dialog.

Read from STL

Read from STL behaves in the same manner as above with the exception of the file format being
STL. (STL is a CAD output format that contains a listing of XYZ data.

Export to IGES
A point cloud can be exported to IGES with a right click on the point Cloud node and selecting
Export to IGES. The point cloud can be exported in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or the
currently active part coordinate system (PCS). A save as dialog will be presented too selected a
path and enter a file name to save the point cloud.
NOTE: If Export To IGES is clicked in the root point cloud node, all existing point clouds combined
into a single IGES file.

Export to text
In the same manner as Export To IGES, Export to Text will export the point cloud in either MCS or
PCS. The exported data will be CSV ASCII text. A save as dialog will be presented too selected a
path and enter a file name to save the point cloud.
NOTE: If Export To Text is clicked in the root point cloud node, all existing point clouds combined
into a single text file.

A right click on an individual point cloud under the Point Cloud node will present a menu for
individual point clouds.

Delete
Right click and select Delete to remove the current point cloud.
Hide Feature
Right click and select Hide Feature to hide the current point cloud.
Show this feature, Hide all the others
Right click and select Show this Feature, Hide all the others to hide the all of the point clouds
except the current point cloud.
Flash Feature
Right click and select Flash Feature to flash the point cloud on and off.

- 335 -
Seek Graphic Feature
Right click and select Seek Graphical Feature to zoom into the current point cloud.
Generate Meas
Right click and select Generate Measure to automatically generate a measurement path based on
the CAD model for the current point cloud.
Export to IGES
A point cloud can be exported to IGES with a right click on the point Cloud node and selecting
Export to IGES. The point cloud can be exported in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or the
currently active part coordinate system (PCS). A save as dialog will be presented too selected a
path and enter a file name to save the point cloud.
Export to text
In the same manner as Export To IGES, Export to Text will export the point cloud in either MCS or
PCS. The exported data will be CSV ASCII text. A save as dialog will be presented too selected a
path and enter a file name to save the point cloud.
Re-sequence
Right click and select Re-sequence to change the point measurement sequence of the current
point cloud.
Drag and drop operations
Dragging a pint cloud label and dropping onto the feature Point node will create a single point
representing the centroid of all the points in the dropped point cloud.
Dragging and dropping point clouds onto other feature nodes in the feature database will create
a best-fit feature from the point cloud.

Drag-n-Drop point cloud to a Surface label will create actual surface using point cloud data.
There are 2 options：

Point cloud import supports read into the triangular mesh;

- 336 -
- 337 -
Feature Database - Feature Selection

Feature selections can be either a single feature or multiple features.

A single feature can be selected by using the mouse to click the desired feature.
Multiple contiguous features can be selected by clicking on a single feature at the start of the
group of features, then pressing the SHIFT key while selecting the feature at the end of the group.
All features between will be selected.
To select non-grouped features, hold down the CTRL key while selecting features.

Drag-and-drop can be used with multiple selections as well as single feature selections. When the
selection is complete, drag the feature(s) to the desired location and drop.
Note: Some drop locations might not accept drooping of multiple features.

When the Pick Option Toolbar is set to either Select Nominal or Select Actual, multiple features
can be selected from the graphics view by holding down the CTRL key while dragging an elastic
band window around the desired features. A single feature can be selected by clicking on the
graphic of that feature.

- 338 -
Feature Database - Rename Feature Label

A feature is identified by its label. A label is nothing more than a name. Only one label can be
used to identify one feature. For example, you cannot have both a plane and a circle called “CR1”,
likewise you cannot have two circles called “CR1”.
By default features are given automatically incrementing feature labels. Once a feature is defined,
the label name of the feature will be shown in the feature database. The feature label can be
changed either before the feature is created or in the Feature Database. To change the feature
label, click the label twice (note: not a double click but two slower clicks). The feature label will
then become editable. Enter the new name then hit the enter key to accept.

Note*: DMIS label name

A DMIS label
The length of the label is 1-64 characters consisting of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, dash ’-‘, period ’.’ and
underscore ‘_’.

- 339 -
Feature Database - Feature Properties

To view the properties of a feature, double click on the feature label in the Feature database. The
2nd window of the dual database will change to a feature property page. All parameters for that
feature are shown in the feature property page. Within the property page, the values of a
parameter may be viewed, nominal values can be changed, raw point can be accessed etc.

The property page includes the label of the feature, geometrical parameters of the feature in the
current coordinate system, current measurement unit, the current angular format, and
parameters of the feature creation.
In the property page above:
the coordinate system is Cartesian (Crdtype=CART)
the sensor used was ROOTSN4 (Sen=ROOTSN4)
the active coordinate system was CADM_1 (Crd=CADM_1)
the actual feature was created at 4:08 Tuesday Nov 25, 2014 (D&T(A))
probe compensations was on (Prcmp=On)
the probe radius was 0.514903 (PR=0.514903)
there were 6 points measured to create the feature (PT with 6 points listed), the measured points
are always shown as probe compensated points.

Some of the parameters shown in the property page can be changed by the user at anytime.
The coordinate system can be changed for Cartesian to polar by clicking just to the right of the
currently shown coordinate type and selecting polar from the drop down list. In the case of

- 340 -
changing between Cartesian and polar, the values do not change, but the underlying feature
coordinate type has changed.
Nominal parameters may be modified in the feature property page by double clicking the
nominal parameter to be changed. Enter the new value in the edit box, then click the green check
mark in the upper left of the property page to save the changes.

Some features may have changeable algorithms. In the image above, the feature is calculated
using the “Least square” method. To change the current algorithm to a different algorithm, click
to the right of the current algorithm and select a different algorithm from the drop down list.
Click the green check box in the upper left of the property page to save the changes. The feature
will immediately be re-fit using the new algorithm. The property page will automatically update
to show any changes.

The points used in the measurement of the feature can be used to create DMIS code or to create
separate point features. To access the points, expand the PT node and then click on the Act points
to select the desired points. The points can then be dropped onto the DMIS program to create
separate PTMEAS statements or can be dropped onto the Point node of the Feature database to
create individual points. Those points can now be used in constructions, remeasured etc. If there
are a large number of points in the drag & drop, the status bar at the bottom of RationalDMIS will
show the progress.

- 341 -
A CAD Model property page is quite different to feature property pages. To access a CAD property
page, double click on the CAD model in the Feature database.

CAD model properties:

a. The 2 main root nodes are “Faces” and “Wires”. During the import of the CAD model, the
faces and wires are separated into the 2 nodes.
b. Just to the left of each listed item is a check-box to show/hide that graphic. If the
check-box is checked, the feature is shown If not checked, the feature is hidden. Where
there are graphical elements under a “layer”, then the check-box to the left can be used to
show/hide the entire layer.
c. The colors of the graphic items can be changed. Click on the item name and select a color
from the color picker dialog. Click OK to accept the change. Where there are graphical
elements under a “layer”, then the check-box to the left can be used to assign a color to
the entire layer.
d. A new layer may be created by right clicking on the root node and selecting New Layer
from the menu. An empty new layer will be created. A name can be given to the layer or
the default “Layer 1” will be used.

e. To rename an item, click twice on the item to make the name editable. Enter the new
name and hit enter on the keyboard, or click anywhere outside the edit-box to accept the
change.
f. Each graphic item can be dragged and dropped to a “layer” and in turn each “layer” can be
dragged and dropped into another “layer”. A Layer can be dragged & dropped onto the
root node.
g. To select items graphically from the CAD model, press the CTRL key while clicking on a
location on the CAD mode. The corresponding item will be highlighted in the CAD property
page.
h. To delete a layer, right click on the desired layer node and select Delete from the menu.
The graphical features under the layer will automatically be moved to the root node.

- 342 -
Feature Database - Parent Node Right Click Menu

There are 2 different menus available to the feature database feature nodes. The parent or
feature type node differs from the feature node.
To access the parent of feature type node menu, right click on the desired feature type node.

When right clicking on the parent node, the right click can occur in the nominal column or the
actual column. If right clicked in the nominal column, the menu applies to nominal features
where applicable. If right clicked in the actual column, the menu applies to actual features where
applicable.

Hide All/Show All

“Hide all/Show all” is a toggle menu item. Show all will show all of the nominal or actual features
of the selected feature type. When the features are shown, Hide All is active to enable hiding of
all the nominal or actual features.

Delete All or Reset All Actuals

If the right click to show the menu occurred in the nominal column, then Delete All will delete all
of the nominal features and all the actual features.
If the right click occurred in the Actual column, then Reset All Actuals will be shown. Reset All
Actuals will removed the actual measured features, but will not touch the actual features.

Pickable
“Pickable” is a toggle menu it. If pickable is set either the nominal or the actual features will
appear in the graphics as solid model items. Those items can be picked from the graphics to
select Feature database items or can be used in drag&drop operations.
If “Pickable” is set to “Not Pickable”, then the graphics of the items will appear to be
semi-translucent.

Label Search
“Label Search” will present a small text-box at the top of the
Feature database to allow the entry of a feature label to
search for.

- 343 -
Add Prefix
A prefix is a user defined prefix to a feature name. The prefix will group features using the same
prefix in a group and will auto-increment. Right click and select Add Prefix to display a dialog.
Enter the name of the new prefix and click OK.

When features are grouped together under their own prefix they are much easier to manage.

Sort Ascending/Sort Descending

When Sort Ascending or Sort Descending, the feature type under the right click will be sorted
alphabetically either ascending or descending

Sort All Ascending/Sort All Descending

When Sort All Ascending, or Sort All Descending is selected, all features will be sorted
alphabetically and displayed either in ascending or descending order.

- 344 -
Feature Database – Feature Label Right Click Menu

Delete
Delete will delete both the nominal and actual feature.

Show Feature/Hide Feature

Show Feature/Hide Feature is a toggle menu item. Show feature will show the selected feature in
the graphics view. Hide feature will hide the feature.

Show this feature, Hide all the others

Right click and select Show this Feature, Hide all the others to hide the all of the features except
the current selected feature.

Flash Feature
Right click and select Flash Feature to flash the selected feature on and off to make it easier to
distinguish the feature in the graphics view.

Seek Graphic Feature

Right click and select Seek Graphical Feature to zoom into the currently selected feature. The
feature will be in the center of the graphics view and becomes the center of graphical rotation.

Set as zoom target

“Set as zoom target” will create a nominal measurement target which can guide the user to the
correct measurement location. This is very useful for manual machines.

- 345 -
Auto Measure
The actions of Auto Measure depend on the status of Learn Mode.
If Learn mode is off, auto measure will automatically generate a measurement path and measure
the feature immediately. If Learn mode is ON, then DMIS measurement code will be added to the
program, but the feature will not be measured until the measurement code is executed in the
program.

Vecbld Measure
The actions of Vecbld Measure depend on the status of Learn Mode.
If Learn mode is off, Vecbld Measure will automatically generate vector points and a
measurement path and measure the feature immediately. If Learn mode is ON, then DMIS vecbld
measurement code will be added to the program, but the feature will not be measured until the
measurement code is executed in the program.

Man Measure
The actions of Man Measure depend on the status of Learn Mode.
If Learn mode is off, man measure will automatically switch to the histogram operation panel to
begin manual measurement immediately. If Learn mode is ON, then DMIS manual measurement
code will be added to the program, but the feature will not be measured until the measurement
code is executed in the program.

When using Auto Measure, Vecbld Measure or Man Measure, the number of points used in the
measurement is the user defined minimum points. The minimum points can be set in the Settings
operation panel under “User Min Pts”.

When the first feature is measured, feature index will skip to the next one automatically.

Check Vector
“Check Vector” is used to check vector direction of selected POINT feature and modify if needed.
A right click on “Check Vector” will display a small toolbar at the top of the Feature database.

There are 4 icons on the check vector toolbar starting from the left are “Accept”, “Reverse”,
“Preview” and “Exit”. The extreme right on the check vector toolbar displays the label of the
vector being checked.
When Check Vector is selected, the feature vector will flash in/off in the graphics view. The
“Preview” icon will repeat that flashing to locate the feature and vector. If the vector does indeed
need to be reversed, click on the “Reverse Vector” icon. Click the green “Accept” arrow to accept
the changes and close. Click the “Exit” icon at any time to exit without saving changes.

- 346 -
Go to DMIS Definition/ DMIS MEAS
“Go to DMIS Definition” will search through the DMIS program for the definition code for the
selected feature. The code will be highlighted in the DMIS database and selected as the current
line. “Go to DMIS MEAS” will search through the DMIS program for the measurement code for
the selected feature. The code will be highlighted in the DMIS database and selected as the
current line.
If there is no code in DMIS database, the software will prompt ‘no matching data found’, and the
prompt will be closed automatically.

Redraw Feature
“Redraw Feature” is only available when there is no graphic for the feature in the graphics view.
If a feature has been hidden with “Hide Feature”, “Redraw Feature” will redraw the feature
making it visible again.

Patern Bestfit
Is supported when Patern contains all POINTS or CURVES.
Patern is a group of Feature. Patern bestfit will change all feature nominal in this Patern.

DMIS supports PATERN bestfit

CONST/PATERN,F(label),BF,FA(label),F(label)

Correct Ptmeas Vector

The option is enabled when current sensor is non contact (R=0). Non contact sensor may be
possible to have Ptmeas Vector not away from the measurement surface. This function is to
recalculate Ptmeas Vector and replace the ones from controller. There is an assumption that the
first Ptmeas Vector is away from measurement surface.

- 347 -
DMIS support:
FA({label}) = FEAT/GCURVE, VEC, NORMALIZE

- 348 -
Feature Database - Plane Point Generation

If a nominal for a plane feature has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will
present a menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected plane.

When “Generate Points” has been clicked, a plane point generation panel will replace the 2nd
panel in the dual database.
Ref Feat
Ref Feat is an optional setting whereby a feature can be
dragged and dropped onto the ref feat text-box to set the
direction of the point generation.
# of Pts in U/# of Pts in V
Sets the number of points in U and V directions. The total
number of points us U_points*V_points.
U start clear distance/V start clear distance
Defines the distance away from the edge of the feature to
begin point generation.
U end clear distance/V end clear distance
Defines the distance away from the edge of the feature to
finish point generation.
Reverse UV points
U points become V points, while V points become U points.

- 349 -
If the points are generated from a nominal CAD entity as in the example below, any hole or
obstruction that is not part of the selected feature will not generate measurement points.

Generate Points II
Generate Points II is similar to Plane "Defined Guided Path scan".

- 350 -
Feature Database - Circle Point Generation

If a nominal for a circle has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will present a
menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected circle.

The “Starting Point” is established by RationalDMIS as the

location closest to the current sensor location. This can be
edited by clicking on the current Starting Point XYZ values
and entering new values.

Alternately the starting position can be edited graphically

by clicking on “Cur Pos”. Make sure the pick mode is

“Create/Edit Points on Geometry” and click the

desired start location on CAD. A small ball will be
presented to show the new start position.
The Starting Point can also be defined by clicking on the
Cur Pos drop down and selecting one of the Min or Max
options.

Min indicates the smallest value along the axis vector of the feature in the current crd system.
Largest is the largest value.

- 351 -
Clicking the + to the left of Center Axis will expand the
node. The center axis is the center point of the nominal
definition. It can also be modified manually by entering
new values. A vector line will be displayed to show the
center location.

Radius
The radius is derived from the nominal definition and can
be edited by clicking on the value and entering a new value.

Type
Select either INNER or OUTER from the drop-down list.

Clockwise
Select either Yes for clockwise measurement or No for counter clockwise measurement.

Total Angle
The measured angle can be controlled by entering a new value in Total Angle.

Pts Count
Indicates the number of points in the measurement. Enter a new value as needed.

Lead
Lead will generate a helical measurement path using the lead value for spacing between each
revolution.

Clicking Generate Points will generate the measurement path based on the
entered parameters and display the Measure Points Management operation
panel ready to preview and/or measure.

- 352 -
Feature Database - Arc Point Generation

‘Generate Points’ function is new added by right click arc.

Starting point: starting point position can be switched by ‘Start→End’ or ‘End→Start’ method.
Center Axis: unfold center axis by '+' in front of “Center Axis”, center axis data is calculated by
nominal feature on CAD,data can be modified manually as well.

- 353 -
Radius: default data is given by nominal feature data on CAD model
Type: inner/outer circle for choose
Direction: ‘Start→End’ or ‘End→Start’ method can be selected
Pts Count: measure point counts generated on this line
Lead: it is distance value. Along with negative direction of circle axis diction, generate a helical
path on average; ‘lead’ is the distance value of measure point between two axes.
Start clearance: distance of starting point to terminal point of arc
End clearance: distance of ending point to terminal point of arc

When click ‘Generate Pts’, operation panel will skip to measurement manage pane automatically.

- 354 -
Feature Database - Sphere Point Generation

If a nominal for a sphere has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will present a
menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected sphere.

There are 3 different methods of measurement path generation for sphere features.
Click on the desired measurement path icon to select. A horizontal path will
measure the points parallel to the sphere equator. Vertical will generate
points emanating from a pole.
The horizontal method will be used in this example.
Starting Point
The “Starting Point” is established by RationalDMIS as the location closest to the current sensor
location. This can be edited by clicking on the current Starting Point XYZ values and entering new
values.

Alternately the starting point can be modified in the same manner as point generation for the
circle measurement.

- 355 -
Diameter
Displays the nominal diameter of the sphere feature.

Type
Select either INNER or OUTER from the drop down list.

Clockwise
Select either Yes for clockwise measurement or No for counter clockwise measurement.

H Angle
The angle from the pole to encompass in the measurement. An entry of 90 would indicate a
measurement from the pole to the equator.

Points per path

When there are multiple paths in the measurement enter the number of points per path.
The total number of points is points per path * number of paths.

Num Of Path
The number of paths to take in the measurement.
The total number of points is points per path * number of paths.

Generate Method
In addition to the default generation method point
generation can define where points are generated using the
‘3 planes’ or ‘2 planes’ methods.

Using a 3 plane method, the measured point locations are guided by 3 planes. The 3 planes can
be manipulated with white arrows as shown below.

- 356 -
When ‘2 planes’ are selected, point generation is guided by 2 planes.
The 2 planes can be moved by the white arrows.

- 357 -
Feature Database – Cylinder Point Generation

If a nominal for a cylinder has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will present a
menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected cylinder.

The “Starting Point” is established by RationalDMIS as the

location closest to the current sensor location. This can be
edited by clicking on the current Starting Point XYZ values
and entering new values.

Alternately the starting position can be edited graphically

by clicking on “Cur Pos”. Make sure the pick mode is

“Create/Edit Points on Geometry” and click the

desired start location on CAD. A small ball will be presented
to show the new start position.

Clicking the + to the left of Center Axis will expand the

node. The center axis is the center point of the nominal
definition. It can also be modified manually by entering
new values. A vector line will be displayed to show the
center location.

Radius
The radius is derived from the nominal definition and can be edited by clicking on the value and
entering a new value.

Type
Select either INNER or OUTER from the drop-down list.

Clockwise
Select either Yes for clockwise measurement or No for counter clockwise measurement.

- 358 -
Length
The total length (or height) of the cylinder. Enter a new value to change.

Angle
The measured angle can be controlled by entering a new value in Total Angle.

Points per path

When there are multiple paths in the measurement enter the number of points per path.
The total number of points is points per path * number of paths.

Num Of Path
The number of paths to take in the measurement.
The total number of points is points per path * number of paths.

Point generation can occur in one of 3 different patterns.

If Horizontal is selected the points will be generated

perpendicular to the cylinder axis. The start position is
always at the “bottom”, with the measurement proceeding
to the length along the cylinder vector.

If Vertical is selected the points will be generated in a series

of lines parallel the cylinder axis. The start position is always
at the “bottom”, with the measurement proceeding to the
length along the cylinder vector.

If Spiral is selected, the points will be generated in a helical

pattern. The helical pattern is generated around the
cylinder axis with the measurement starting at the
“bottom” and proceeding to the length along the cylinder
vector.

- 359 -
 Clicking Generate Points will generate the measurement path based on the
entered parameters and display the Measure Points Management operation panel ready to
preview and/or measure.

- 360 -
Feature Database - Cone Point Generation

If a nominal for a cone has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will present a
menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected cone.

The “Starting Point” is established by RationalDMIS as the

location closest to the current sensor location. This can be
edited by clicking on the current Starting Point XYZ values
and entering new values.
Alternately the starting position can be edited graphically by clicking on “Cur Pos”. Make sure the

pick mode is “Create/Edit Points on Geometry” and click the desired start location on CAD.
A small ball will be presented to show the new start position.

Clicking the + to the left of Center Axis will expand the node. The center axis is the center point of
the nominal definition. It can also be modified manually by entering new values. A vector line will
be displayed to show the center location.

- 361 -
Cone Angle
Cone angle specifies the cone included angle. Click on the value to modify.
Type
Select either INNER or OUTER from the drop-down list.
Clockwise
Select either Yes for clockwise measurement or No for counter clockwise measurement.
Length
The measurable length (or height) of the cone. Enter a new value to change.
Angle
The measured angle is the total angle being measured around the cone axis.
The measured angle can be controlled by entering a new value in Total Angle.
Points per path
When there are multiple paths in the measurement enter the number of points per path. The
total number of points is points per path * number of paths.
Num Of Path
The number of paths to take in the measurement.
The total number of points is points per path * number of paths.

Point generation for a cone can occur in one of 3 different patterns.

If Horizontal is selected the points will be generated

perpendicular to the cone axis. The start position is always
at the “bottom”, with the measurement proceeding the
length toward the cone apex.

If Vertical is selected the points will be generated in a

series of lines parallel the cone axis. The start position is
always at the “bottom”, with the measurement proceeding
the length toward the cone apex.

If Spiral is selected, the points will be generated in a

helical pattern. The helical pattern is generated around
the cone axis with the measurement starting at the
“bottom” and the length toward the cone apex.

- 362 -
Feature Database - Curve Point Generation

If a nominal for a curve has been established, a right click on the nominal feature will present a
menu. Select “Generate Points” to automatically generate points for the selected curve.
Label
The label name of the selected curve.
SD
SD is the start clearance distance from the start of the curve.
Enter a new value to change.
ED
ED is the end clearance distance from the end of the curve.
Enter a new value to change.
Generate Method
There are 3 generate methods
options:

The number of points will generate the curve measurement

based on the number of points.
The Tol and Max distance will generate the curve points
within a distance tolerance and will not exceed the max
distance.
Fixed distance will generate the curve points over a fixed
distance.
Total Points
The total number of points to generate for the curve
measurement.

Method
There are 2 point spacing methods:
Equal Distance will generate equally spaced points regardless of
curvature. Equal Curvature will generate points based on the curvature. Points are spaced
closer on tight curves and farther apart on straight.
Ref Feat
Ref Feature is optional and is used to provide a direction for measurement for 3D curves. Drag
either a CAD surface or a 3D curve into the Ref Feat box to establish the point direction.
Offset
Measured points can optionally be offset perpendicular to the curve by the entered value.
Depth: Make depth offset measure points along with plane direction of curve
Nom Point
Nom Point will create nominal points that can be fit to a curve. No measurement takes place.
Measurement Point
Measurement Point will create and immediately the points that can later be fit to a curve.
Measurement curve
Measure curve will immediately measure a curve.

- 363 -
Feature Database - CAD Model Right Click Menu

A right click on a CAD model in the Feature database will display the CAD model right click menu.

Manipulator
When RationalDMIS is offline, a CAD manipulator is available to position the CAD model in the
machine volume. There are 2 methods of moving the CAD model.
If Machine Space is selected, a planar manipulator will appear to move the machine in XY, or Z.
If Model space is selected, a box will surround the CAD model. The white borders of the box
permit rotation while the sides and top permit panning.

The manipulator can be closed by right clicking on the CAD model either in the Feature database
or in the graphics area selecting Stop
Manipulator. Center manipulator will
center the CAD within the machine volume.
Bottom Manipulator will set the CAD
model to the bottom of the machine
volume.

- 364 -
View
View will rotate the graphics view to show 1 of 6 CAD basic views.

Set Model alignment

“Set Model alignment” will move the CAD model to the current coordinate system.
If the current coordinate system origin and the CAD origin are not the same, the CAD model may
not align with the current coordinate system as desired.

Pickable
“Pickable” puts the CAD model in a pickable state in which CAD entities can be picked with the
mouse cursor. When the CAD model is pickable it will appear solid. When the CAD model is not
pickable, it will appear semi-translucent.

Measurement Point Grid

Measurement Point Grid will present a setting page
to establish grid location and size.
The Which Face drop-down allows the selection of
the CAD face on which to generate the grid.
Column Nums/Row Nums
Enter the desired number of rows and columns to
generate in the grid.
The blue region represents the grid and can be
adjusted by sliding the arrows in the desired direction.
The adjusted grid location is indicated in the “Left”,
“Right”, “Top”,”Bottom” text-boxes.

- 365 -
 The CAD model will display a
graphic of the grid over the selected
face. As the blue region is moved or
columns, rows are added or
removed, the graphical grid on the
CAD model will update to reflect
those changes.

Preview
The Preview button will display a
preview of the point locations and
the measurement path.
The red arrow indicates the starting
point and the direction of
measurement. The yellow line
indicates the path and the blue lines
indicate the point locations

Reverse UV Direction
Reverse UV direction will make the U points into V points and the V points into U points. In the
image above, reverse UV direction will change the measurement path from the current left-right
to up-down.
Create Nom Point
The Create Nom Point button will create individual point nominals and add them to the Feature
database.
Create Curve
If Learn mode is on, Create Curve will project the yellow path onto the CAD model and generate a
curve nominal both in the Feature database and in the DMIS program.
If Learn Mode is off, an error message will be displayed.
Measure
Either the Histogram operation panel or the Meas points management panel must be visible.
The Measure button will start measurement. The feature type at the end of the measurement is
dependent on the feature type shown in the Histogram. The feature type can be changed before
accepting the measurement by clicking on the desired feature type.
If the Histogram or the Meas Points management panel are not visible, no measurement will
occur.

- 366 -
Feature Database - Feature Drag and Drop

There are many drag & drop operations throughout RationalDMIS. Quite a bit of time can be
saved by dragging and dropping within the Feature database.
The tables below show the result from dropping a feature on the parent node of another
featured type.
NOTE: If the “Drag& Drop” from column in the table does not show a feature, that feature cannot construct
another feature when dropped on the parent node displayed in the table.

Drag & Drop to the point node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
Arc Center point of Arc
Circle Center point of Circle
Ellipse Center point of Ellipse
Slot Center point of Slot
Edge Center point of Edge
Cone Center point of Cone

Drag & Drop to the line node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
Cylinder Cylinder axis
Cone Cone axis

Drag & Drop to the plane node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
2 parallel lines Plane

Drag & Drop to the sphere node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
A Circle Sphere
2 Circles Sphere
Calibration sphere Sphere

Drag & Drop to the cylinder node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
2 Circles Cylinder

Drag & Drop to the cone node

Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of Cone feature
2 Circles Cone

- 367 -
Drag & Drop to the slot node
Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
2 co-planar circles Rounded slot
2 parallel lines Square slot

Drag & Drop to the surface node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
Cylinder Cylindrical surface
Cone Cone surface
Plane Planar surface
Sphere Spherical surface
3 or more than 3 curves Lofted surface based on curves

Drag & Drop to the curve node

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
Arc Cylindrical surface
Line Cone surface
Ellipse Planar surface
Slot Spherical surface

Drag & Drop to the CAD model

Drag & Drop from Drag & Drop result
Crd name from Coordinate
The CAD model will align itself to the dropped coordinate.
system database system.

- 368 -
Feature Database - Parallel plane

Feature Parallel plane

1>Form Error window supports parallel plane evaluation

2>Database window Parallel plane Label popup menu adds "Best fit" option
3>3d true position tolerance supports parallel plane evaluation
4>CONST/PARPLN, F(label), BF, FA(label), F(label)
5>Drag-n-Drop Parallel plane label to DMIS editor/program window to generate CONST/... BF
DMIS

DnD Point Patern to Output window creates DMIS output syntax.

For Point Patern, the output is just the individual point so that the DMIS syntax has not index.
OUTPUT/FA(PaternLabel)

- 369 -
Coordinate Database

The Coordinate database contains all coordinate systems, datum definitions, iterative information
and coordinate frame information.

Click the Coordinate database icon in the dual database or press “ATL+C”.
There are 5 different nodes with the Coordinate system database:
The Coordinate System node (contains all coordinate systems)
The DAT node (DMIS datum labels per ISO standard: ISO 22093:2003)
MATDEF node (DMIS best-fit coordinate systems)
Iteration node (iteration status)
CRD Frame node (coordinate frame items)

- 370 -
Coordinate System Database - Coordinate System Node

Coordinate system node includes all the coordinate systems created in the current session, or
saved solution. MCS or Machine Coordinate System is the parent node. Each new part coordinate
system is stored under the MCS parent node.

MCS
MCS represents the machine coordinate system. There is only one MCS and it cannot be deleted.
All other coordinate systems are displayed under the MCS Coordinate System node.

MCS right click menu

Activate
Right click on MCS and select Active to make MCS the current coordinate system
Save to File
Select Save to File to save all the coordinate systems listed under MCS to a file.
Open CRD File
Open Saved file will present a dialog box to open a coordinate system file previously saved with
Save to File.
Label Search
Label Search will display a text-box to enter a
coordinate system label to search for.
If the coordinate system is found, it will
automatically become the current active coordinate
system.

- 371 -
Sort Ascending/Sort Descending
Sort Ascending or Descending will sort sort the coordinate system labels alphabetically in either
ascending or descending order.

The current activated Coordinate system

There can be an unlimited number of coordinate systems, but only 1 coordinate system can be
active at a time. There will always be a coordinate system active. There will be a trihedron icon
displayed to the left of the active coordinate system.

Activate a coordinate system

There are 2 methods to make a coordinate system active:
Right click on the label of the desired coordinate
system and select “Activate”.

Drag and drop the desired coordinate system

label onto the graphics view to activate.
In both cases, if Learn mode is on, the
appropriate DMIS code will be written to the
DMIS program.

Preview coordinate system

To quickly preview a coordinate system, make sure that Auto
Show CRD is enabled in the Auto Options of the graphics view
toolbar. Then click on any coordinate system label to see a
preview of the trihedron in the graphics view.

- 372 -
To view more precise numerical information about a coordinate system, double click the desired
coordinate system label. A coordinate system property page will be presented with detailed
information.
NOTE: The numerical information is always shown in relation to MCS and NOT to the currently
active coordinate system unless the active system is MCS.

Delete
To delete a coordinate system right click on the coordinate system label and select Delete from
the menu. Multiple coordinate system can be selected and deleted at the same time by using the
CTRL key or SHIFT key while selecting.
NOTE: The current active coordinate system cannot be deleted, nor can MCS.

Go to DMIS reference
If a coordinate system reference is needed to be found in a program, right click on the coordinate
system label and select Go to DMIS reference. Click Go to DMIS reference again to go the next
reference.

- 373 -
Coordinate System Database – Save Coordinate System

Coordinate systems can be saved and later opened by right clicking on the MCS node of the
Coordinate System database using “Save to File” or “Open CRD File”.

Save to File
Click on Save to File to save the listed coordinate system. A Save CRD file dialog box will be
displayed to select a path and enter a file-name. The coordinate system file has a “*.KSLNCRD”
file extension.

If Learn Mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be written to the current program.
DID(DID_CRD2) = DEVICE/STOR, 'C:\Program Files (x86)\RationalDMIS\2.kslncrd'
OPEN/DID(DID_CRD2), PCS, PCS
SAVE/D(MCS), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(ORG_PT7), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(CADM_1), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(CRD1), DID(DID_CRD2)

- 374 -
Open CRD File
Open CRD File will present a Open CRD file dialog box to select a file to open.

When the saved coordinate system has been opened, a new node will be created in the
Coordinate Systems database.

The root of the new node is the path and file-name of the opened coordinate system file. The
opened file does not include MCS as MCS is always there. Previously saved coordinate systems
cannot be dragged and dropped to active them. The coordinate systems must be active by right
clicking on the desired coordinate system and selecting Activate.
NOTE: If a coordinate system from a previously saved coordinate system file is deleted, it will
also be deleted from the file.
To close an opened coordinate system file, right click on the file-name and select “Close CRD file”
from the menu.

If Learn mode is on the the DMIS code will be written to the current DMIS program.
DID(DID_CRD1) = DEVICE/STOR, 'C:\Program Files (x86)\RationalDMIS\010.kslncrd'
OPEN/DID(DID_CRD1), PCS
$$
CLOSE/DID(DID_CRD1), KEEP

- 375 -
Coordinate System Database - DAT Node

The DAT node can use features to become named datums to correspond with GD&T feature
control frames. The features used can be actual or nominal.

In the above image, DAT-A- is defined by PLN1. PLN1 is a feature actual shown in green. Datum B
is defined by the nominal PLN2. A nominal feature is displayed in black text.

DAT definition
DAT definition is accomplished through the drag and drop of a feature label. As this drag & drop
operation is from one database to another, both the Feature database and the Coordinate System
database must be visible in the dual database. Drag the desired feature from the Feature
database and drop onto the DAT node of the Coordinate System database.
The image below shows PLN3 is being dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the
DAT node of the Coordinate System database.

When a feature label is dropped onto the DAT node, a new datum label will be created with the
dropped feature as the datum. Dropping a feature label onto an already existing DAT label will
use the new feature as the datum.
If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the current DMIS program.
DATDEF/FA(PLN1), DAT(A)
DATDEF/F(PLN2), DAT(B)
DATDEF/FA(PLN3), DAT(C)

Drag & drop operation of nominal vs actual features

The drag of a nominal feature will start by dragging the feature from the “Nom” column of the

Feature database. The background will be yellow.

The drag of an actual feature is started by dragging the feature from the “Act” column of the
Feature database. The background will have a red strip on either end.

DAT define allows rename;

- 376 -
Coordinate System Database - Iteration Node

Coordinate System iteration is simply repeating the coordinate system measurement and creation
until the coordinate system meets user defined requirements or the number of user defined
attempts has been reached. The status of the iteration is displayed real time in the Iteration node
of the Coordinate System database.

Iteration can be defined and executed either through some UI coordinate system tools (discussed
in Coordinate System Toolbar) or DMIS code. An example of code is shown below as well as a
brief description of the code.
Iteration can be set to only evaluate a single axis if desired. In the example PT7 is evaluated along
the X axis only. “XAXIS, FA(PT7)”
The user defines the tolerance for an acceptable coordinate system. If a value of “1.0” has been
entered, the offset of features to create the coordinate system must be below “1.0”.
There are 2 “JUMPTO/” labels in the example below: “SS” and “EE” (note: can be any characters)
If the coordinate system has not yet met the minimum offset value (1.0 in this case) AND has not
yet reached the max number of iterations (10 in this case), the program will jump to the “SS”
label to run the code again.
If the min offset requirement has not been met AND has exceeded the maximum number of
iterations, the program will jump to “EE” label indicating a failure. The EE portion would then
contain DMIS code to handle the failure.

Please refer to DMIS standard (ISO 22093:2003) for additional details.

Real-time information

The iteration node shows the iteration labels and to the right shows the max number of iterations,
followed by “:” and the current iteration. A detailed property page is displayed by double clicking
the iteration labels.

- 377 -
Coordinate System Database - CRD Frame Node

The CRD frame node saves the coordinate axes, coordinate planes and origin of the current
coordinate system. The CRD Frame data can be used in both constructions and tolerances in the
same way defined, measured or constructed features are used.
The information in the CRD Frame is always the current active coordinate system. The labels
(XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS, XYPLANE, YZPLANE, ZXPLANE, ORIGIN) cannot be re-named.
In the image below, the current coordinate system origin is being dragged from the Coordinate
database and dropped onto a distance between tolerance.

- 378 -
Coordinate System Database - Coordinate System Drag & Drop Summary

In addition to dragging and dropping the coordinate system onto the graphics view to active,
there are a large number of coordinate system drag & drop operations that can be carried out in
the dual database.

Quick origin
A quick origin will create a coordinate system origin using the dropped feature. Features that can
be used are points, lines, circles or spheres, actual or nominal. To use, drag the desired feature
from the Feature database and drop onto the MCS node of the Coordinate system database.
A coordinate system will be created based on the current coordinate system, but with the
dropped feature as the new origin.

Quick level
A new coordinate system level can be created by dragging a plane feature from the Feature
database and dropping onto the MCS node of the Coordinate System database. The new
coordinate system will be based on the current coordinate system, but the dropped plane will be
used to level the coordinate system so the Z axis of the coordinate system is perpendicular to the
dropped plane and the dropped plane becomes the z axis 0 origin.
CAD model coordinate system
Dragging a CAD model from the Feature database to the MCS node of the Coordinate System
database will create a coordinate system based on the CADs current location and the CAD origin.
The new coordinate system will not be added to the list but not activated.

- 379 -
 Drag & drop to DAT node
Dragging a feature from the
Feature database to the DAT node
of the Coordinate System database
Note: The DAT node does not accept the multiple feature in will create a datum label that can
the same drag & drop. Only single features are accepted. be used in GD&T tolerances.

Drag & drop to Iteration node

Certain features can be dragged
and dropped to the Iteration node
to create an iteration. Permitted
features are points, planes, circles,
arcs, spheres, cones and ellipses.

Drag & drop to Opened crd node

A coordinate system can be
dragged from the MCS node to the
opened coordinate system node.
The dropped coordinate system is
added to the opened coordinate
system node and will be added to
the saved coordinate system file.

- 380 -
Sensor Database

The Sensor database includes the calibration gage node, rotary table node, sensor changer node
and the sensor node. Both the rotary table node and the sensor changer node require setup in
the Application Setup before they are displayed in the Sensor database.
There can be multiple child nodes under each sensor label node.

- 381 -
Sensor Database - Sensor Node

The sensor database is not part of a program or solution file, but rather a core part of
RationalDMIS that is available globally to all programs and/or solutions.

The above figure shows 6 sensor nodes and indicates that there are have been 6 physical sensors
created. The current active sensor is indicated the the sensor icon to the left of the label.
Depending on the sensor type, a sensor node can have multiple child nodes expandable by
clicking the + to the left of the sensor label. The child nodes under the parent or root sensor will
be different angles of the parent sensor. If a sensor cannot rotate to a different position, then it
will not have child sensors. The parent or root sensor will always have an angle of 0,0.

Sensor type
The sensor type is determined by the user during the creation of the sensor (See Sensor
Operation Area for detailed information).
Sensor types supported by RationalDMIS are: auto-indexing sensors, manual index sensors, fixed
sensors and hard probes. Auto-indexing sensors such as Renishaw PH10M probe head use a
motor to change probing angles. Manual indexing sensors are adjusted manually by the operator.
Fixed sensors do not have any angular adjustments but still uses a touch probe to register a
triggered point like the auto-indexing and manual index probes. A hard probe does not have the
ability to change angles, nor can it detect points through a trigger. It is generally positioned and
then the position is read.

Nominal and actual sensors

Nominal sensors are the definition of the sensor, while the actual sensor is the calibrated sensor.
The sensor database represents nominal sensors with black text and actual sensors with green
text.

Sensor calibration instruction:

In addition to black representing a nominal
non-calibrated sensor and green representing a
calibrated actual sensor, red text represents a
sensor that has an expired calibration and blue text
represents a sensor with a form error value that
exceeds a user defined tolerance.

- 382 -
Sensor angle
The sensor angle is displayed in the column to the right of the sensor label. The angles are shown
as 2 numbers separated by a colon. The first number is a “A” angle, which is the angle of the of
the probe perpendicular to it’s mount. The 2nd number is the “B” angle which is the head
rotation.

Activate sensor
Activate sensor will set the selected sensor as the current working sensor. A sensor can be
activated in the Sensor database by right clicking on it and clicking “Activate” from the menu.

A sensor may also be activated by dragging the desired sensor from the Sensor database and
dropping it onto the graphics view.

Delete sensor
To delete a sensor, right click on the desired sensor label in the Sensor database and click
“Delete”. The currently active sensor cannot be deleted.

Sensor sort
There are a number of different ways sensors can be sorted. Right click on a parent (or root)
sensor to sort options. Global sorts will sort all sensors but will still keep the parent child
relationships.
Global label sort will sort all sensors by their label names.
Global calibration time sort will sort all sensors by the calibration time.
Local Sort will sort only in the node that has been clicked. Local Sort contains “Sort A angle”, “Sort
B angle”, “Sort Label” and “Sort Calibration time”.

- 383 -
Sensor Preview
The Sensor database contains a small sensor preview window at the bottom. The sensor preview
window can show the sensor when the sensor label is clicked. Only the parent sensor will appear
in the sensor preview window.

Additionally a right click on the desired sensor label will display a menu with “Preview”. Click on
“Preview” to see a preview of the sensor.

- 384 -
Copy Label
Copy Label will copy the sensor label to the Windows clipboard. The sensor label can be then
pasted into instructions etc, or if using the Renishaw UCC controller, the sensor label can be used
to create a sensor in UCC with the correct name.

Reset calibration data

Reset calibration data will remove any calibration and calibration history. The sensor will appear
as a new un-calibrated sensor shown in black text.

Calibration with
RationalDMIS supports multiple sensor calibration artifacts. Clicking on calibration with, will
expand a fly out menu to show calibration artifacts. Click on the artifact label name to begin the
calibration. The number of points used for the calibration is set in the Calibration Gage Node.

Sensor property page

The Sensor property page is similar to the Feature property page.

Double click on the

desired sensor label
name to show the Sensor
property pane.
There are three columns
displayed in the Sensor
property page. The left
most column “Par”
contains the parameter
name. The center
column “Nom” contains
nominal information for
the sensor. The Act
column shows the actual
calibrated data.

- 385 -
Label
The Label is the sensor label name. In this case the “Nom” column displays the label name while
the Act column displays the components that were used to build the sensor. As the entire
description will take more than the column width, hover over the description text to see a
tool-tip in which the entire text can be seen.

Calibration Date
Calibration date is time and date of the sensor calibration. If the calibration date text exceeds the
column width, hover the mouse over the calibration date until a tool-tip appears which will
contain the complete information. A sensor that has not been calibrated does not have
Calibration Date data.

Type
Type is the type of triggering, either TOUCH or SCAN.

Offset from quill

Dx, Dy, Dz are offset distances from the quill
(normally the end of the Z ram) to the center of
the sensor tip. If the sensor is calibrated there
will be both nominal and actual values.

Offset from rotation

If the sensor can index, the Offset From Rotation
value is the offset from the center of the index
pivot to the center of the sensor tip.
If the sensor is calibrated there will be both
nominal and actual values.

Diameter
Diameter displays the diameter of the sensor tip. If the sensor is calibrated there will be both
nominal and actual values.

Form
Form is the sphericity of the calibration sphere seen during calibration. It is a very good indicator
of the quality of the sensor calibration.
If the sensor has not been calibrated there will be no Act form error.

Calibration parameter
The Calibration parameters are the measurement speed and the measurement acceleration
recorded during the sensor calibration. If tolerances are tight and accuracy is of the utmost
importance, measurements should be performed at this same speed.

- 386 -
Sensor Database - Calibration Gage Node

The calibration gage node is made up of the Sphere Gage node and the Ring Gage node.
See Calibration Artifact for detailed information on setting up a calibration artifact.

Ring gage
The Ring gage node can contain a master ring gage of a known and certified size that can be used
for calibrating or checking the calibration of sensors. Although user programs can be written,
calibration with a ring gage is normally a manual process.

Sphere gage
The Sphere gage node contains definitions of spheres of known calibrated diameters for the
calibration of sensors. The calibration process can be manual, automatic or performed in a DMIS
program. There can be multiple sphere gages set up at any time.

Sphere gage graphics

The sphere gage can be shown in the graphics view by right clicking on the sphere gage label and
clicking “Show Gage” or by dragging the desired sphere gage label to the graphics view and
dropping.

To remove the gages from view, right click on the desired sphere label and click “UnShow”.

- 387 -
Calibrate sensors in DMIS program

if a DMIS program has been opened and all the sensors within that program need to be
calibrated, right click on the Sphere gage node and click Calibrate sensors in DMIS program.
RationalDMIS will read through the program and only calibrate those sensors that are the
the current DMIS program.

Sphere gage property page

Like features and coordinate systems, sphere gages have property pages. To view the property
page, double click on the desired sphere.

- 388 -
Sensor Database - Rotary Table Node

Rotary table node of the sensor database will only be visible if rotary table has been enabled in
Application Setup.
The rotary table is generally viewed as another axis of the machine. Once the rotary table has
been setup, the graphics will be displayed in the graphics view.

Under the Rotary table node, a right click displays a menu with toggle items for Show and Enable.
If “Enable” is checked, then the rotary table is enabled for use. If “Show” is checked, the rotary
table will be visible in the graphics view.

Rotary table property page

A double click on the rotary table node will display a property page for the rotary table.
The property page includes the rotary table
calibration status, the current angle, the scale
angle and the direction of rotation.

- 389 -
Rotary table calibration
A rotary table needs to be calibrated before use. Measure a plane on the top of the rotary table
to establish the height and level. Measure a circle on the OD of the rotary table to establish the
center. Drag and drop the plane into the Axis entry of the Table Calibration section of the Rotary
Table operations panel. Drag & drop the measured circle onto the Center entry.

In the image below, the table on the left has been calibrated and appears solid. The table on the
right has not been calibrated and appears semi-translucent.

- 390 -
Sensor Database - Sensor Change Node

The Sensor Change Node of the Sensor

database will only be visible if it has
been enabled in the Application Setup.

In Application Setup, select the change rack that is on the machine and re-start RationalDMIS.

The changer systems supported by RationalDMIS include: MCR2, SCR200, FCR25-L3, FCR25-L6,
MRS.

Ports
The rack ports are listed in the Sensor Change node of the Sensor database. The left column
shows the port names. The right column shows the sensors in each port. If there is no sensor
assigned to a port, then the right column will be blank.
The image on the left shows the sensor
labeled PH10M_30X4 is assigned to
port 2. PH10M_40X4 is assigned to port
4. If the parent has child sensors, then
the child sensors are also in the port
that the parent is in. A parent sensor
can only be assigned to one port.

- 391 -
To assign a sensor to a port, drag the parent sensor from the list of sensors in the
sensor database to the desired port and drop onto that port.

To remove a sensor from being assigned to a port, right click on the desired port and select
“Unassign Port”.

Certain probe types can only be used with certain change racks.
TP20 Probe MCS20 rack
TP200 Probe SCR200 rack
SP25M FCR25_L3 or FCR25_L6 rack
Sensors cannot be assigned to racks that do not match.

Sensor change system graphics

When the change rack is visible, if a port is shown with a blue sensor, then the sensor is shown as
in use on the machine. If the sensor is shown in full color, then the sensor is docked in the port.

- 392 -
To hide the rack from the graphics view, right click on the Sensor Change node and select “Hide
ToolHolder”. To disable the rack, select “Disable ToolHolder”.

Calibration of change racks

Before a change rack can be used, it must be calibrated to establish the location of the rack and
the ports. Each rack has certain calibration requirements. Please refer to Renishaw
Documentation.

The left change rack is not calibrated while the rack on the right is calibrated.

- 393 -
Sensor Database – Drag & Drop

Drag & drop to calibrate sensors

One or more sensors can be dragged from the sensor node in the Sensor database to a
predefined calibration sphere in the Calibration Sphere node. As there can be multiple calibration
spheres, the drop operation must be onto a sphere. If Learn mode is on the calibration routine
will be written to the DMMIS program. If Learn mode is not enabled, sensor calibration will start.

To the right of each calibration sphere is the number of points used in the calibration routine. To
change the number of points, right click the existing point number and select a new value from
the drop-down list.

Drag and drop to certain sensor node:

If an indexing sensor is being used and another sensor requires the same indexing angles, the
sensor with the defined angles can be dropped onto another sensor to create the same angles.

Drag & drop a feature to select a sensor orientation

If an indexing sensor is being used, a feature from either the Feature database or from the
graphics view can be dragged and dropped onto a parent sensor node. RationalDMIS will then
select a sensor closest to the vector of the dropped feature (within the limitations of the probe
head).If the selected sensor position has not yet been created, RationalDMIS will create the
sensor and make it the active sensor.

- 394 -
Variable Database

The Variable database is used for DMIS high-level language operations (Per ISO 22093 standard).
The Variable database includes DMIS variables, DMIS macros and external resources.

DMIS variables
RationalDMIS supports 4 types of variables:
integer (INTGR)
real number (REAL)
character (CHAR,n)
vector type (VECT)
While the DMIS language uses more variable types, RationalDMIS has integrated some of the
very similar variables into one variable type. For example, a double variable and a real variable
are very similar, so RationalDMIS has incorporated the two variables as a real number variable.
However, the use of a double in a program used by RationalDMIS will not create an error.

- 395 -
The Variable database includes 2 columns: the variable name column and the variable value
column. RationalDMIS includes 3 variables with the name starting with KNPT for each of the 4
variable types.
Use caution when using the pre-existing KNPT variables as they are not explicitly declared in a
DMIS program. If using KNPT variables in a DMIS program that requires portability, be sure to
declare the KNPT variables before use.

- 396 -
Variable Database - Create New Variable

New variables can be created either in a DMIS program using the “DECL/” statement or within
the RationalDMIS interface. To create a new variable in the Variable database, right click on the
parent node of the desired variable type and click “New”.

A small window will be displayed near the top of the Variables tab with a text-box for the variable
name entry and a drop-down list. The DMIS label name for the variable must be 1-64 characters
long. Characters accepted are: text characters (A-Z, a-z), numbers (0-9), a hyphen (-), an
underscore (_).

The drop-down list can contain some pre-defined value types. Either select on of the pre-defined
values or enter a value.
Depending on the variable type, there can be numerous pre-defined entries that represent
various system states of values. When a pre-defined entry is selected, the value of that entry will
be the variable value.

Integer variable
GOTO, XAXIS represents the last GOTO value in the X axis
GOTO, YAXIS represents the last GOTO value in the Y axis
GOTO, ZAXIS represents the last GOTO value in the Z axis
ACLRAT, MESACL represents the current measure acceleration
setting
ACLRAT, POSACL represents the current positional acceleration
setting
FEDRAT, MESVEL, FEED represents the current measure
velocity
FEDRAT, POSVEL, FEED represents the current positional
velocity
FEARAT, SCNVEL, FEEED represents the current scanning
velocity

- 397 -
 SNSET, APPRCH represents the current sensor approach setting
SNSET, RETRCT represents the current sensor retract setting
SNSET, SEARCH represents the current sensor search setting
SNSET, CLRSRF, DIST represents the current clear surface
distance setting
SNSET, DEPTH, DIST represents the current sensor depth
setting

Character variable
WKPLAN represents the currently active working plane. The
working plane can be XYPLAN, YZPLAN, ZXPLAN.
DATSET represents the name of the currently active coordinate
system.
MODE represents the current DME program execution mode.
Can be “AUTO,PROG,MAN”, “PROG,MAN”, or “MAN”.
SNSLCT represents the label name of the currently active
sensor.
SNSET, CLRSRF represents the label name of the current feature
used as a clearance surface. If there is no feature, a null will be
returned.
UNITS, DIST represents the current measurement units
UNITS, ANG represents the current angular units. Values can be
“ANGDEC”, “ANGRAD”, “ANGDMS”.

Vector variable
GOTO, POS represents the currently sensor location in the
current coordinate system in X,Y,Z values.
SNSMNT, XVEC represents the X axis vector in the current
coordinate system in I,J,K values in MCS.
SNSMNT, YVEC represents the Y axis vector in the current
coordinate system in I,J,K values in MCS.
SNSMNT, ZVEC represents the Z axis vector in the current
coordinate system in I,J,K values.
SNSMNT, MNTLEN represents the vector of the sensor mount Z
axis vector in the current coordinate system in I,J,K values.

MODE represents the current DME program execution mode.

Can be “AUTO,PROG,MAN”, “PROG,MAN”, or “MAN”.
SNSLCT represents the label name of the currently active
sensor.
SNSET, CLRSRF represents the label name of the current feature
used as a clearance surface. If there is no feature, a null will be
returned.

- 398 -
 UNITS, DIST represents the current measurement units
UNITS, ANG represents the current angular units. Values can be
“ANGDEC”, “ANGRAD”, “ANGDMS”.

Vector type

GOTO, POS represent return to [x,y,z] position under current coordinate system.
SNSMNT, XVEC represent return to X axis direction of sensor coordinate system under MCS in
vector type.
SNSMNT, ZVEC represent return to Z axis direction of sensor coordinate system under MCS in
vector type.
SNSMNT, MNTLEN represents the distance from the sensor origin point.

- 399 -
Variable Database - Delete Variable

To delete an individual variable, right click on the desired variable name and click “Delete” from
the menu.

To delete all variables of a given type, right click on the root node of the variable type and click
“Delete All”.

- 400 -
Variable Database - Edit Existing Variable values

Defined variables can be modified in the Variables database using a number of different tools. To
quickly modify the value of a variable, double click on the variable name and enter the new value
in the edit window that is displayed at the top of the Variables database.

The displayed variable edit window can also evaluate expressions. In the example below, the
variable value will be 87.5 which is the result of 25*7/2.

Right click on the variable edit window to display a menu with numerous DMIS operators and
functions.

The DMIS items are divided by function type. Math functions, string functions etc.

Please refer to the DMIS manual for details of specific functions.

- 401 -
Variable Database - Drag & Drop

Drag & drop to the Integer variable node

A feature can be dropped onto the Integer node to create a new integer variable representing the
number of points measured to create the feature. If there is no actual feature – no variable will
be created.

Drag & drop to the Real variable node

If a feature is dropped onto the real variable node, a small window will be presented with feature
parameters. If a parameter is checked, then a variable for that parameter will be created and the
value of the parameter will be obtained from the dropped feature and assigned to the variable.

If the feature was dragged from the nominal column of the Feature database, the nominal
parameter values are used. If dragged from the actual column then the actual parameter values
are used.

If a tolerance is dropped onto the real variable node, a small window will be presented with
tolerance parameters. If a parameter is checked, then a variable for that parameter will be
created and the value obtained from the tolerance and assigned to the variable.

- 402 -
The dropped tolerance must be an evaluated tolerance. Nominal tolerances cannot be used to
create real variables.

Drag & drop of sensors to the real variable node

If a sensor is dropped onto the real variable node, a small window will be presented with sensor
parameters. If a parameter is checked, then a variable for that parameter will be created and the
value obtained from the tolerance and assigned to the variable.
If a sensor is dropped directly onto an existing real variable child node, that variable value will
become the diameter of the dropped sensor.

Drag & drop to the Vector variable node

If a feature is dropped onto the root of the Vector variable node, the feature’s vector will be used
to create a vector variable. The vector value is based on the currently active coordinate system.

- 403 -
Variable Database - DMIS Macro

The DMIS macro node of the Variable database contains a number of pre-defined DMIS macros in
the “Predefined Macro” node and can accept user developed DMIS macros is the “User Macro”
node.

The pre-defined macros are created by RationalDMIS and can only be activated using the DMIS
“CALL/” statement.
The user macros can be any custom user developed macro from the very simple to the very
complex. To add a user defined macro, right click on the User Macro node and click New.
See further down in this topic for additional information on User Macro.

- 404 -
CLEAR_SENSOR_MOUNT

This macro is called during auto sensor calibration.

This macro uses an input parameter to define a safety plane After a sensor calibration is finished
and before the next sensor calibration begins, this macro can be called to move to safety plane to
avoid potential collisions with the calibration sphere during a sensor index.

- 405 -
CLEAR PLANE
The clear plane macro can be used during program creation to drive a predetermined safety
distance before going to the next measurement feature. This macro only runs in auto mode
(“MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN”).

During a regular measurement, the probe will take the shortest path to the net feature – which
may result in a collision. A clearance plane will force the probe to move to a predetermined
distance and then travel to the next feature at that distance.

- 406 -
MOVE_TO_LINE

The MOVE_TO_LINE macro is a toggle on/off macro. Click on the ON/OFF drop down to change
states. The macro will create a clearance move based on an input feature. The clearance move
will provide access to measure the input feature.

- 407 -
ABOVE_PLANE

ABOVE_PLANE is a toggle ON/OFF macro. Click on the ON/OFF drop down to change states. The
macro will move along a plane vector by the APPRCH distance.

- 408 -
GET_PTMEAS_AT
GET_PTMEAS_AT will get any single point within a previously measured feature based on the
index value.

The last parameter “BERROR” must be a previously declared integer variable. The value of
BERROR should be checked after the macro has been executed to ensure a point was returned at
the specified index.
For example:
DECL/REAL, XX,YY,ZZ,II,JJ,KK
DECL/INTGR, EE
CALL/M(EASI_GET_PTMEAS_AT), (FPT1),10,XX,YY,ZZ,II,JJ,KK,EE
If/( EE .EQ. 1)
$$ failed
Else
$$we have a value!
ENDIF

- 409 -
GETX_INDEX
To obtain the value of a feature parameter in DMIS can be a little confusing as the parameters can
vary. For example, the X index value for a circle is 4, while the X index value for a plane is 3. The
GETX_INDEX macro will return the correct X index for the feature.

From there DMIS OBTAIN/ etc can be called using the correct index.

- 410 -
For example:
DECL/INTGR, IndexVal
CALL/M(EASI_GETX_INDEX), (CIR1), IndexVal
The macro will assign the index position of X to the IndexVal variable.
DMIS OBTAIN/ statements etc can then be called using the IndexVal variable
XPos = OBTAIN/FA(CIR1), IndexVal
YPos = OBTAIN/FA(CIR1), IndexVal +1
ZPos = OBTAIN/FA(CIR1), IndexVal +2

- 411 -
MEAS_STAT
The MEAS_STAT macro is used to recall a DMIS environment setting for measuring a feature. As
DMIS environment settings are not part of a measured feature, being in a different crd system or
having a different sensor or units than when the feature was defined may result in a collision. The
MEAS_STAT macro allows the environment to be quickly recalled.

For example:
CALL/M(EASI_MEAS_STAT), 0,(ROOTSN1),(MCS),(MM),(ANGDEC)
MEAS/POINT, F(TOP_POINT3), 1
PTMEAS/CART, 356.370, 200.00, 187.06, 0.0, -1.0, 0.0
ENDMES
CALL/M(EASI_MEAS_STAT), 1,(DUMMY),(DUMMY),(DUMMY),(DUMMY)
The 0 entered in the example will save the current status and measure with the sensor,
coordinate system and units specified in the macro call. The call after the measurement with 1 as
the 1st parameter followed by dummy parameters will recall the saved settings from the 1st call of
the macro before the measurement.

- 412 -
ROTATE_CRD_ABOUT_FEAT

The ROTATE_CRD_ABOUT_FEAT will rotate the current coordinate system about a line reducible
feature by a specified angle.
The features that can be used to rotate about are:
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Arc
Ellipse
Slot

- 413 -
6PT_TO_CRD
6 points may be used to create a coordinate system with a level plane, a line and an origin.
The 1st 3 points will be used to create a plane for the Z, the 4th and 5th point will be used to create
a line in the X direction from 4 to 5 and control the Y origin. Point 6 controls the X origin.
The 3 created features are then used in a 3-2-1 coordinate system to level, align and origin.

- 414 -
2PT_TO_LINE
The 2PT_TO_LINE macro uses two input features to create a nominal line.

EDGEPT_OFFSET
EDGEPT_OFFSET is a macro used to offset the actual value of a measured edge point. The offset
can either be 0 which is offset along the edge point vector direction, or 1 which is offset along the
edge point plane direction. The offset distance is defined by the DOFFSET value.

- 415 -
DEFINE_INDEXED_POINT
DEFINE_INDEXED_POINT macro takes an existing feature and extracts a point feature from the
measured feature point index.

The value of DERR should be checked after the macro has been executed to ensure a point was
returned at the specified index. A DERR value of 1 indicates a failure, while 0 indicates success.

- 416 -
GET_ACTSIZE
The macro GET_ACTSIZE will return the actual size of a user defined feature.

Permitted features for GET_ACTSIZE are:

Circle
Cylinder
Sphere
Arc
Ellipse (Major dia only)

- 417 -
MINMAX_DIAM, MINMAX_RAD, MINMAX_XCOORD, MINMAX_YCOORD, MINMAX_ZCOORD
MINMAX_PROFP and MINMAX support the drag and drop of multiple features onto the
MINMAX_PROFP or MINMAX nodes.
MINMAX_PROFP will accept multiple point only. The macro will then determine the smallest and
largest point profile errors for the dropped points.
MINMAX can evaluate diameter, radius and coordinate values. Select the desire evaluation
method from the drop down list beside the MINMAX node. Drag and drop the desired features
onto the MINMAX node.

If Learn mode is on, the DMIS code for MINMAX will be generated and added to the existing
program.

MINMAXPROFP example output

- 418 -
GET_T_V
MACRO/'TOLLABEL', VAL_ACT, VAL_NOM, VAL_LTOL, VAL_UTOL, VAL_DEV, VAL_TND
VAL_ACT Actual tolerance/feature information
VAL_NOM Nominal tolerance/feature information
VAL_DEV Tolerance
VAL_LTOL Upper tolerance
VAL_UTOL Lower tolerance
VAL_TND Out of tolerance

If you double clock this macro, character string definition window will pop up.

This macro supports direct drag and drop of tolerance label. For example, you can drag and drop
cone angle tolerance to realize the following DMIS statement:
CALL/M(EASI_GET_T_V),(DCONEANG), VAL_ACT, VAL_NOM, VAL_LTOL, VAL_UTOL, VAL_DEV,
VAL_TND
WRITE/DID(TXT_OUTPUT)
This function is developed for those clients who need to output tolerance as ACSII files.

- 419 -
User Macro / Extern macro
Macros to be used with User Macro and External macro must be properly formatted DMIS macro
files. Any external macro must be defined before it is called.
User Macro
The User macro node does not automatically define a macro. The definition of the macro must be
manually written to the program.
XTERN
EXTFIL/DMIS,’full_path_to_macro’
ENDXTN
To add an external user macro using User Macro, right click on User macro and click New.

A dialog will appear at the top of the Variables database. Click

the 3 dots by the “Macro” text-box to open a macro file. The
macro label will be read into the Macro Label box. Feature
parameters can be added by selecting features from the list and
clicking the “->” button to add or “<-“ to remove. The call to
execute the macro must be manually written into the program.
CALL/M(MACRONAME),optional_parameters
To edit the user macro, right click on the desired macro node
under the User Macro node and click edit. The macro will be
loaded into windows notepad to edit. The macro existing on RationalDMIS will not yet have the
edits. Right click on the macro node under the User Macro node and click Synchronize to bring
the edit macro into RationalDMIS.

Extern macro
Using External macro is easier than the User macro.
To add an external macro right click on the Extern Macro node and click on Add Extern Macro
File.

An Open Macro DMIS File dialog will be displayed to select the path to the macro.

- 420 -
A new node under the External Macro node will be created with the macro label and the full path.

The macro needs to be declared before it can be used. To declare the macro, drag the Extern
Macro node from the Variables database and drop it onto the Program database. If Learn mode is
enabled, the XTERN statement will be added to the program. The call to execute the macro must
be entered into the DMIS program manually. CALL/M(MACRO_LABEL),optional_parameters

To remove an external macro, right click on the desired macro label and click “Remove External
Macro File”.

To remove all external macros, right click on the External Macro node and click on “Reset Extern
Macro”.

- 421 -
Variable Database - External Resources

External resources such as pictures and audio can be added to a DMIS program. These can be
used for set up instructions, measurement instructions etc.

To add an external resource right click on either the Picture Resource node or the Audi
Resource node and click “New”.

Select the path to the picture or audio resource.

Drag& Drop a picture resource to the output view to provide additional information.

- 422 -
Program Database

The DMIS Program database is covered in this section.

This is not a tutorial on the DMIS language or syntax.
The DMIS language conforms to the ISO 22093
standard. As of this writing, RationalDMIS is in
compliance with DMIS 5.0.
Documents covering the DMIS language and syntax
can be purchased through other vendors.

The DMIS Program database includes 3 functional

areas:
The DMIS execution toolbar at the top of the
database
The DMIS function toolbar at the left
The DMIS program window.

- 423 -
Program Database - DMIS Program Window

The DMIS program window displays the current DMIS program. In RationalDMIS, the DMIS
parsing and execution occurs real time. As DMIS is an ANSI controlled language, there is no
language specific documentation included with RationalDMIS.
Please refer to the DMIS standard file (ISO22093) for language details.

Current program line

Breakpoint

Bookmark
Both “Breakpoint” and “Bookmark” are detailed later in this document.
The Current program line indicates the selected green highlighted line. This line is the current
DMIS program execution statement. The selected green line will move down line by line as the
DMIS program executes. To select a line, click in the gray area to the left of the DMIS code.

- 424 -
The image above displays 3 different DMIS program window states.
The left image shows a DMIS split window. This window is displayed when using dual arm
equipment. The center window shows high level language being executed. The right window
shows a regular selected line in green plus a break point in red. The blue dot at the bottom is a
book-mark.

In the DMIS program window double click the left mouse button to send the program to the
DMIS editor.

- 425 -
Program Database - DMIS Program Window Drag & Drop

The DMIS program database also accepts the drag & drop of objects to generate various DMIS
statements:
1. Dragging a coordinate system label from the Coordinate System database and dropping
onto the DMIS program window will create a DMIS “RECALL/” statement to recall the
dropped coordinate system.
2. Dragging a sensor label from the Sensor database and dropping onto the DMIS program
window will create a DMIS “SNSLCT/” statement to select and activate the dropped sensor.
3. Dragging a variable label from the Variable database and dropping onto the DMIS
program window will create DMIS declaration code for the variable.
4. Dragging a macro from the Variables database to the DMIS program window will import
the DMIS code for the dropped macro into the DMIS program.
5. Dragging a tolerance label from the Tolerance database and dropping onto the DMIS
program window will create the DMIS code to define the dropped tolerance.
6. Dragging a feature nominal from the nominal column of the Feature database will present
a small menu to allow the selection to Define the feature, or insert an empty measurement
block, or create both the definition and an empty measurement box, or to create and empty
VECBLD measurement.
7. Dragging an actual feature from the Actual column of the Feature database and dropping
onto the program window will generate the DMIS code to re-create the measurement of the
dropped feature. The generated code includes all of the measured points used to create the
feature.

- 426 -
Program Database - DMIS Execution Toolbar

The DMIS Execution toolbar is a small toolbar situated at the top of the Program database. The
toolbar includes function to open programs, save programs, step through or run programs as well
as some editing/debugging tools.

Open DMIS Program File (OPEN)

A DMIS program file is a simple ASCII text file. Click on the Open icon to browse for a DMIS
program file.

DMIS programs usually have a *.DMI or *.DMS file extension. Once opened the DMIS program
will appear in the Program database. If there is already a program in the Program database, the
existing program will be replaced by the newly opened program.

Insert DMIS File (INSERT OPEN)

Insert DMIS file will present an open dialog in the same manner as opening a file. Rather than
replacing the existing program, Insert DMIS file will insert the opened file into the xisting program
at the selected line.

Save DMIS file (SAVE AS)

RationalDMIS can either save files as a solution or as a DMIS file. When saved as a solution, the
entire RationalDMIS environment is saved including coordinate systems, features etc, and of
course the DMIS program. A solution file is proprietary for RationalDMIS only. If only the DMIS
program is to be saved, click on the save icon. A Save dialog will be presented. Browse to the
appropriate directory, enter a file-name and click the Save button to save the program as a DMIS
file.
Note: If there is no content in the Program database, the Save icon will be disabled.

- 427 -
 Single step (STEP)

Single step execution will only execute the current DMIS program line and then stop at the next
line. Another click on the Single step execution icon will execute the next line and so on. This is
useful when slowly stepping through a portion of a program is required for debugging or other
purposes.

Continuous execution (GO)

Clicking the GO icon will run the DMIS program from the currently selected line until the end of
the program or an error. To stop execution of the program, click the red STOP sign, or click the
Stop Execution icon.

Stop execution (STOP)

To halt the execution of a program, click the STOP icon, or the red Stop sign. The program will
immediately stop.

Set breakpoint

A breakpoint will stop an DMIS program execution on the line containing the breakpoint. The line
containing the breakpoint will be highlighted in red. There can be any number of breakpoints
within a program. The breakpoint icon is a toggle on/off icon. If a line does not have a breakpoint,
a breakpoint will be added. If a line already has a breakpoint, clicking on the breakpoint icon
will remove the breakpoint.

- 428 -
 Clear all breakpoints
A click on the Clear All Breakpoints icon will remove all the breakpoints from the current program.

To DMIS Editor
The DMIS program database is not meant to be an editor, but rather an interface to manage the
execution of the program. To edit the program, it must be sent to the DMIS editor view by clicking
on the To DMIS editor icon. A double click with the left mouse button while in the Program
database will also send the program to the editor.

Bookmark function pull-down menu (Book mark)

Bookmarks are quick and handy methods of navigating through a program to a specific
bookmarked location.
A left click on the bookmark icon will present a small menu.

“Toggle Bookmark” will set a bookmark in current program line. If there is a bookmark
already in that line, “Toggle Bookmark “will remove the bookmark. “Pre Bookmark” and “Next
Bookmark” will move to the bookmark that is previous to the current line and Next Bookmark
will move forward to the next bookmark.
“Clear All Bookmarks” will delete all bookmarks.

Search current line

The software will show current line of DMIS program by this function.

- 429 -
 Enable edit

No need transfer program to DMIS edit zone to edit directly; Click ‘Enable edit' can directly edit
program line; function of DMIS editor remains the same;

KNeptuneConfig to show or hide DMIS program toolbar Edit icon

- 430 -
Program Database - DMIS Function Toolbar

Toolbar drawing pin

The Toolbar drawing pin is used to fix the DMIS toolbar in place, or to sallow the toolbar to hide
when not in use.

If the pin is pointing down , the toolbar is pinned open. If the pin is pointing in a

horizontal direction, the toolbar will hide when not in use.

DMIS program header

The DMIS program header icon will activate DMIS program header definition window. The DMIS
program header is a group of DMIS statements used to set the RationalDMIS environment. The
statements can be turned on or off through the Program header window.

- 431 -
 The left column of window
describes the DMIS statement
type. The right column
contains the current settings.
The settings can be changed by
clicking on the desired setting
and selecting another value
from the drop-down.
The default is to insert the
DMIS header before the 1st
learned statement. The header
can be turned off by changing
the DMIS Header parameter to
NO.

DMIS property page icon

The DMIS property page icon will display a property page in a similar manner to other property
pages. The DMIS Property page displays an easily man-readable line by line description of the
DMIS code meanings.

Some of the DMIS property page descriptions of may be grouped together in a tree fashion.
These tree groupings contain similar DMIS functions. For example, setting the sensor approach
and retract can have up to 5 lines of DMIS code. These lines will be grouped together in the
property page as an expandable tree node. Feature measurements or high level language loops
etc will be grouped together is a similar fashion.

In order to locate items quickly, a line in the DMIS property page can be clicked and the
corresponding line in the DMIS program will be highlighted. Likewise, a line of DMIS code can be
clicked, and the corresponding description will be highlighted in the DMIS property page.

- 432 -
 Edit current line
While the Program database is not intended to edit program, some quick edits can be performed
without the need to send the program to the editor. Click on the line to select it, then click on the
Edit Current Line icon.

Not every statement in the DMIS Program database can be edited through Edit Current Line.
Only the lines that start with the following can be edited:
MEAS
PTMEAS
GOTO
RMEAS
$$
TEXT/OUTFIL
TEXT/OPER

Selecting an editable line and then clicking on the Edit Current Line icon will temporarily replace
the Program database with a quick edit window. The actual interfaces may differ from edit to edit.
When the desired changes are complete, click the apply button to generate and replace the old
DMIS code with the new.

- 433 -
Edit MEAS
The edit window for the MEAS statement displays the feature label and clearance options.
The label can be edited to give the feature a new name. A clearance surface can be set, and
clearances distances can be set for before the feature measurement and after the feature
measurement.

NOTE: Use caution when changing the MEAS feature label as the nominal IS NOT updated to the
new name. Running the program with a new measure feature label and no nominal will generate
an error.

Edit PTMEAS
A PTMEAS statement can be changed from Cartesian
to polar.
XYZIJK of the point can be changed.
Point approach and retract can be individually set.
If using a 5 axis probe head, the A+B angles can be set,
head touches, 5 axis touches or regular touches can be
selected.
Note: Approach/Retract controls are disabled when
5-axis PTMEAS is selected.
When a PTMEAS is changed, it applies to that measure
point only. All other measure points within the feature
will remain as they were.

- 434 -
Edit Goto
A GOTO can be edited to change between Cartesian
and polar.
The target XYZ can be changed.
Checking on GOTO/PCS[HEADCS] when the current
probe head is a 5 axis head allows the selection of
conducting the GOTO move in 5 axis and selecting
either PCS or HEADCS as the GOTO target.

Edit RMEAS
Relative measure of points, edge points, circles and
slots are supported.
The feature label can be edited.
The sample point distance around the nominal can be
changed as well as the number of sample points.
Clear surface before and after measurement can be
controlled as well as clear distances.

NOTE: Use caution when changing the RMEAS feature

label as the nominal IS NOT updated to the new name.
Running the program with a new measure feature label
and no nominal will generate an error.

Edit TEXT/OPER, TEXT/OUTFIL and $$

All 3 items have very similar interfaces to edit the

- 435 -
associated line of text.
Once the edit is complete, click the apply button to create the modified code.

DMIS statements icons

Within the DMIS Function toolbar, there are a number of icons used to add simple DMIS
statements to DMIS programs. Most of the icons in this group will either present all small
menu to choose from or add the statement to the program immediately.

Mode commands
There are 3 different mode of operation displayed when the Mode commands icon is clicked.

MODE/AUTO – In AUTO mode, DMIS will attempt to execute GOTARG and MEAS statements
ignoring the programmed intermediate moves and measures.
MODE/PROG – In PROG mode, DMIS will execute the programs verbatim line by line.
MODE/MAN – In MAN mode it is up to the operator to move the machine and take
measurements.

There is a hierarchy in the commands MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN. The command is attempted in

AUTO. If the command cannot be executed in AUTO, then PROG is tried. If the command cannot
be executed in PROG, then MAN mode is implemented for the operator to complete the
command.

Endfil
This Endfil icon will immediately add an ENDFIL statement to the program. ENDFIL will signify the
DMIS program is complete and will close any open devices such as files, printers etc.

Work Plan
Work Plan will add the selected WKPLAN/ statement to the DMIS program.

- 436 -
 Home

The home icon reveals 3 home options.

DMESW/COMAND,'HOME' will create the command to send the machine to it’s home postion.
FROM/X,Y,Z will set a soft home at the specified location.
GOHOME will execute a soft home based on the FROM/ values.

GoTarg
GOTARG will create a GOTARG/ statement in the program using the current sensor location as the
target. Intermediate moves may have to be added to avoid potential collisions.

FLY
When fly mode is enabled, a curved motion is created where possible instead
of a straight-line motion. This fly motion can decrease execution time through
more efficient movements, but at the cost of movement accuracy. It is good
practice to turn fly mode off when measuring very small bores. Selecting a fly mode from the
menu will immediately write the selection to the program.

PSTHRU Control

The PSTHRU/ commands control the passing of statements in the program to the output file.
Please refer to the DMIS manual for additional information.

Compensation

There are 3 compensation on/off commands in DMIS.

- 437 -
GECOMP/ turns on or off machine geometrical compensation.
TECOMP/ turns on or off temperature compensation.
PRCOMP/ turns on or off probe compensation.

Insert comment line

A click on the Insert comment line will present a menu to select the
desired action.
$$ will simply insert the $$ representing a comment before the current
selected line. TEXT/OUTFIL and TEXT/OPER will display a small text-box
at the bottom of the Program database. Enter the desired text and hit the ENTER key. The TEXT/
will be inserted before the current selected line.
TEXT/OUTFIL will send the text to any open output device.
TEXT/OPER will display a window with text for the operator.

Clear DMIS statement

The Clear DMIS icon will delete all content from the DMIS program window
A prompt is issued before deleting to confirm the action.

Drop definition
Drag and drop a feature from the Feature database onto the Drop Definition icon to define the
feature in the DMIS program. If a feature nominal is dropped, a nominal definition will be added
to the DMIS program. If a feature actual is dropped, the actual feature including measurement
points will be added to the DMIS program. The definition of the feature will be in the current
coordinate system.

Drop output:
Drag and drop a feature from the Feature database to the Drop Output icon to create a DMIS
statement to output the feature. The feature will not output until the generated code has been
executed.

Drop output+

If the current highlighted line is a feature output statement (OUTPUT/FA(), a tolerance label
can be dragged from the tolerance database and dropped on the Drop Output + icon to add
generated output code to the exiting program. The existing output statement is not touched.
OUTPUT/FA(CIR1), TA(TPOS2D1)

- 438 -
 Drop measurement statement block

Drag a feature nominal that has not been measured from the Feature database and drop on the
Drop Measurement Statement Block icon to generate the code for to measure the dropped
nominal. The new feature measurement code is based on the current coordinate system and the
current units. The feature will not be measured until the code is executed.

Append at the end always

Append at the end always is a toggle on/off icon. When enabled, any code generated by
whatever means will be added to the end of the program regardless of which line is selected.
When Append at the end always is off, DMIS will be inserted at the current line. The default
position for this icon is enabled.

DMIS dependency check icon

The DMIS Dependency Check icon is a toggle on/off icon. When on, the DMIS Dependency check
will make sure the current coordinate system, the current active sensor and the current units
match with the corresponding settings when the feature was initially programmed.
When in the default position of off, no check is performed.

DMIS mirror icon

The DMIS mirror icon enables mirroring of the current DMIS program. A left click on the Mirror
DMIS Icon will display a small dialog at the bottom of the program database.

The program can either be mirrored about a plane by dragging a plane from the feature database
and dropping it on the drop-down list. The program can be mirrored about an existing coordinate
system by dragging the label from the coordinate system database and dropping onto the
coordinate system text-box, then selecting the desired working plane to mirror about from the
drop-down.
NOTE: The program is only mirrored in memory and thus does not generate a mirrored program
to save or edit.

- 439 -
Custom View Database

The Custom View database stored any saved graphical views including project views, graphical
report views, form error report views, dimension labels. To activate any view saved in the Custom
View database, drag the desired custom view label and drop it onto the graphics view. Anytime a
selection is made in the Custom view database, a small preview window will appear at the lower
portion of the Custom View database. All items within the Custom View database are saved as
part of a RationalDMIS solution file. When a solution is opened, any custom views saved with
that solution file are also opened.

- 440 -
Custom View Database - Project Views

Saved Project views can be used to easily return to a location without having to manipulate the
graphics back to the desired position. This is very handy for CAD object selection. Any saved view
that is displayed is fully interactive.

Parent Project View Node Right Click

Save
Save will take a snapshot of the current graphics area display and save it as a new node under the
Project View parent node. The saved view will be given the default name of “View” plus an
incrementing number.
Save As
Save as will save the view in the same manner as “Save”, but the user can enter a user defined
name to call the saved view.
Delete All
Delete All will delete all of the saved views under the Project View parent node.

Project View Sub-node Right Click

Activate
Active will change the view to display the selected saved view. The view is fully interactive as
normal. A view node may also be dragged from the Custom view database and dropped onto the
Graphics are to activate it.
Delete
The selected view will be deleted.

- 441 -
Custom View Database - Graphical Reports View

In much the same manner as conventional views, Graphic reports can also be saved for later
recall.

Graphical Reports View Parent Node Right Click

Delete All
Delete All will delete all saved graphical report views.
Note: Graphical reports view can not be saved in the same manner as Project Views. A graphical
report view must be saved while creating the graphical report.

Save All Reports As PDF

Save All Reports As PDF will save all saved graphical reports as PDF files. Each saved report is a
separate page in the PDF file.

- 442 -
Graphical Report View Sub-node Right Click

Activate
Activate will display the graphical report. The activated graphical report is fully interactive as
normal.

Delete
Delete will delete the selected graphical report view.

Add Report to Output

The saved graphical report can be added to the current output report by dragging the desired
saved graphical report view and dragging it to the output view and dropping.

- 443 -
Custom View Database - Form Error Report View

Form error reports can be saved for later recall.

Form Error Report View Parent Node Right Click

Delete All
Delete All will delete all saved Form error report views.
Note: Form Error reports view can not be saved in the same manner as Project Views. A form
error report view must be saved while creating the form error report.

- 444 -
Picture layout design
The Picture layout design will display a large window which allows multiple from error reports to
appear on a single page in user defined rows and columns.
The Picture Layout Design can be set as either Portrait or Landscape and has a maximum row
column count of 10x10.

Once the number of rows and columns have been set using the text-boxes at the top of the
Picture Layout Design window, form error views can be dragged from the tree on the right and
dropped onto the layout window.

- 445 -
Once setup, the resulting image can be saved as either a JPG picture or a PDF file. The setup can
be saved as a template by right clicking on the Layout template node of the tree on the right.
Multiple templates can be saved. The Picture Layout Design is saved as part of the solution file.
A template can be recalled by right clicking on the desired template node and clicking Activate.

The saved template can be recalled and output programmatically in a DMIS program.
$$ Set.FormError.OutputTemplate(FormError-T1)
DID(MyTest) = device/STOR,'c:\TemplateTest.PDF'
Open/DID(MyTest), FORMERR, OUTPUT
Close/DID(MyTest)

- 446 -
Custom View Database - Dimension Label Report View

When the graphical report is set to create dimension labels, the dimension label graphical report
can be saved to the Custom View database by clicking on the Save icon in the graphics toolbar
and selecting “Save as Graphical Report”.

The right click menus behave in the same fashion as other Custom View database right click
menus.

- 447 -
Custom View Database - Display Layers

Layers can effectively “slice” through the graphics to show only a layer.

Layer is not used: Layer is used:

To create a new layer, right click on the Display Layer node of the Custom View database and
select “Add Layer”.

A small window will be displayed at the bottom of the Custom View database. To display the
layer immediately, check on Activate now. Select Accept to close the window and create the slice.

A new layer may also be created by dragging a plane feature from the Feature database and
dropping it onto the Display Layers node of the Custom View database. A new node under
Display layers will be created and the new slice layer will become active.

- 448 -
Layers can be created from coordinate systems by dragging the coordinate system label from the
Coordinate System database and dropping onto the Display Layers node of the Custom View
database.

- 449 -
Function Operation Area

The Function Operation Panel includes the following areas:

Measurement operation panel (CTRL+F1)
Sensor operation panel (CTRL+F2)
Coordinate system operation panel (CTRL+F3)
Construct operation panel (CTRL+F4)
Tolerance operation panel (CTRL+F5)
Machine state operation panel (CTRL+F6)

- 450 -
Measurement Operations Panel

Select “Measurement” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Measurement Operations panel.

RationalDMIS divides measurement features into 2 dimensional feature types and 3 dimensional
feature types.

A working plane is required when measuring a 2 dimensional features. The working plane is used
to determine sensor compensation a feature projection.
A Point and an edge point feature both rely on probe compensation to calculate correctly.
Line, circle, arc, ellipse, slot and curve all depend on work plane projection.

A 3D feature does not require a work plane. Work plane selection will be disabled in the
measurement operation panel when measuring 3D feature.

Measurement Operations Panel

- 451 -
Measurement - Intelligent Measurement

Intelligent measurement automatically identifies measured feature types negating the need for
the operator to select a feature type before measurement.
The identification of feature types is performed by analyzing each measured point for vector and
location in relation to other points in the measurement sequence.
Intelligent measurement is only available during manual measurement.

Feature types that intelligent measurement supports: points, edge points, lines, planes, circles,
cylinders, cones and spheres feature.

To enable Intelligent Measurement, toggle on the Smart Measurement icon on the extreme left
of the measurement operations toolbar.

When intelligent measurement has determined a feature type, the appropriate icon is selected in
the measurement operations toolbar. If intelligent measurement has selected an incorrect
feature type, simply click on the icon for the desired feature type to correct.

As with any measurement, the icons at the lower right of the measurement operations panel
allow point management and measurement acceptance.

Select the “delete” icon to delete a single point.

The “Delete all” icon can be used to delete “all measure points”

When the measurement has been completed, click the green Finish arrow
to accept the measurement. The feature will be created and will be added
to the Feature database.

- 452 -
Measurement - Measurement of Two-dimensional Features

Two-dimensional features in RationalDMIS consist of: lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, slots, curves.
A work plane is required at the time of measurement to calculate the feature projection. Under
most circumstances, RationalDMIS automatically selects the correct work plane.

For example, to measure a line, first select the line icon.

The measurement operation panel is automatically set for line measurement.

RationalDMIS provides an automatically incrementing default label name.

Enter a new label name in the text-box to the right of “Label”

The work plane default is “Closest CRD Plane”, which calculates the feature correctly under most
circumstances. TO choose another work plane click on the Closest CRD
Plane drop-down and select a work plane. Alternately a plane feature
can be dragged from the feature database and dropped onto the Closest
CDR Plane drop-down to become the selected work plane.

To take a measurement point, move the measuring machine sensor to make slight contact with
the part at the desired location. A point will automatically be recorded. Depending on the
machine type moving the sensor with either require manually moving the axes to the point or
using a joystick to move.

If the measured points are set to count up, the counter will increment by one. If set to count
down, the counter will de-increment by one. See “Measurement Operations Panel – Setting” for
more details.

- 453 -
Near the center of the measurement operations panel is a histogram displaying the points as they
are measured. Hover the mouse cursor over a point to see a tool-tip displaying the form error of
the point. Each time a point is taken, the feature and as a result, the form error are recalculated.
Details of the form error are shown to the right of the histogram.

To delete the last measured point, click the Delete icon.

To delete a point prior to the last point, click on the point in the histogram to highlight it, then

click the Delete icon.

To delete all the measured points, click on the Delete All icon.

To finish the measurement, click the green finish icon. The feature will be calculated and
added to the Feature database.

- 454 -
Measurement - Measurement of Three-dimensional Features

3 dimensional features in RationalDMIS consist of: planes, spheres, cylinders, cones, torus’,
surfaces.
A work plane selection is not required with 3D features.

For example, to measure a sphere, first select the sphere icon.

The measurement operation panel is automatically set for sphere measurement.

RationalDMIS provides an automatically incrementing default label name.

Enter a new label name in the text-box to the right of “Label”

To take a measurement point, move the measuring machine sensor to make slight contact with
the part at the desired location. A point will automatically be recorded. Depending on the
machine type moving the sensor with either require manually moving the axes to the point or
using a joystick to move.

If the measured points are set to count up, the counter will increment by one. If set to count
down, the counter will de-increment by one. See “Measurement Operations Panel – Setting” for
more details.

- 455 -
Near the center of the measurement operations panel is a histogram displaying the points as they
are measured. Hover the mouse cursor over a point to see a tool-tip displaying the form error of
the point. Each time a point is taken, the feature and as a result, the form error are recalculated.
Details of the form error are shown to the right of the histogram.

To delete the last measured point, click the Delete icon.

To delete a point prior to the last point, click on the point in the histogram to highlight it, then

click the Delete icon.

To delete all the measured points, click on the Delete All icon.

To finish the measurement, click the green finish icon. The feature will be calculated and
added to the Feature database.

- 456 -
Measurement - Measurement Operations Panel

The Measurement working panel is available by clicking the “Measurement” icon in the
Operations Toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open the Measurement Operations panel.

The Measurement Operations Panel

The Measurement operations panel is divided into 5 panels by tabs in the upper right:
the measurement setting panel
Histogram view
Measure points management
Sheet Metal
Nominal definition

- 457 -
Measurement Operations Panel – Settings Panel

Measurement options can be set in the Settings Panel by

clicking on the Settings tab. There are icons on the left of the
panel to indicate the setting type.

Feature setting

User Min PTs

The User Min pts defines the minimum number of points required to measure a feature.
The minimum points must be equal to or above the mathematical minimum number of points to
calculate the feature. The User Min pts value is used for numerous automatic measurement
functions.
Feature Type RationalDMIS required minimum points
Point 0 (0 records the probe location)
Edge Point 1
Line 2
Plane 3
Circle 3
Arc 3
Sphere 4
Cylinder 5
Cone 6
Ellipse 6
Slot 5
Torus 9
Curve 3
Surface 3

Prefix
RationalDMIS uses a prefix to automatically generate a feature label. For example, if “PT” is the
prefix of used for a point feature, RationalDMIS will successively generate PT1, PT2, PT3 and so
on. The prefix can be user defined, but must be a legal DMIS label.

Digital counting
When measuring a feature the digits in the measurement operation panel can count up until the

- 458 -
operator stops measuring or can count down from a user defined value.

Automatic Create and 10mm/100mm2

When RationalDMIS automatically generates point to measure a feature, the points can be
generated either “Fixed” or “Density”.
The default value of “Fixed” will generate the points equally spaced throughout the feature. The
number of points generated is taken from the User Min Pts value.
If Auto Create is set to “Density,” the value entered in 10mm|100mm2 is used to calculate the
points based on density and feature type.
If the feature is a 2D feature, then the value entered in 10mm|100mm2 is used to calculate the
number of points to be generated. If the value is 5, then there will be 5 points per 10mm.
If the feature is a 3D feature, the points entered in 10mm|100mm2 will be used to generate the
points based on 100mm2. If the entered value is 5, then the generated pints will consist of 5
points per 100mm2.

Scan setting

The Scan Setting options will vary according to what type of machine is in use.
If the machine is a manual machine with a hard probe, only “Manual Scan” will be enabled.
If the machine is a manual machine with a touch trigger probe or a scanning head, “DCC Scan” is
enabled. If the machine is a DCC machine with a touch trigger probe or a scanning head and the
machine controller supports scanning, full options are available.

Manual scan
Manual scan can be set to “No Scan”, “Distance Scanning” or “Cross Plane Scanning”.
No scan disables any scanning.

Distance Scanning

To preform “Distance Scanning”, make sure “Distance Scanning” is checked on and enter a Scan
Distance value in the Scan Distance text-box. A point will be recorded each time the machine
moves beyond the entered Scan Distance value.

- 459 -
Cross Place Scanning

Cross plane scanning uses a plane to “slice” through the object to be scanned. Each time the
plane is crossed, a point will be registered. The plane can be user defined by entering the XYZIJK
values, or can be a plane feature dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the Label
text-box.

DCC Scan

Select DCC Scan from the drop-down list.

DCC scanning requires 4 user defined parameters to be entered on the right side of the panel.
“Scan Step” defines the distance between one registered scan point and the next.
“Scan Height” refers to a distance above the nominal that a scan point will be accepted. A point
taken beyond that value will result is a collision.
“Scan Depth” refers to a distance below the nominal that a scan point will be accepted. A point
taken beyond that value will result is a collision.
“Dead Zone” refers to the area near the start of a feature and near the end of a feature where
points are not taken.

- 460 -
Shrink setting
Shrink setting is used to set a known shrink parameter of a material to allow measurement in less
than idea conditions or before an operation that may shrink the part. Check on the “Enable
Shrink” box on the right to enable. Select either a direct shrink factor or microns per meter from
the drop down and enter the value in the text-box to the right.

Actual Offset Setting/Vector Build Setting

To allow compensation for various events, features can make use of offsets. Select the feature
from the drop-down list, select Offset Act from the offset drop-down and enter the offset value in
the text-box. Features permitted to make use of Offset are: points, edge points, angle points,
circles, slots, ellipses and planes
Vector build setting
When using Vector build, a user defined number of sample points are measured at a user defined
distance around the nominal feature. Select the number of sample points from 3 to 6 from the
Sample Points drop-down. Enter the sample distance in the Sample dist text-box.

Vector Build Setting

The sensor approach and retract of VECBLD measurements can be left to use the current
approach/retract values by selecting “No independent control” from the drop-down. To enable
user defined approach/retract values for VECBLD measurements, select “Independent control”

- 461 -
from the drop-down, then enter the desired values in the Approach and Retract text-boxes.
Clear Surface Setting
Clear Surface Setting offers greater clear surface control than the setting in the Setting panel. It
can be used to set different safe planes before and after measurement for elevation;

There are 4 options to control both Before and After measurement clearance plane behavior
individually. The “Clear Surface” setting will use the current clear surface setting. OFF will disable
clear surface moves. None will disable clear surface moves. A plane feature can be dragged from
the Feature database and dropped onto either the Before measurement or After measurement
drop downs to set a clearance plane. Once the method has been set, enter the clearance distance
in the corresponding text-boxes.

Hole search setting

This is the parameter setting window for hole search measuring
SMEAS/CIRCLE, F(LABLE), N [,{Search Radius}, {Apprch}, { Retract}, {Search}]

- 462 -
Measurement Operations Panel – Histogram View

Digit counter
The digit counter is at the left of the Histogram view. Depending on the setting, the digit counter
can count either up or down. The digit counter will change color according to the setting.

If the feature is set to count up (see Settings Panel), the digits will appear green in color and will
increment by one each time a point is measured. The counter will continue to add points until
deleted or the green finish check-mark has been clicked.
If the feature is set to count down (see Settings Panel), the digits will appear blue in color and will
de-increment by one each time a point is measured. The starting number in the counter will be
the user defined minimum number of points for that feature type. Once the counter has reached
0, the feature will automatically be accepted and added to the Feature database. The histogram
view will be ready to measure another feature of the same type.
If the digits are blue, the user can increase the count by clicking on any of the digits to increase or
decrease the value (the value cannot be decreased below the minimum number of points).
In the image above, the red square is the 100’s indicator, the blue square is the 1000’s indicator.
The max set value can be up to 9999. More points that 9999 can be measured and recorded, but
the counter will not go beyond 9999.

- 463 -
Histogram window
The histogram window displays the form error of the feature.

Each point in histogram window represents a measured point. A small “running man” figure
represents a GOTO move within the measurement sequence. A small probe graphic represents a
probe index or change within the measurement sequence.
Hover the mouse over an individual point to see a tool-tip of the point deviation from a
theoretical perfect form.
Just to the right of the histogram window are a series of text-boxes showing the actual current
form error location and value and well as the maximum error and value.

The “Low Tol” and “Up Tol” values are indicated by the green lines in the histogram window.
If the measured point falls between the upper and lower tolerance the point will be represented
in blue. If the point is out of tolerance, it will be shown in red. The last measured point is shown
active in bright green until another point is measured which then becomes the active point.
Click on any point in the sequence to make that point active. Once a point is active, specific form
deviation for that point can be seen. The active point can be deleted with the Delete Point icon
near the lower right. At any time that a point is measured or deleted, RationalDMIS will
recalculate the feature.

Feature Label Input

By default, RationalDMIS will automatically generate a new feature label for each measurement
using a prefix and incrementing number (pt1,pt2,pt3 etc). There are a number of ways to change
the default label name:
The user can simply type in a new name in the label text-box.
The user can change the default prefix in the settings.
The user can right click on the feature type node in the feature database and click “Add Prefix” to
enter a new prefix.
The user can drag a feature from the Feature database and drop it onto the label text-box. If a
feature from the Feature database is dropped onto the Label text-box, the measurement will use
the nominal of the dropped feature as the measurement nominal.

- 464 -
Coordinate Plane Selection

When measuring two-dimensional features, a work plane must be used

in order to calculate probe compensation and feature projection.
In most cases RationalDMIS will select the correct working plane.

The coordinate plane selection has 4 settings plus drag and drop.
Closest CRD Plane will allow RationalDMIS to select the working plane based on the feature point
locations and vectors relating to the current active coordinate system.
The XY, YZ and ZX will use the corresponding selected work plane in the current coordinate
system.
A plane feature can also be dragged from the feature database to the Coordinate Plane Selection
drop-down to become the selected work plane.
3-D features do not require a work plane, work plane selection will be disabled.

Work plane/VecBuild button

A left click on the Work Plane button will change it to VecBuild. VecBuild is a method of sampling
points surrounding a feature to determine the vector of the feature.

Without vecBLD, measuring a feature that does not lie parallel to any coordinate system plane
would require a lengthy process of measuring around the feature to create a plane, drag and drop
that plane into the Coordinate Plane selection drop-down and then finally measuring the feature.
VecBLD does essentially the same behind the scenes, but in use sample points are taken and then
the feature is measured.

Real-time calculation

Real time calculation is checked on by default. Within a feature

measurement, each time a point is measured or removed, the feature is re-calculated. This real
time point by point recalculation generally does not interfere with conventional point
measurement. In situations where points are measured in rapid succession, the point by point
recalculation would slow the point taking process. When a feature is being scanned, Real time
calculation will be automatically turned off. Real time Calculation can be turned of manually be
un-checking Real time Calculation When disabled, the feature is calculated at the end of the
measurement sequence.

- 465 -
Delete Point/Delete All
When points have been measured the Delete and Delete All icons will become
enabled. Delete All will delete all the points in the measurement. The Delete icon
will delete the selected point. To select a point other than the last measured point, left click on
the desired point graphic in the histogram window. If selected, the point will show bright green
and can now be deleted.

End current measurement

If the feature being measured is set to Count Up and the measured points have met the
minimum number of points to calculate the feature, the green Finish check-mark will be
enabled. Click the check-mark to finish the measurement, calculate the feature and put the
feature in the Feature Database. If Learn mode is on, a DMIS measurement block will be written
to the DMIS program.
The Finish icon is not needed if the feature being measured is set to count down as the feature
automatically finishes when the digit counter has reached 0.

Find Nom point

The Find Nom text-box is empty by default. It accepts drag and drop
of the following features: straight line, line, plane, circle, cone,
sphere, arc, ellipse, slot, curve, surface and CAD model. When a feature is dropped into the Find
Nom text-box, all measured points will be projected to the dropped feature.
NOTE: Be aware of the column the feature was dragged from (Nom or Act). The color of the
feature type graphic to the left of the text-box will indicate red for Actual or blue for Nominal.

Project current features

The Project text-box is empty by default. It accepts drag and drop of the
following: straight line, line, plane, circle, cone, sphere, arc, ellipse, slot, curve, surface and CAD
model. When the measurement is completed, RationalDMIS will attempt to project the measured
feature to the feature in the Project text-box. There are no error messages if the feature cannot
be projected. The feature is simply calculated and added to the Feature database without
projected to the dropped feature. If the projection is successful and learn mode is on, the
projection DMIS code will be written to the DMIS program.
NOTE: Be aware of the column the feature was dragged from (Nom or Act). The color of the
feature type graphic to the left of the text-box will indicate red for Actual or blue for Nominal.

Scan

The scan icon is only available if the connected controller is capable of scanning.
As scanning methods can differ from controller to controller, scanning methods will be discussed
in individual controller documentation.

- 466 -
Measurement Operations Panel – Measure Points Management

The Measure Points Management window is used for automatic point generation and
management of automatically generated points. Measure Points management does not apply to
manual machines. It is only relevant to DCC machines or offline programming for DCC machines.

The measure points management window can only be used with previously defined features to
generate measurement paths for those features.

Label text-box
Once a feature has been dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the text-box to
the right of Label, the toolbar will change to the dropped feature type. If the dropped feature has
no points, the point window will remain empty, but the point counter will change to represent
the minimum number of points for that feature type.

Digit counter
The digit counter is at the left of the Measure Points management window. To change a value,
place the mouse cursor over the desired digit and use the mouse scroll wheel to scroll the
numbers up or down. When the digit count shows a number that is equal to or greater then the
minimum number of points for that feature, the point generation icon directly beside the points
window.

Selecting/Deselecting points in the point window.

Individual points can be selected by clicking on them. A group of points can be selected by
holding down the SHIFT key while clicking. A non-continuous group of points can be selected by
holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the desired points. Selected points can be selected
by right clicking anywhere in the point window.

Deleting points in the point window

Selected points are deleted by clicking the Delete Point icon.

All points can be deleted by clicking on the Delete All icon.

- 467 -
Insert GOTO
A GOTO position point can be inserted a number of ways.
If a point is selected in the point window, the GOTO will be inserted before the selected point. If a
point is not selected, the GOTO will be added to the end of the points list.
When creating a GOTO, XYZ of the current probe position can be a goto.
Alternately, a GOTO Position dragger may be used with the graphics to create a GOTO position.

To use the graphics and the GOTO dragger, click on the graphic of the path (green line) in the
desired location. The dragger will appear at that location Move the dragger to the desired GOTO
position and then click the Insert GOTO icon. The GOTO will be inserted into the point window at
the correct location.

- 468 -
Editing Point Window Values
Each XYZIJK value in the point window can be edited. Double click on the desired parameter and
enter a new value. Click anywhere inside the point window to accept the edit.

Reverse vector
The Reverse vector icon is located to the right of the Delete Points icons on the right, below the
tabs. Click the reverse vector icon to reverse all of the vectors of the selected points. If no points
are selected, Reverse Vector will reverse vectors on all of the points in the measurement window.
The graphics of the measurement path will change to display the modification.

Offset Points
Some 2D features can be offset. Those features are: lines, circles, arcs, curves, ellipses and slots.
The offset units are the current measurement units and the direction of the offset in generally
the opposite of the nominal vector direction. Click the Offset icon to apply the offset. The
graphics of the measurement path will update to show the newly offset points.

Create DMIS
If Learn mode is enabled and the Create DMIS icon is enabled, a left click on the create DMIS icon
will generate the DMIS code to measure the feature based on the contents of the point window.

Create point cloud

If points are in the points window, then the Create Point Cloud icon will be enabled. Click on the
icon to create a point cloud of the points in the points window.

Preview
When clicked, the preview icon will show a graphical preview of the measurement path.

Measure
Clicking the Measurement icon will begin executing the measurement.
If a point is selected in the point window, only the selected point will run. TO run all points, right
click in the points window to deselect all in the measurement window.

- 469 -
Measurement Operations Panel – Sheet Metal

This option allows sheet metal point generation to be offset by the individual axis. The feature
window is the X, Y, and Z axis to be all considered as Actual feature. The Actual to Nominal
difference adjusts the generated point in the corresponding axis.
DMIS for this measurement synquence is
RMEAS/CIRCLE, F(CIR4), 6, FA(PT16),XDIR, FA(SPH1),YDIR, FA(CON1),ZDIR

- 470 -
Measurement Operations Panel - Feature Definition

The Feature Definition Window is used to create new nominal features or to edit existing nominal
feature data.

Feature label
By default, RationalDMIS will automatically generate a new feature label for each measurement
using a prefix and incrementing number (pt1,pt2,pt3 etc). There are a number of ways to change
the default label name:
The user can simply type in a new name in the label text-box.
The user can change the default prefix in the settings.
The user can right click on the feature type node in the feature database and click “Add Prefix” to
enter a new prefix.
Existing features can be dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the Feature label
text-box. The toolbar will update to show the dropped feature type. The parameters of the
dropped feature will populate the nominal parameter text-boxes based on the current coordinate
system and the current units.

Parameter input text-boxes

The feature parameter input requirements will change depending on the feature type selected
from the toolbar. The basic parameters include the XYZ location and the IJK vector direction.
Other parameters depending on the feature type may be diameter, length etc.
Both XYZ and IJK parameters can be duplicated from existing features. If the XYZ of a feature is to
be re-used in another feature, drag the desired feature from the Feature database tab and drop
onto the X parameter text-box. The XYZ parameters will be populated based on the dropped
feature. Likewise, dropping a feature onto the “I” text-box of the IJK parameters will populate the
parameters based on the dropped feature.
If any of the XYZ boxes are empty the Add Nominal/Add Actual buttons will be disabled.
The IJK vector values must be realistic. The Add buttons will remain disable with a 0,0,0 entered
for IJK.
Once all data requirements are satisfied, the Preview, Add Nom and Add Act buttons will become
enabled.

The preview button

The Preview button will briefly display a red graphical preview of feature in the graphics view.

- 471 -
Add Nom button
The Add Nom button will accept the feature definition and add it to the Nominal column of the
Feature database.

Add Act button

The Add Act button will add both a nominal and actual feature to the feature database. As both
the nominal and actual are created from the same data, they will be identical in location,
direction and size(if applicable)

- 472 -
Feature Definition - Point

A point feature needs XZY position parameters and IJK direction parameters.

Reverse vector
If the IJK vector input is valid, the Reverse vector icon will become enabled. Click the icon to
reverse the entered vector.

Find Vector
The “Find Vec” text-box allows the drag and drop of CAD models or features from the Feature
database. Click the green arrow to find the vector. The entered IJK vector information wll be
modified to show the new vector values determined by projected the point onto the dropped
CAD or feature. Only the IJK vector values will be modified.

Project Point
Project Point works the same as “Find Vec”. The only difference is when the point is projected
onto the dropped CAD model or feature, both the IJK results and also the XYZ results are
modified.

Offset Distance
The offset distance will change the entered data on the axis corresponding to the nominal vector
by the entered amount. For example, if the XYZ is 0,0,0 and the IJK is 0,0,1 and a value of 10 is
entered, the new XYZ values will be 0,0,10.

- 473 -
Find Nominal From CAD

If a CAD model is in use, it can be used to generate missing nominal data and vectors.
If 2 values are entered into the XYZ parameters text-boxes, then RationalDMIS will use those 2
values to determine the third value. Of course, the results will differ depending on what 2 values
are provided and the direction of the selected direction of the unknown value.
Find Nom from CAD (XY +Z):
Given X, Y, the software automatically finds the +Z value and IJK vector information from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (XY -Z):
Given X, Y, the software automatically finds the -Z value and IJK vector information from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (YZ +X):
Given Y, Z, the software automatically finds the +X value and IJK vector information from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (YZ -X):
Given Y, Z, the software automatically finds the -X value and IJK vector information from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (ZX +Y):
Given Z, X, the software automatically finds the +Y value and IJK vector information from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (ZX -Y):
Given Z, X, the software automatically finds the -Y value and IJK vector information from CAD.

High point
Notice there is a new Icon at the top right corner of POINT definition window. This toggle icon
switches the Point definition to Default point or High Point. High Point has a secondary vector.
The secondary vector together wiht point XYZ define this High Point Measurement plane.
Meas/Point, F(Label), 1
PAMEAS/
Endmes
Pameas is a Curve scan. After scan, High point will find the Curve Extrem point in the direction
of the Point normal vector.
DMIS for high point definition
F(Label) = feat/Point, cart, x, y, z, i, j, k, vec, ni, nj, nk

- 474 -
For POINT with High point property, the right mous menu popup Define Guided Path Scan option. This menu
bring up High Point scan definition window. High Point scan defines 3 scan control point. The distance from
Point 1 to Point 3 is Length.

The nominal point is the second point. The scan block generated is similar to the following.
MEAS/POINT, F(MYPT11), 3
GOTO/CART,468.632281,485.765840,639.149999,HEADCS,0.000000,0.000000
PAMEAS/P(KNMYPT11)
GOTO/CART, 468.632281, 475.765840, 639.149999
ENDMES

- 475 -
 Feature Definition - Edge Point

Edge points are normally used on sheet metal and other thin walled components. An edge point
is shown below.

An edge point feature includes positional X, Y, Z values. The IJK values represent the direction of 1
plane in the edge point. The nI,nJ,nK values represent the plane 90° to the IJK. All parameter
values are based on the current coordinate system and the current units.
An edge point can be defined graphically by picking a point on the graphics of a feature of CAD
model. RationalDMIS will then automatically find the nearest edge point and the 2 vectors.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector only. The nI, nJ, nK vector does not change.

- 476 -
Feature Definition - Line

A line can be defined as either “bound” or “unbound”. A “bound” line is a line of a known length.
Unbound is unknown.

The Bound/Unbound icon in the upper right of the line definition window is a toggle icon
and toggles between bound and unbound. The line definition interface will change depending on
the selection.

Bound line definition

A bound line can either be defined by entering the length of the line, or by using 2 points to
define the length. Click on the Bound/Unbound icon on the upper right of the panel to set to
Bound.
Length definition method

The XYZ parameters define the location of the middle point of the line. The IJK parameters define
the direction of the line. The I1, J1, K1 define which side of the line the measurement occurs on.
L is length of line.

2 points definition method

The X1, Y1, Z1 parameters define the start point of the line, the X2, Y2, Z2 parameters are the end
point of the line. The I1, J1, K1 define which side of the line the measurement occurs on.

- 477 -
Unbound line definition
Click on the Bound/Unbound icon on the upper right of the panel to switch to Bound.

The X, Y, Z parameters define the middle of the line. The I, J, K parameters define the line
direction The I1, J1, K1 define which side of the line the measurement occurs on. As the line is
defined as Unbound there are no parameters to define the length of the line.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector only.

- 478 -
Feature Definition - Plane Feature

A plane feature is unbound by default, but can be bound using constructions.

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center of the plane. The IJK values define the plane
vector direction.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 479 -
Feature Definition - Circle

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center of the circle. The IJK values define the
vector direction of the circle ( which “side” of the circle). The “D” value defines the nominal
diameter of the circle. If the radius is to be defined rather than the diameter, clicking on the “D”
will change the input to radius.
The inner/outer drop down defines whether the circle is an inner or an outer. Using a pipe as an
example, inner would be the inside of the pipe while outer would be the outside.

Inner Outer

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 480 -
Feature Definition - Arc

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center point of the arc. The IJK values define the
direction. The I1,J1,K1 values define the vector direction of the start point of the arc. “R” defines
the nominal radius of the arc. If the diameter is to be defined rather than the radius, clicking on
the “R” will change the input to “D” diameter. “A” defines the nominal total angle of the arc.

The red point in the image to the left is the central

position of arc. The start point vector of arc is the red
line. The angle is the angle between red line and
white line.

The inner/outer drop down defines whether the arc is an inner or an outer arc. Using a pipe as an
example, inner would be the inside of the pipe while outer would be the outside.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

There is an alternate method available to define an arc.

Click Alternative Definition on the upper right of the panel to change the interface to the
alternate definition. There is a question mark to the right of the Alternate definition icon
that provides a graphic to explain the input parameters.
The XYZ parameters define the location of the arc center point. The Arc Plane drop-downdefines
the work plane that the arc lies in. The Major Axis defines an directional axis. The Major axis will
be one component of the work plane. If the work plane is XY then the major axis will be
+X,-X,+Y,-Y. The start angle is the start angle of the radius defined as an angle from the Major Axis.
The included angle defines the total angle of the arc.

- 481 -
Feature Definition - Sphere

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center point of the sphere. The “D” value defines
the nominal diameter of the sphere. If the radius is to be defined rather than the diameter,
clicking on the “D” will change the input to radius. The inner/outer drop down defines whether
the sphere is an inner or an outer sphere. The XYZ, D, inner outer are all that is required to define
a basic free sphere in space.
Additional parameters may be applied to further define the
sphere. The IJK parameters define the vector direction to the
pole of the sphere. The “A” angle parameter defines the
bounded area of the sphere. “A” is defined from a plane
perpendicular to the vector intersecting the center of the
sphere.
Note: An A value of 0 is the sphere horizon. A positive A value
indicates an angle from the horizon in the same direction as the
vector. A negative A angle defines the angle from the horizon in
the opposite direction to the vector.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 482 -
Feature Definition - Cylinder

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center point of the cylinder. The IJK values define
the direction of the cylinder axis. The “D” value defines the nominal diameter of the sphere. If
the radius is to be defined rather than the diameter, clicking on the “D” will change the input to
radius. The “H” parameter defines the height (or length) of the cylinder. The “H” value is centered
on the ZYX values.
The inner/outer drop down defines whether the cylinder is an inner or an outer. Using a pipe as
an example, inner would be the inside of the pipe while outer would be the outside.

Inner Outer

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 483 -
Feature Definition - Cone

The XYZ parameters define the location of the apex of the

cone. The IJK values define the vector direction of the cone
from the apex to the mouth. The “A” value defines the
angle of the cone from the center. The inner/outer drop
down defines whether the cone is an inner or an outer
cone.
The above entries are all that is required to define a cone.
A cone can be further defined as a
segmented cone either through 2
distances from the apex or two
diameters of the cone.

Select either Apex Distance or Diameter from the Segmented

Cone drop-down. Dist1 and Dist2, or Diam1 and Diam2 define
the top and bottom of the segmented cone.
Apex is defined by Dist1 and Dist2, which are distances from the apex of the cone. Dist2 must be
larger than Dist1. Diameter is defined by entering diameters in Diam1 and Diam2 with Diam2
being larger than Diam1. All entries are in the current units.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

To choose an alternate method of defining a cone. Click on the Alternative Definition icon
in the upper right of the panel. Click the question mark to the right to see a description of
the parameters. The parameters are the same but, “D” has been added to define the diameter at
the mouth of the cone and “h” defines the height from the mouth of the cone.

- 484 -
Feature Definition - Ellipse

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center of the ellipse. The IJK values define the
vector direction along the length of the ellipse. The I1,J1,K1
values define the vector 90° to the IJK values along the width
of the ellipse. “L” defines the length of the ellipse while “W”
defines the width of the ellipse. The “L” and “W” parameters
cannot be the same value. The inner/outer drop down
defines whether the ellipse is an inner or an outer.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 485 -
Feature Definition-Slot Feature Definition

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center of the slot. The IJK values define the vector
direction along the length of the slot. The I1,J1,K1 values define the vector 90° to the IJK values
along the width of the slot. “L” defines the length of the slot while “W” defines the width of the
slot. The “L” and “W” parameters cannot be the same value. The inner/outer drop down defines
whether the slot is an inner or an outer.
Slots can be defined as either round or rectangle(or flat) slots. Round
slots have rounded ends where rectangle slots have squared off ends.
Select either round or rectangle from the drop down near the right of the
panel.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 486 -
Feature Definition - Torus

The XYZ parameters define the location of the center of the torus. The IJK values define the
vector direction of the circle. The “R” parameter is the larger radius of the torus, radiating from
the center outward perpendicular to the vector. The ‘r’ defines the small radius of the torus
which radiates around the larger diameter created by “R”. The inner/outer drop down defines
whether the ellipse is an inner or an outer.

Reverse vector
If the I,J,K values are valid, the reverse vector icon will become enabled. Clicking the reverse
vector will reverse the IJK vector values.

- 487 -
Feature Definition - Curve

The curve feature definition window is for editing an existing curve not for creating a new curve.
It is not practical to define all of the required parameters and control points required to create a
nominal curve. Curves can be extracted from CAD models or constructed.
While the curve definition window will allow a definition, the result is only a plane.

- 488 -
Feature Definition - Regular Polygon

Regular polygon supports hexagon and octagon feature definition.

X, Y, Z are center position of polygon.
I, J, K are plane vector of polygon located.
I1, J1, K1 are vector from center to start-end vertex
D is length of polygon vertex to center.

- 489 -
Construct

Select “Construction” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F4 to quickly open the Construction Operations panel.

Construction Operations Panel

The Construction Operations Panel provides tools and methods to construct new features from 1
or more existing features. Available construction are:
middle, parallel, intersection, tangent, project, move, best-fit, mirror, bound, cone, extreme,
offset plane, feature transformation, multiple point offset plane, copy create feature, sweep
construction.
Not all constructions will be available to all features. The construction panel interface will change
according the selected construction method.

- 490 -
Construct - Construction Result Window

Result feature
The result feature list will show all of the possible results for the given construction. Depending
on the feature(s), the construction feature type and parameters, there may be anywhere from 1
result to hundreds of results. The left of the result feature list is an icon to represent the feature
type. To the right of the feature type icon is the feature label. The label is automatically created
by RationalDMIS, but can be changed if needed. To change the name of a construction result
feature, double click on the desired result and enter a new label name.
A single click on a result will populate the result parameter window with the numerical
parameters of the selected features. The selected result can be previewed using the preview
button on the lower right of the construction panel. If the selected construction result can be
created and added to the feature database by clicking the Add Result button.

Result feature type selection

In cases where there are a number of results of different feature types, feature selection icons
will be displayed to the right of the results list. Click the icon for the desired feature type to
display only features of that type in the results list.

Parameter window
The parameter window shows the parameter values of the selected
feature. The values shown are in the current coordinate system and
the current units. If an actual feature is constructed, the parameter
window will show both nominal and actual results. If only a nominal
feature is created, then only the nominal parameters will be shown.

Nominal feature window

To the right of the parameter window is a small green arrow. This allows the drag and drop of a
nominal feature. Click the green arrow to display a nominal feature text-box. Drag a desired
feature from the feature database and drop onto the Nominal Features text-box.

- 491 -
The dropped nominal feature will force the construction to determine the best feature for the
dropped nominal. If a construction of the feature type is possible, the feature results list will
show only the feature closest to the dropped nominal. If no features of the dropped type can be
constructed, then the feature result list will remain blank.

Construct features
The construct features are the features that will be used to
make the resulting constructions. The interface for inputting
the features may change from construction to construction depending on construction methods.
Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop onto the construct feature input.
Once the construct features entries are properly populated, RationalDMIS will construct the
resulting feature(s).
When a feature is dragged from the Actual column of the Feature database to populate the
construct features inputs, the result will be actual feature(s). If the construct features where
dragged from the Nominal column of the Feature database, then the resulting feature(s) will be
nominal only.

Reverse vector
The Reverse Vector icon will reverse the vector of the resulting constructed feature.

Operation buttons
The Preview button on the lower right will display a graphical preview of the selected
construction result. The Add Result button will create the selected construction result feature and
add it to the Feature database. In some cases an Add All button will be available to create all of
the result features and add all of the result features to the Feature database.

- 492 -
Construct - Middle Feature

A middle feature construction will create a new feature midway in between 2 input features.
The features resulting from the construction can be points or point reducible features, lines or
line reducible features or planes. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to
the program.
The input features used to create the construction can be:
Points
Edge points
Lines
Planes
Circles
Arcs
Cylinders
Cones
Spheres
Ellipses
Slots
Torus’
Measure points

Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature. If a circle was measured with
4 points, then there are 4 measure points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A property page will be presented
with the points available by expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

- 493 -
The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a point
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
2nd Feature Middle construction results from a point reducible feature and 2nd feature
Point reducible
Point: middle point is equidistant from the two construct points
feature
Point: middle point is equidistant from the two construct points
Line reducible
Line: middle point is equidistant from the point and line and is parallel to the
feature
line
Plane Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and plane
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and plane
Circle Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the circle
Arc Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and arc
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and and cylinder central axis.
Cylinder Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the cylinder
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the cone apex
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the cone central axis
Cone
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the cone
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point the sphere center.
Sphere Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the sphere
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the ellipse center
Ellipse Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the ellipse
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the slot center.
Slot Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
onto the slot
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
Curve
onto the curve
Point: middle point is equidistant from the point and the same point projected
Surface
onto the surface

The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a line

- 494 -
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
2nd Feature Middle construction results from a line reducible feature and 2nd feature
middle point is equidistant from the two construct points
Point reducible Point:
middle point is equidistant from the point and line and is parallel to
feature Line:
the line
Line: If the two input lines are parallel, the resulting middle line is
equidistant from both input lines.
If the two input lines are on the same plane, the resulting middle line
is the center of the angle between the 2 lines.
Line reducible If the two input lines are on different planes, the resulting middle line
feature is the bisector of a common line passing between the 2 lines.
Plane: If the 2 input lines are parallel, the middle plane is equidistant and
parallel to the two lines
If the two input lines are not parallel, the middle plane equally divides
the and of the two lines
Line: The middle line between the input line and the input line projected
onto the plane.
Plane: Middle plane of between the input line and the input plane that
equally divides the angle between.
Plane
If the input line is parallel to the input plane, the resulting plane will
be midway between the two.
If the input plane is perpendicular to the input line, the construction
fails.

- 495 -
Construct - Parallel Feature

A parallel feature construction will create a new feature parallel to the 1st input feature that run
through the location of the 2nd input, which is a point reducible feature.
The features resulting from the construction can be lines or line reducible features or planes. If
Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.
The features used in the 2nd “Through” input box must be point reducible features or measured
points.
The features that can be used in the 1st “Parallel” input box:
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve

Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature. If a circle was measured with
4 points, then there are 4 measure points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A property page will be presented
with the points available by expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

- 496 -
The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the allowable 1st “Parallel”
feature while the 2nd point is any point reducible feature.
The 1st “Parallel” feature is in the left column with the results to the right. The resulting feature
type is the underlined feature.
The “Through” input feature is any point reducible feature.
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to construct line.
Line Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
towards construct point from project point of construct point on line.
Plane Plane: middle point of plane is construct point and is parallel to construct plane.
Circle Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to plane of construct circle.
Arc Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to plane of construct circle.
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to axis of construct cylinder.
Cylinder Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
towards construct point from project point of construct point on cylinder axis.
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to construct cone axis.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is directed towards
construct point from project point of construct point on cone axis.
Cone
Plane: middle point of plane is construct point and is parallel to construct cone axis.
Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
towards construct point from project point of construct point on cone axis.
Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
Sphere
towards construct point from center of sphere.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is tangent direction
Ellipse
of project point of construct point on ellipse, and the line is parallel to plane of ellipse.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is tangent direction
Slot
of project point of construct point on slot, and the line is parallel to plane of slot.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is tangent direction
Curve
of project point of construct point on curve, and the line is parallel to plane of curve.

- 497 -
Construct - Intersection Feature

An intersection construction is the result of one feature intersecting another feature. The
features resulting from the construction can be points, lines, circles or curves. If Learn mode is on,
the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.
The input features used in the construction can be:
Line reducible features
Planes
Circles
Arcs
Spheres
Ellipses
Slots
Curves
Surfaces

The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a line
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
2nd Feature Intersect construction results from a line reducible feature and 2nd feature
Point: The intersection point of 2 input lines.
If the two lines are not on the same plane, the resulting intersect point
Line reducible is the middle point of a line segment between the two input lines. The
feature vector is a product of the 2 input line vectors.
If construct lines are parallel, there will be no intersect point and the
construction will fail.
Point: The intersecting point is the location at which the line pierces the
Plane plane. The resulting point vector is the vector of the plane.
If the plane and line are parallel, the construction fails.
Point: The results are the locations at which the line pierces the circle. An
intersection point is also created at the center of the circle if the line
intersects the center. The line and the circle must be on the same
Circle
plane.
If there are no locations where the line pierces the circle the
construction fails.
Arc Point: The results are the locations at which the line pierces the arc.

- 498 -
 The line and the arc must be on the same plane.
If there are no locations where the line pierces the arc the
construction fails.
Point: The results are the locations at which the line pierces the ellipse. An
intersection point is also created at the center of the ellipse if the line
intersects the center. The line and the ellipse must be on the same
Ellipse
plane.
If there are no locations where the line pierces the ellipse the
construction fails.
Point: The results are the locations at which the line pierces the slot. An
intersection point is also created at the center of the slot if the line
Slot intersects the center. The line and the slot must be on the same plane.
If there are no locations where the line pierces the slot the
construction fails.
Point: The results are the locations at which the line pierces the curve.
The line and the slot must be on the same plane.
Curve
If there are no locations where the line pierces the slot the
construction fails.
Point: The intersecting point is the location at which the line pierces the
surface. The resulting point vector is the vector of the surface.
Surface
If there are no locations where the line pierces the surface the
construction fails.

The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a plane.
The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the right. The resulting
feature type is the underlined feature.
2nd Feature Intersect construction results from a plane feature and 2nd feature
Point: The intersecting point is the location at which the line pierces the
Line reducible
plane. The resulting point vector is the vector of the plane.
feature
If the plane and line are parallel, the construction fails.
Plane Line: A line is created along the intersection of the two planes.
Point: The intersecting points are created where the circle pierces the plane.
The vector direction is the direction from the center of the circle to
Circle
the intersection point. If the circle is parallel to the plane or the circle
is on the plane, the construction fails
Point: The intersecting points are created where the arc pierces the plane.
The vector direction is the direction from the center of the arc to the
Arc
intersection point. If the arc is parallel to the plane or the arc is on the
plane, the construction fails.
Point: The intersecting points are created where the ellipse pierces the
plane.
Ellipse
If the ellipse is parallel to the plane or the ellipse is on the plane, the
construction fails.
Sphere Circle: The intersection circle is created at the location the plane slices

- 499 -
 through the sphere. The vector is the same as the plane vector.
Circle: The intersection circle is created at the location the plane slices
Cylinder
through the cylinder. The vector is the same as the plane vector.
Circle: The intersection circle is created at the location the plane slices
Cone
through the cone. The vector is the same as the plane vector.
Point: The intersecting points are created where the slot pierces the plane. If
Slot the slot is parallel to the plane or the slot is on the plane, the
construction fails
Point: The intersecting points are created where the curve pierces the
Curve plane. If the curve is parallel to the plane or the curve is on the plane,
the construction fails
Curve: The intersecting curve is created along the surface area that intersects
Surface the plane. If there are no locations where the surface intersects the
plane, the construction fails.

Places CONST/INTersection, Coordinate window CAD Alignment, Curve Point generation CAD
refence Edit, and Curve Scan definition window CAD reference Edit will now deny the Drag
CAD label from Act column.

- 500 -
Construct - Perpendicular Feature

A perpendicular construction is the result of one feature being perpendicular to a feature through
a point. The perpendicular construction results can be a line or a plane. If Learn mode is on, the
appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.

The features that can be used in the 1st “Perpendicular to” input box:
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot

The features that can be used in the 2nd “through” box:

Point reducible features
Measure points

Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature. If a circle was measured with
4 points, then there are 4 measure points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A property page will be presented
with the points available by expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

- 501 -
The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a point
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
The “perpendicular The “Through” input feature can be a point reducible feature or a measured
to feature” feature point.
Line: The line result is constructed by creating a line from the “through”
point to the though point projected on the input line, creating a
Plane: perpendicular line.
The plane result is constructed by creating a plane from the “through”
Line
point to the through point projected on the plane, creating a
perpendicular plane. The resulting vector is controlled by the input
line vector. If the “though” point is on the input line then the
construction fails.
Line: The line result is constructed by creating a line from the “through”
point to the though point projected on the input plane, creating a
Plane
perpendicular line.
If the “though” point is on input plane, the construct fails.
Line: The line result is constructed by creating a line from the “through”
point to the though point projected on the input circle, creating a
Circle perpendicular line.
If the though point is on the same plane as the circle or on the center
point of the circle, the construction fails.
Line: The line result is constructed by creating a line from the “through”
point to the though point projected on the input arc, creating a
Arc perpendicular line.
If the though point is on the same plane as the arc or on the center
point of the arc, the construction fails.
Line: The line result is constructed by creating a line from the “through”
point to the though point projected on the input cylinder axis,
creating a perpendicular line.
Cylinder
Plane: The plane result is constructed by creating a plane from the “through”
point that cuts through the cylinder. The plane vector is controlled by
the point vector and the cylinder vector.
Line: The result line is constructed by creating a line from the “though”
point perpendicular to the cone surface.
Line: The result line is constructed by creating a perpendicular line from the
“through” point to the “through” point projected on the cone axis.
Cone The plane result is constructed by creating a plane from the “through”
Plane: point that cuts through the cone. The plane vector is controlled by the
point vector and the cone vector.

Sphere Line: The result line is constructed by creating a line from the “though”

- 502 -
 point to the “though” point projected onto the sphere. If the
“though” point is on the sphere, a line is created from the “though”
point to the center of the sphere.
Line: The result line is constructed by creating a line from the “though”
point to the “though” point projected onto the ellipse surface. If the
Ellipse
“though” point is on the ellipse, then a line is created from the
“though” point to the ellipse center on the ellipse plane.
Line: The result line is constructed by creating a line from the “though”
point to the “though” point projected onto the ellipse surface. If the
Slot
“though” point is on the ellipse, then a line is created from the
“though” point to the ellipse center on the ellipse plane.
Line: The resulting line is constructed by creating a line from the “though”
point to the though point projected onto the curve.
Curve If the through point is on the curve, the line is created on the plane of
the curve from the through point to the curve, controlled by the
through point vector and the curve vector.

- 503 -
Construct - Tangent Feature

A tangent construction is the result of one feature being tangent to another feature through
another feature. The tangent construction results can be a line, plane or circle. If Learn mode is
on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.

The features that can be used in the 1st “Tangent to” input box:
Line reducible features
Planes
Circles
Cylinders
Curves

The features that can be used in the 2nd “Thru/Feature 2” input box:
Point reducible features
Line reducible features
Circles
Curves
Measure points

Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature. If a circle was measured with
4 points, then there are 4 measure points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A property page will be presented
with the points available by expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

R or IJK entry boxes

When the input feature is circle, there is an option to enter the radius of the input circle in the
“R” box on the right of the panel. When the input feature is a plane there is an option to enter
the vector IJK values in the boxes on the right of the panel.

- 504 -
The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a point
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
1st “Tangent to”
Point reducible “Thru/Feature 2” input features.
feature
Circle: If the radius R is less than the minimum circle radius from the “Thru”
point to the input line, the construction result is a minimum tangent
Line reducible
circle; otherwise, the construction result is tangent to input line line and
features
is through the “Thru” point, and the radius is two tangent circles of
radius R. If the “Thru” point is on the input line, the construction fails.
Circle: The resulting circle is tangent to the input plane through the “Thru”
point. The nominal vector of the circle is controlled by the IJK values.
Plane If the vector (I, J, K) is parallel to nominal direction of the input plane,
the construct fails. If the “Thru” point is on the entered plane, the
construction fails.
Line: If the “Thru” point is on the input circle, the result is a line tangent to
the input circle through the “Thru” point. If the “Thru” point is outside
of the input circle, two lines are created, tangent to the input circle,
through the “Thru” point. If the “Thru” point is in the center of the input
circle, or if the input circle is not on the same plane as the “Thru” point,
the construction will fail.
Plane: The resulting plane is constructed by creating a plane through the
“Thru” point that is tangent to the cylinder.
Circle Circle: If radius R is greater than 0 and less than the minimum tangent circle
radius of the “Thru” point and the input circle, the result is the
maximum tangent circle and the minimum tangent circle of the “Thru”
point and the input circle.
If the “Thru” point is inside the input circle and the radius R is not
greater than maximum circle of the “Thru” point and the input circle,
two tangent circles tangent to the input circle and through the “Thru”
point are created. If the “Thru” point is on the input circle, or is the
center of the input circle, the construction fails.
Line: If the “Thru” point is on or outside the input cylinder, the result is a
plane tangent to the input cylinder through the “Thru” point. If the
Cylinder
“Thru” point is inside the cylinder (or the cylinder extended infinitely),
the construction fails.

- 505 -
The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a line
reducible feature. The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the
right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
1 st “Tangent to”
Line reducible “Thru/Feature 2” input features.
feature
Circle: If radius R is less than the minimum tangent circle radius from the
“Thru” line to the input point, the construction result is a minimum
Point reducible tangent circle; otherwise, the construction result is tangent to the
features “Thru” line and is through the”Thru” point, and the radius is two
tangent circles of radius R.
If the input point is on the”Thru” line, the construction fails.
Circle: The construction result is four circles tangent with the two input lines
Line reducible
with the circle radius R.
features
If the two input lines are parallel, the construction fails.
Circle: If radius R is less than the minimum tangent circle radius from the
“Thru” point to the input line, the construction result is a minimum
tangent circle; otherwise, if the input circle doesn’t intersect with the
“Thru” line, the construction result is two tangent circles tangent to
Circle both the “Thru” line and the input circle with radius being radius R.
If the input circle intersects with the “Thru” line, the return radius is
four tangent circles of radius R.
If the input circle and the “Thru” line are not on the same plane, the
construction fails.

The table below shows the features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being a circle.
The 2nd construction input feature is in the left column with the results to the right. The resulting
feature type is the underlined feature.
1 st “Tangent to”
Circle “Thru/Feature 2” input features.
feature
Line: If the input point is on the “Thru” circle, then the result is a line tangent
to the “Thru” circle to the input point. If the input point is outside of
the “Thru” circle, two tangent lines are constructed with the central
points of the lines being tangent points of the lines and circle.
If the “Thru” circle and the input point are not on the same plane, the
construction will fail.
Plane: A cylinder is constructed through the “Thru” circle. The tangent plane is
Point reducible
constructed through the cylinder and the input point.
features
Circle: If radius R is greater than 0 and less than minimum tangent circle radius
of the input point and the “Thru” circle, the result is a maximum
tangent circle and a minimum tangent circle from the input point and
the “Thru” circle. If the input point is inside the through circle, and
radius R is not greater than the max circle of the input point and the
“Thru” circle, two circles are created tangent to the “Thru” circle to the
input point.

- 506 -
 Circle: If radius R is less than the minimum tangent circle radius of the “Thru”
point and the input line, the construction result is a minimum tangent
circle; otherwise, if input line doesn’t intersect with “Thru” circle, the
construction result is two tangent circles tangent to both input line and
Line reducible
the “Thru” circle with the radius being radius R.
features
If the “Thru” circle and the input line intersect, the result is four tangent
circle with a radius of radius R.
If the construct input line and the “Thru” circle are not on the same
plane, the construction fails.
Line: The construction result is all the tangent lines of the two circles.
Circle
If the two circles are on the same plane, the construction fails.

- 507 -
Construct - Project Feature

A project construction is the result of one feature being projected onto another. Project results
can be Points, Lines, Planes, Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate
DMIS code will be added to the program.
The features that can be used in the 1st “Project feature” input box:
Point
Edge point
Line
Circle
Arc
Ellipse
Slot
Measure point
The features that can be used in the 2nd “Onto” input box.
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model
Work plane
Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature. If a circle was measured with
4 points, then there are 4 measure points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A property page will be presented
with the points available by expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

- 508 -
The table below shows the project features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being the
projected point or edge point. The 2nd construction input feature is the feature to project onto in
the left column with the results to the right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
Project
“Onto” “Project” construct features are point and edge point
features
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the input line.
Line The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the input plane.
The vector direction is from the result point on the plane to the input
Plane
“Project” point. If the “Project” point is on the plane, the direction is the
direction of plane.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the outer edge
of the circle. The direction is from the result point to the input “project”
point.
Circle
If the “Project” point is in the circle, the vector direction is from the center of
the circle to the projected point. If the “Project” point is on the center of the
circle, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the outer edge
of the arc. The direction is from the result point to the input “project” point.
Arc If the “Project” point is in the arc, the vector direction is from the center of
the arc to the projected point. If the “Project” point is on the center of the
arc, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the cylinder.
There may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
outside of the cylinder and the other point on the cylinder axis. The vector
Cylinder
direction of the resulting point is from the cylinder axis to the input “Project”
point.
If the “Project” point is on the cylinder axis, the projection fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the cone. There
may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the outside
Cone of the cone and the other point on the cone axis. The vector direction of the
resulting point is from the cone axis to the input “Project” point.
If the “Project” point is on the cone axis, the projection fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the sphere. The
vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
Sphere the input “Project” point.
If the “Project” point is on the center of the sphere, the construction fails.

Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the ellipse. The
Ellipse vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” point.
Slot Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the ellipse. The

- 509 -
 vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to the
input “Project” point
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto a curve. The
Curve direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the curve back to the
entered “Project” point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto a surface. The
Surface direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the surface back to
the entered “Project” point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the CAD model.
CAD Model The vector direction is the vector direction of the CAD surface at the
projection point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” point onto the selected
work plane. The vector direction is from the resulting projected point back to
Work plane
the input “Project” point. If “Project” point is on the work plane, the vector
direction is the vector of the work plane.

The table below shows the project features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being the
projected circle. The 2nd construction input feature is the feature to project onto in the left
column with the results to the right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
Project
“Onto”
“Project” construct feature is a circle
construct
features
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the input line.
Line The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circlet onto the input
plane. The vector direction is from the result point on the plane to the
input “Project” circle. If the “Project” circle is on the plane, the direction is
the direction of plane.
Circle If the nominal directions of the “Project” circle and the input plane are the
Plane
or same, the result is a circle projected onto the plane. The vector direction is
ellipse: from the plane to the “Project” circle. If the “Project” circle and the input
plane are at an angle to each other, then the construction results in an
ellipse
If the “Project” circle is perpendicular to the plane, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the input
Circle circle. The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the
input “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the input arc.
Arc The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” circle.
Cylinder Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the cylinder.

- 510 -
 There may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
outside of the cylinder and the other point on the cylinder axis. The vector
direction of the resulting point is from the cylinder axis to the input “Project”
circle center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the cone. There
may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the outside
Cone
of the cone and the other point on the cone axis. The vector direction of the
resulting point is from the cone axis to the input “Project” circle center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the sphere. The
vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
Sphere
the input “Project” circle.
If the “Project” circle is on the center of the sphere, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the ellipse. The
Ellipse vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the slot. The
Slot vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto a curve. The
Curve direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the curve back to
the entered “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto a surface. The
Surface direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the surface back to
the entered “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the CAD model.
CAD Model The vector direction is the vector direction of the CAD surface at the
projection point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the selected
work plane. If the “Project” circle and the work plane are parallel, a circle is
added to the results. The result circle is constructed in the same manner as
Work plane
the result point. The vector direction is from the resulting projected point
back to the input “Project” circle. If “Project” point is on the work plane, the
vector direction is the vector of the work plane.

- 511 -
The table below shows the project features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being the
projected Arc. The 2nd construction input feature is the feature to project onto in the left column
with the results to the right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
Project
“Onto”
“Project” construct feature is an arc
construct
features
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the input line.
Line The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the input plane.
The vector direction is from the result point on the plane to the input
“Project” arc. If the “Project” arc is on the plane, the direction is the
direction of plane.
Plane Circle If the nominal directions of the “Project” arc and the input plane are the
or same, the result is a circle projected onto the plane. The vector direction is
ellipse: from the plane to the “Project” arc. If the “Project” arc and the input plane
are at an angle to each other, then the construction results in an ellipse
If the “Project” arc is perpendicular to the plane, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the input circle.
Circle The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the input arc.
Arc The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the cylinder.
There may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
Cylinder outside of the cylinder and the other point on the cylinder axis. The vector
direction of the resulting point is from the cylinder axis to the input
“Project” arc center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the cone. There
may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
Cone outside of the cone and the other point on the cone axis. The vector
direction of the resulting point is from the cone axis to the input “Project”
arc center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the sphere. The
vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
Sphere
the input “Project” arc.
If the “Project” arc is on the center of the sphere, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the ellipse. The
Ellipse vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the slot. The
Slot
vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to

- 512 -
 the input “Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto a curve. The
Curve direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the curve back to
the entered “Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto a surface. The
Surface direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the surface back to
the entered “Project” arc.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the CAD model.
CAD Model The vector direction is the vector direction of the CAD surface at the
projection point.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” arc onto the selected
work plane. If the “Project” arc and the work plane are parallel, an arc is
added to the results. The result arc is constructed in the same manner as
Work plane
the result point. The vector direction is from the resulting projected point
back to the input “Project” arc. If “Project” point is on the work plane, the
vector direction is the vector of the work plane.

The table below shows the project features that can be constructed with the 1st feature being the
projected ellipse. The 2nd construction input feature is the feature to project onto in the left
column with the results to the right. The resulting feature type is the underlined feature.
Project
“Onto”
“Project” construct features is an ellipse
construct
features
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the input line.
Line The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” ellipse.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the input
plane. The vector direction is from the result point on the plane to the input
“Project” ellipse. If the “Project” ellipse is on the plane, the direction is the
direction of plane.
Circle If the nominal directions of the “Project” ellipse and the input plane are the
Plane
or same, the result is a circle projected onto the plane. The vector direction is
ellipse: from the plane to the “Project” ellipse. If the “Project” ellipse and the input
plane are at an angle to each other, then the construction results in an
ellipse
If the “Project” ellipse is perpendicular to the plane, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the input
Circle circle. The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the
input “Project” ellipse.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the input arc.
Arc The vector is the direction from the result point on the line to the input
“Project” ellipse.
Cylinder Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the cylinder.

- 513 -
 There may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
outside of the cylinder and the other point on the cylinder axis. The vector
direction of the resulting point is from the cylinder axis to the input
“Project” ellipse center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the cone.
There may be two possible point results with one point projected onto the
Cone outside of the cone and the other point on the cone axis. The vector
direction of the resulting point is from the cone axis to the input “Project”
ellipse center.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the sphere. The
vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
Sphere
the input “Project” ellipse.
If the “Project” ellipse is on the center of the sphere, the construction fails.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” ellipse onto the ellipse. The
Ellipse vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” ellipse.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto the slot. The
Slot vector direction of the result point is the direction from the result point to
the input “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto a curve. The
Curve direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the curve back to
the entered “Project” circle.
Point: The point is the result of projecting the “Project” circle onto a surface. The
Surface direction vector is from the resulting projected point on the surface back to
the entered “Project” circle.

- 514 -
Construct - Move Feature

A move feature construction is the result of moving a feature to another location. The original
feature is kept in the original location while a copy of the feature is places in the new location.
The Move Method drop-down list contains methods by which to move and can also accept the
drag and drop of certain features. All entered values are in the current units and current
coordinates. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.
Possible results of a move construction are:
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
The features that can be used in the 1st “Moving Feature” input box:
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
Features that can be dragged and dropped onto “Move method” can be:
Line
Plane

- 515 -
 Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere

Move methods

A feature can be moved using a user defined offset distance, or vector distance, or by a material
thickness offset.

Offset distance
Input specific move values in for X,Y,Z in the dx, dy, dz windows.

Vector distance
Enter vector direction information for the feature to move along and enter a distance for the
feature to move.

Material offset
Drag and drop a feature to be offset into the Moving Feature drop-down and enter the
material thickness to move the feature by in the “TK” edit-box. A material offset only applies
to features of size. A positive offset will reduce the radius of the feature by the entered value.
If the material offset exceeds the size of the feature, the construction fails.

- 516 -
- 517 -
Construct - Best Fit Feature

A Best-Fit construction used a list of two or more features to create result features. The
construction uses the features in the Construction best fit features list and calculates features
that can be created. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
Possible results of a Best-Fit construction are:
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Curve

Features used in the “Constructed best fit features” list can be:
Point reducible features
Line reducible features
Curves
Measure points

Measure points
Measure points are measurement points inside a measured feature.
If a circle was measured with 4 points, then there are 4 measure
points within that circle. To gain access to the measure points,
double click on the desired feature in the Feature database. A
property page will be presented with the points available by
expanding the PT node at the bottom. The points can then be
dragged from the property page to the feature input in the
construction.

If the feature was dragged from the Actual column, the dot in the icon will be red .

If dragged from the nominal column the icon will be blue.

- 518 -
Construct best fit feature list
The Construct best fit feature list accepts the drag and drop of features from the Feature
database to the feature list to be used in the best fit calculations.

Delete/Delete All buttons

The Delete button will remove the selected feature from the best fit feature list. The delate all
button will remove all of the features from the list.

Line bestfit using Points will create Line normal vector based on the Points vector. It used to be (0,
0,1 ). This change affects the Line Straightness calculation"

- 519 -
Construct - Mirror Feature

A mirror construction will create a mirror image copy of a feature by mirroring it about a work
plane, an axis or a feature. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
Possible results of a Mirror construction are:
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model

Features used in the 1st “Mirror Feature” entry can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model

- 520 -
Features used in the 1st “Mirror About” entry can be:
XY plane
YZ plane
ZX plane
X stacking axis
Y stacking axis
Z stacking axis
Coordinate origin
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Slot

- 521 -
Construct - Bound Feature

A bound feature construction is the result of setting boundaries for the feature to control the size
of that feature. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.
Possible results of a Bound construction are:
Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Curve

Features to be bound used in the “Feature To be Bounded” drop-down can be:

Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Curve
Features to perform bounding can be:
Point
Edge Point
Plane

To be bounded construct feature window

Drag and drop a feature from the Feature database and drop it into the “Feature to be bounded”
drop-down list.

Bounding feature list:

Drag and drop the features to be used in binding from the Feature database to the Bounding
feature list.

- 522 -
Construct – Construct From Cone

A feature constructed from a cone requires an input cone and can construct a circle or a point
defined as a diameter or distance from the cone apex or the apex itself. The only acceptable input
feature is a cone. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.

Possible results of a Bound construction are:

Point
Circle

Construct method selection window and parameter input window:

There are 3 different construction methods.
Diameter will construct a circle based a user defined diameter of an unknown distance from the
apex.
Distance will generate a circle of an unknown diameter at a user defined distance from the cone
apex.
Apex will generate a point at the cone apex.

Construction CONE function adds new option to computer Sphere as construction result. The
Diameter input will be the Sphere diameter. The constructed Sphere is tangent to the Cone.

DMIS statement is as follows,

CONST/SPHERE, F (SPH_1), CONE, DIAM, 60, FA (CON2)

- 523 -
Construct - Extreme Point Feature

An extreme point construction will generate a point at the extremities of a feature. The extreme
construction can be along a user defined vector or a selected axis. There are always two extremes
to select from, either the min extreme or the max extreme. If Learn mode is on, the
appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.
A point is the only possible result of an extreme construction.

Features used in the extreme construction can be:

Circle
Sphere
Ellipse
Curve
Surface
Plane
“Bound” feature

The features or selections in the “Method” drop-down list

“Bound” line, circle, ellipse or curve
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Surface
Vector
X direction
Y direction
Z direction

Extreme option
There are two options in the Extreme Option drop-down. Min extreme which is the most
negative point or max-extreme which is the most positive point.

Vector input box

If the extreme “vector” method is selected for the construction method, IJK entry boxes will
appear to enter the desired vector.

- 524 -
Construct - Three Point Offset Plane

A three pint offset plane construction creates a plane by using 3 point reducible features and
offsetting those features by the entered values. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code
will be added to the program.
A plane is the only possible outcome of a 3 point offset plane construction

Features used in the three point offset plane construction can be

Point
Edge point
Circle
Arc
Cone
Sphere

Distance parameter input

There are three offset distance parameter input windows to specify offset distances D1, D2 and
D3. The plane is created by creating a best-fit plane out of the 3 features and their offset
locations.

- 525 -
Construct - Transfer Feature

The transfer feature construction will create a copy of a feature transferred from one coordinate
system to another. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.

Possible transfer construction results can be

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface

Features used in the transfer construction list can be

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface

- 526 -
Transfer feature list
There are two columns in the Transfer feature list with the left column being the feature to
transfer. To transfer a feature to another coordinate system, drag the feature from the Feature
database and drop on the left column of Transfer feature list. The right column presents a series
of check-boxes. If a feature is not checked, both actual and nominal will be transferred. If the
check-box is checked on, only the nominal of the feature will be transferred.to the selected
coordinate system
There are two icons to the lower right of the Transfer feature list. To check all of the
items in the list. Click the Check All icon. To un-check all features, click the Un-check All
icon.

“Transfer” coordinate inputs

There are two text-boxes on the right of the panel to input the transfer to and transfer from
coordinate system labels. To define the coordinate system to transfer from, drag the desired
coordinate system label from the Coordinate System database and drop onto the “From CRD”
text-box. To define the coordinate system to transfer to, drag the desired coordinate system from
the Coordinate System database and drop onto the “To CRD” text-box.

Transfer Feature itself check-box

If the transfer feature itself check-box is checked, the feature will move to the new coordinate
system rather than making a copy of the feature in the new coordinate system.

Delete/Delete All buttons

The Delete button will remove the selected feature from the transfer feature list. The delate all
button will remove all of the features from the list.

- 527 -
Construct - Multiple Point Offset Plane

A multi-point offset plane construction creates a plane by using the point reducible features in
the feature list and offsetting those features by the entered values. No DMIS is created.
A plane is the only possible outcome of a multi-point offset plane construction

Features used in the multi-point offset plane construction can be

Point
Edge point
Circle
Arc
Cone
Sphere

Distance parameter input

There are three offset distance parameter input windows to specify offset distances D1, D2 and
D3. The plane is created by creating a best-fit plane out of the 3 features and their offset
locations.

Construct feature list

The Construct feature list has two columns, the left for the construct feature label and the right
column for the offset distance. Drag features from the Feature database and drop on the left side
of the construct feature list. Enter the offset distance in the right column.

Delete/Delete All buttons

The Delete button will remove the selected feature from the construct feature list. The delate all
button will remove all of the features from the list.

DMIS syntax.
Multiple points offset construction supports DMIS syntax.
CONST/PLANE, F(PLN_OFFSET1), LEVEL, FA(MYPT4), 10.000000, FA(MYPT5), 11.000000,
FA(MYPT6), 10.000000, FA(MYPT7), 9.000000, FA(MYPT8), 11.000000, FA(MYPT9), 10.000000

- 528 -
Construct - Copy Create Feature

The Copy/Create Features construction is a unique construction that allows the creation of arrays
of multiple features from a single input features. The constructed features can be organized in a
linear pattern or a rotational pattern. If Learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
Possible copy/create features results can be
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Torus
CAD model

The resulting feature type is the same as in input feature type. Both nominal and actual features
can be used in the copy/create features construction. Nominal features will create result features
that are nominal only. Actual input features will create result features that are nominal and
actual.
Features used in the copy/create feature construction can be
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot

- 529 -
 Torus
CAD model
To the right of the feature entry is a Method drop-down list has a linear method and a rotation
method. The construction interface will change depending on the selected construction method.
Linear Rotation

Linear method
Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop onto the Feature text-box. Select Linear from
the Method drop-down list.

Select the copy/create directions from the 3 drop-downs. (Note: all 3 direction do not have to be
used, a single direction will work). Enter the corresponding distance increment that the features
will be created. Then enter the number of features to create per direction. Click the Preview
button to preview the created features or click Add Result to add all of the features.

Direction Feature
Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop onto the Dir input box will use the Feature
Vector

DMIS statement：
CONST/POINT, F(MYPT_COPY26), COPY, FA(MYPT1), TRANS, FA(XP), 10*2, YDIR, 10*2, FA(ZP), 10*2

Rotation method
Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop onto the Feature text-box. Select Rotation
from the Method drop-down list.

- 530 -
Select the axis to rotate about from the Axis drop-down list. Enter the angular increment
between the created features in the Incr text-box, then enter the number of features to create in
the Repeat text-box.
Click the Preview button to preview the created features or click Add Result to add all of the
features.

- 531 -
Construct - Sweep Construct

A sweep construct will create a curve or a surface though sweeping the input feature by user
defined distances. No DMIS is created for Sweep constructions. Only 2-D features can be used in
Sweep constructions.

Method
The Method drop-down list has 3 different methods from which to create the
sweep construction. The interface may change slightly depending on the
selected method.

Vector distance
Drag a feature from the feature database and
drop onto the Sweep construct list. Then select
Vector Dist from the Method drop-down. Enter
the distance along the vector to create the sweep
in the D text-box. Enter the direction to be used to
make the sweep in the IJK boxes.

Trim/extrude
Drag either a line of a curve from the
Feature database and drop onto the
Sweep construction list. Then select
either Trim or Extrude from the
Method drop-down list. If trim is
selected, enter the amount to
remove from each end of the feature
in the SD and ED text-boxes. If Extrude is selected enter the amount to add to the feature in the
SD and ED text boxes.

Delete/Delete All buttons

The Delete button will remove the selected feature from the construct feature list. The delate all
button will remove all of the features from the list.

- 532 -
Construct – COG

Implementation of CONST/COG, Center of Gravity

The implementation is limited to Curve at the moment. The CONSTrusted point is the Curve
geometry center.
CONST/POINT, F(MYPT_COG1), COG, FA(GCV1)

- 533 -
Construct - Break Curve

Break curve function of construction toolbar. It can cut off one curve to two curves and extend,
shown as below:

Note:
1, Curve must be closed curve;
2, (I, J, K) is tangent direction of 2 terminal points;
3, Extrude length will extend curve from terminal point to tangent line; here set as 0 means no
extend;
Application: this method is mainly used in blade curve scanning. For some twisted blade curve,
cut off curve from 2 terminals and stretch, the sensor stretch out to scan. When calculating blade,
needless part will be removed and then calculate blade data.

- 534 -
Construct - Cylindrical unfold

Cylindrical unfold. The unfold feature must be a 3d curve. The curve is on a cylinder surface. It is
to unfold a 3d Curve to 2d Curve defined by the plane specified by the input parameters.
Plane definition: The plane is parallel to the Axis feature and the distance away from the Feature
Axis is R.
Unfold Axis can be:
Self Ref: The centroid of the theoretical 3d curve projects on the Feature Axis. The connecting line
from Centroid to the projection point is the Plane direction.
X axis: The plane vector is perpendicular to X axis
Y axis: The plane vector is perpendicular to Y axis
Z axis: The plane vector is perpendicular to Z axis
Unfold construction template is added to the Extended DMIS template
CONST/GCURVE, F({Label}), UNFOLD, {F|FA}({UnfoldLabel}),{F|FA|DAT}({cylinderAxis}), {Radius}
{,XAXIS|YAXIS|ZAXIS}

- 535 -
Sensor

Select “Sensor” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the Sensor Operations panel.

RationalDMIS supports a number of different probe(sensor) options:

Automatic indexing probe: The automatic indexing probe is controlled by motors that can index
both A and B probe angles. It usually has a touch trigger probe attached, but can also make use
of analog scanning probes.
Manual indexing probe: Similar to the auto-indexing, but the probe head A and B angles must be
changed manually by the operator.
Fixed head probe: A fixed head probe such as a Renishaw TP-1, cannot change A or B angles, but
can still use touch trigger probes.
Hard probe: A hard probe cannot index angles and does not make use if touch triggering. The
triggering process is manually recorded through a switch device.

5-Axis probing and scanning has recently been developed and is supported in RationalDMIS. As
5-Axis probing/scannig is a unique subject and requires special hardware, it is not covered in this
document.
Non-contact vision or video probing is fully supported by RationalDMIS, but is a specialized
subject not covered in this document

The probe (or sensor) settings are stored as part of the machine settings within RationalDMIS and
are automatically loaded when RationalDMIS starts. Depending on the probing equipment used,
the interface may change slightly to match the capabilities of the probing in use.

Regardless of the type of probe being used, they must be calibrated before use!
The main purpose of calibration is to calculate the actual diameter of the sensor. This is if of great
importance since any probe compensation is calculated from the calibrated diameter. While
measurements can be carried out without sensor calibration to facilitate programming, the data
will NOT be accurate until the sensor is calibrated.
Important: DO NOT MOVE THE CALIBRATION ARTIFACT DURING THE CALIBRATION PROCESS.

- 536 -
Incorrect measurement results can still be produced with calibrated sensors if incorrect vectoring
is used in point measurement. Probe compensation is directed by the movement to and away
from the measured point. If the machine movement is not perpendicular to the surface, cosine
error can be introduced.
In the example below 2 points are measured on the same angled surface at the same locations,
but will give different results. The image on the left shows the point being measured in a straight
up and down motion, not perpendicular to the measurement surface. The probe compensation is
therefore applied using the straight up and down motion, missing the measured point location
causing a cosine error. The image on the right shows the probe moving perpendicular to the
surface to apply correct probe compensation.

Wrong measuring direction Correct measuring direction

NOTE: Only the motion at the time of measurement needs to be perpendicular. The probe angle
can be anything that provides access to the feature to be measured – as long as the motion is
perpendicular to the point being measured.

- 537 -
Sensor - Create New Probe

Create new probe will go present a selection of items needed to create a new probe. Once a
component is selected, only the components that can attach to the selected component are
displayed. A probe will need to be created the first time RationalDMIS is run and new probes
will need to be created for any probing component that has to be physically assembled. Once a
probe is created, it becomes part of RationalDMIS and does not need to be recreated unless
deleted.

Select “Sensor” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the Sensor Operations panel.
Select “build sensor” and you will enter interface of building sensor:

The graphics display area will be replaced with a senor creation window.
Select the desired probe head from the list on the left by double clicking on the name.

- 538 -
The selected probe will be displayed on the left of the screen, while a tree of components is
starting to be built on the upper right. The component list on the lower right has updated to
show only the items that will attach to the selected probe head.

Double click desired item in the list to add it to the probe head. Once again the graphics update
and another component is added to the tree. Continue adding components until the sensor is

- 539 -
built. If an incorrect component was selected, click the Delete button to remove the item. Click
the Reset button to remove all selections to start again.

Once the sensor has been fully created the “Add Sensor” and “Add/Active” buttons in the lower
right will become enabled. “Add Sensor” will create the sensor and add it to the sensor database,
but will not make the sensor active as the current sensor. “Add/Activate” will create the sensor,
add it to the Senor database and set the sensor as the current active sensor.

We created a sensor called ROOTSN5, that has now been added to the Sensor database and is the
active sensor.

- 540 -
- 541 -
Sensor - Create Calibration Gage

Both calibration spheres and calibration ring gages can be created and used in RationalDMIS.
Select “Sensor” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the Sensor Operations panel.

Select “Calibrate Sensor”:

There are two tabs within the Calibrate Sensor Operation

panel. Click on the “Calibration gage definition” icon.

The Calibration gage definition panel will be displayed.

The calibration gage drop-down list includes the name of previously defined calibration artifacts
and accepts typed input of new label names.

To create a new calibration artifact, enter a new name in the drop-down, e.g.”MySphere”

- 542 -
Enter the known diameter of the calibration sphere in “D”. The known diameter is important and
is probably located with the sphere certification documents or can be traced by serial number.

Enter the approximate coordinates in MCS of the sphere into the XYZ boxes. If the location is not
known, just enter 0 for each parameter and be sure to manually Update Gage.

Enter the vector information for the calibration sphere. The vector information is essentially the
stem location as it attaches to the sphere. This parameter is used as a clearance during automatic
point generation.

Enter the offset distance in the Offset Dist text-box. The offset distance is an offset above the
horizon for automatic point generation. It is a good idea to have a small offset value entered (1 or
2mm) to help avoid measuring on the shank of the stylus (shanking) with some styli.

Enter the diameter of the stem where it contacts the sphere in the Stem Diam text-box. This
parameter is used as a clearance for automatic point generation.

Click the “Define” button to create the new calibration artifact.

- 543 -
The location of the artifact needs to be measured. See Update Gage below.

- 544 -
Sensor - Sensor Calibration

Sensor calibration panel

Sensor label
Sensor label shows name of sensor that needs to be calibrated. This window only accepts drag
and drop of a sensor label from the Sensor database.

Nominal diameter
The “Nominal D” text-box displays the nominal diameter of the sensor and cannot be edited.

Actual diameter
The Actual D text-box will show the actual diameter of the last calibration of this sensor and
cannot be edited. If the sensor has never been calibration, this box will be empty.

Calibration date
The calibration date text-box shows the last time the sensor was calibrated and cannot be
edited. If the sensor has never been calibration, this box will be empty.

Update gage
If a new calibration artifact has been created or the calibration artifact has been moved, the exact
location should be updated with Update Gage. Check the Update Gage check-box on and
manually measure the artifact once and accept the measurement to complete it. If the checkbox
is selected, RationalDMIS does not calibrate the sensor offset etc. It simply records the exact
location of the gage. Once the Update Gage has been performed with one sensor, uncheck
Calibrate Gage and proceed with the sensor calibration. Update gage does not need to be
performed again unless the artifact has been moved or a new artifact created.

Calibration gage
There can be multiple calibration artifacts available at the same time. Select
the desired calibration gage from the Calibration Gage drop-down list.

Calibration Gage diameter

Once a calibration gage has been selected, the calibration gage diameter will populate the “D”
calibration gage diameter text-box.

- 545 -
Automatic calibration
If the sphere has been located with Update Gage and the parameters defined when creating the
calibration artifact, then DCC machines can make use of Automatic calibration. Place the mouse
cursor over the digits on the left of the panel and scroll the mouse scroll wheel up or down to
change the point value. IF the point value is equal to or greater than 4, the Generate Points icon
near the middle of the panel will become activated.

Click the Generate points icon. A window will slide in from the right with generated points and
clearance moves for automatic measurement.

Click preview icon , to preview the automatic measurement.

Click the Measure icon to execute automatic calibration of the sensor.

: Button of delete one

When list window of calibration point shows, button of delete one can delete selected point.
When list window of calibration point does not show, this button will delete the last calibration
point.

Delete/Delete All icons

If points have been either manually or automatically, The clicking the Delete icon will remove
the selected point from the histogram point window. The Delate all icon will remove all of the
points from the histogram point window.

:
Form error
The Form error text-box displays the measured form error of the sphere and cannot be edited.
The form error is a good indicator of the validity of a calibration. A calibration with a low form
error is a better calibration then one with a high form error. A high form error may indicate
something is loose.

Finish button
Clicking the Finish icon will complete the calibration, store the data and mark the probe
as calibrated in the Sensor database.

- 546 -
Calibration sensor setting
The approach/retract, clear distance and search distance can be set differently for DCC calibration
vs DCC measurement. To set the parameters for sensor calibration click the Calibration sensor
setting icon in the upper right of the panel.

Enter the desired sensor calibration approach/retract, clear distance and search distance.

Click the Apply button to accept the inputs and close the settings window.

- 547 -
Sensor - Sensor Utility

‘Sensor tool’ icon is added in sensor operation toolbar.

This tool is used for mirror sensor or find mirror sensor; mirror sensor allows drag plane feature
and drop it onto label window, click ‘compute’ icon will compute base sensor relative to mirror
sensor of plane;

‘Find sensor angle’ function will find /create best sensor according to appointed angle A and
plane.

Application setup new adds ‘mirror’ to control sensor mirror when DMIS program is running;
when program is running to sensor rotation statement, ‘Always find mirror sensor at SNSLCT’
can control whether find sensor after mirror; when mirror sensor cannot be found, ‘when mirror
sensor is not found’ can make program stop or continue to use sensor without mirror in the
program.

- 548 -
Sensor - Sensor Calibration Shortcuts

There are a number of sensor calibration short-cuts that can be employed to make sensor
calibration quicker and easier. These short-cuts assume that the calibration artifact has been
properly defined and also located with Update gage.

Open the Sensor database in the double database.

The sensor calibration spheres will be located under the “Sphere Gage” node. The left column
contains the artifact label name, the right column contains the number of points to be used in the
calibration. This number can be changed by clicking on the existing number and selecting a new
number of points from the list.

Drag the sensor label (or multiple labels) from the sensor nodes of the Sensor database and drop
onto the desired calibration gage.

After dropping the sensor(s) onto the desired gage node, a prompt will be presented to continue
with the calibration or to stop.

- 549 -
When performing a drag and drop of multiple sensors with multiple angles, RationalDMIS will
prompt to change the angle if the angle has to be changed manually. All dropped angles of one
parent sensor will be calibrated before moving on to another parent sensor. If a different stylus
module or some other device is required and requires manual intervention RationalDMIS will
prompt the user. If no intervention is required, RationalDMIS will complete the required changes
and proceed with the calibration.

- 550 -
Sensor - Probe creation and assembly

The Create New Probe view is divided into 3 different panels. On the left is a graphical view of the
probe as it is created, on the upper right is a list of the components that are used for the probe
assembly. On the lower right is a list of the components that can be used.

Graphical View of the probe

The graphical view of the probe provide a real
time view of the probe assembly as it is being
created. If an item is added, or if an item is
removed, the graphical view will immediately
update to reflect the changes.

List of components
The list of components is driven by a large relational database to list only the items that can fit on
the current assembly. Double click an item in the list to add it to the assembly. As soon as that
item is added to the assembly the component list has been update to list only the items that can
fit next.

- 551 -
In most cases the available component list will contain the component name, length, diameter
and part number. The majority of items are Renishaw items.

If the particular probe that is to be used is not listed in the available component lists,
RationalDMIS has provided the ability to create custom user defined probes. To display the user
defined probe interface, click the “Custom” button on the bottom right of the window.
Note: All dimensions in the Custom user defined probes are in MM.

Custom user defined probes

A number of different probing devices can be created in the Customer user defined probes
including probe heads, probe extensions, styli and styli extensions, scanners and video devices.

Creating a user defined probe head

Click the Probe Head button on the lower left. Enter a name for the probe head in the “Label”

- 552 -
text-box. Select either fixed probe or hard probe from the Probe type list (fixed usually can accept
a touch trigger probe). Enter the probe head body diameter in “Diam”. Enter the body length
from the machine mount to the sensor mount. In the “Length” text-box. The length entry is very
critical as it is used in the calculation of the total assembly length. Select the desired lower thread
size from the “Lower thread” drop-down list. The lower thread entry is used to determine which
other components can be used with this custom probe head. Click the Accept button to complete
the user defined probe head. The probe head will now be listed with the other probe heads in the
Create sensor database lists.

Creating an extension

Extensions can either be probe extensions which mount between the probe head and the probe
or stylus extensions. Enter the label name of the extension in the Label text-box. Enter the body
diameter of the extension in the Diam text-box. If there are different diameters in the extension,
enter the largest diameter. The length of the extension is shoulder to shoulder (i.e. exclude the
threads from the length measurement). The length is critical. Enter the length in the Length
text-box. Select the upper and lower threads from the drop-down. Thread selection is
important as it determines what parts the extension can mount to and what parts can mount to
the extension.
Click the Accept button to create the extension and close the custom interface. The extension will
now appear at the appropriate location depending on upper/lower thread selection.

Create custom stylus

A custom stylus can easily be made by entering a few parameters. Enter the label name for the
stylus in the Label text-box. Select the either Sphere is Disk type of stylus from the Style
drop-down. If Disk is selected, slightly different parameters are required. See Custom Disk below.
Select the mounting thread size from the Thread drop-down. The thread selection is important as
it defines where the custom stylus can be accessed from.

- 553 -
Enter the body (or shank) diameter in the DIAM text-box (note this is NOT the ball diameter). The
length of a stylus is specified from the shoulder to the center of the ball. Enter the length in the
Length text-box. Enter the ball diameter in the Ball Diameter text-box.

Custom Disk

Creating a custom disk stylus is the same as creating a ball stylus with the exception of one
additional parameter. Enter the thickness of the disk in the Thickness text-box.

Once a custom probe head, extension or stylus has been defined and added to RationalDMIS, this
user-defined probe will become a seamless part of the software in the probe components data.
The custom developed items can be used right alongside the pre-defined items.

Sensor build panel

At the bottom of the sensor build view is the sensor build operations panel.

Sensor Label
RationalDMIS provides a default probe label. A new label name may be typed in the Senor
Label text-box.

Calibration Form Error tolerance

The default value for calibration form error tolerance is
0.01mm. You may use this value or enter a different
value. The calibration form error tolerance is
individually set for each probe so that there can be different form error tolerances for
different probes. The value is stored so that the next time the panel is displayed the last
used value will already be entered.

Sensor mount
The sensor mount defines
how the probe head is
oriented and located when
mounted to the machine.

- 554 -
The graphic above depicts a standard probe orientation on a standard bridge machine. The
probe is pointing down in a –Z shaft direction. The probe head orientation is –Y defined by
the “red light” on the probe head. There are
no additional mounts between the machine
and the probe head and there are no offsets.
The Offset value indicates the offset distance
between the center shaft of an assembled
probe and center of the measuring machine
quill. In the image to the left, a 20mm offset
in the X direction has been applied.

The Shape Type setting permits the addition of items between the machine and the probe
head. The Shape Type drop-down list has the option to select None for no mount or to select
either a cylinder shape mount or a cube shape mount. If cylinder or cube is selected, the
panel interface will change
slightly to include entry
boxes for
the Height and Diameter (Width if cube selected) of the item between the
quill and the probe head.
In the image above a cylinder has been added with a length of 60mm and
a diameter of 60mm. This is shown in the graphics.

Click the Update Sensor Mount icon to update the sensor mount data and apply it to the
machine.

Once the sensor has been fully created the “Add Sensor” and “Add/Active” buttons in the
lower right will become enabled. “Add Sensor” will create the sensor and add it to the
sensor database, but will not make the sensor active as the current sensor. “Add/Activate”
will create the sensor, add it to the Senor database and set the sensor as the current active
sensor.

- 555 -
Sensor – Add Additional Sensor Angles

There are a number of different ways to generate new sensor angles within RationalDMIS. In this
case we are going to focus on the Create New Sensor Angle method.

Select “Sensor” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the Sensor Operations panel.

Select “New probe” from the Sensor operations toolbar.

If the current probe is not capable of indexing, the “New Probe” icon will not be on the toolbar.

The New Sensor text-box contains a label automatically

provided by RationalDMIS. The automatic label has the
parent label as the prefix and then includes the selected A and B angles into the label. The label
can be modified by entering a new label in the New Sensor text-box. The New Sensor label must
be a legal DMIS label name.

The Parent Label text-box is a read only text-box to show

the parent sensor label. The parent sensor is normally the
sensor with A and B angles of 0.0. Any subsequent angles are known as child sensors as they keep
all the properties of the parent (length, diameter etc) with only the rotation angle changed.

A and B angles can be manually input. If the entered value

is not a multiple of the increment angle (see below) then

- 556 -
the entered value will automatically be rounded up or down to match the closest increment.
Features may also be used to select probe A and B angles.
Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop it into
the box below the “Angle A:” and “B:” boxes.
RationalDMIS will then automatically enter the values for
the closest sensor parallel to the feature vector within the limitations of the increment value. (see
below for increment)

The sensor angle can also be changed by adjusting the two scroll bars above and to the left of the
grid area. As the scroll bars are moved, a real-time graphical preview of the rotation angles is
displayed in the graphics view.

Probe increments are defined by the limitations of the probe head. Some Renishaw heads index
on 7.5° increments while others index at 15°. The increment drop-down can select increments
greater than the probe increment limitations.

Once the sensor angle has been selected the “Add Sensor” and “Add/Active” buttons on the right
will become enabled. “Add Sensor” will create the sensor and add it to the sensor database, but
will not make the sensor active as the current sensor. “Add/Activate” will create the sensor, add it
to the Senor database and set the sensor as the current active sensor.

- 557 -
Sensor - Create New Sensor Angles and calibrate

Create New Sensor angles provide a grid from which to select multiple sensor angles and then
calibrate those angles all in the same interface panel.

Select “Sensor” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open the Sensor Operations panel.

Select “Create new sensor angles” from the Sensor operations toolbar.

If the current probe is not capable of indexing, the “Create new sensor angles” icon will not be on
the toolbar.

Root Sensor Label

The Root Sensor Label is the same as the parent. It is a read only text-box to
show the parent sensor label. The parent sensor is normally the sensor with A
and B angles of 0.0. Any subsequent angles are known as child sensors as they keep all the
properties of the parent (length, diameter etc) with only the rotation angle changed.

Angle selection window

The angle selection window at the center of the panel contains a
series of check-boxes that are based on the probe head increments.
The check-boxes correspond to the A and B angles. If box is checked based on the A angle shown
in the left, then the B angle will be the angle stated straight up from the checked angle.
Un-check a box to remove the angle.

- 558 -
 Current Angle Display
When a check-box has been selected, the A angle and the B angle will be
displayed in the two read-only text-boxes.

Definition button
The definition button will define the selected sensor angles, create then and
add them to the Sensor database.

Calibration gauge
The Calib Gage text-box accepts the drag and drop of calibration gage artifacts
from the Sensor database. The dropped calibration gage will be used in the
subsequent calibrations.

Calibration points
The Points to Calib text-box accepts the input of the number of points to be
taken for each sensor calibration.

Calibration button
Click the Calib button to define and then calibrate the selected angles. If Leanr
mode is on, DMIS statements are generated and added to the program but no calibration takes
place until the program is executed. If Learn mode is not on, calibration of the selected angles will
begin immediately.

- 559 -
Sensor - Sensor Mount Calibration

If a new probe head has been installed, or the existing probe head moved, or re-installed a
Sensor Mount Calibration should be run. The Sensor Mount Calibration is used to compensate for
any rotational or angular deviations in the probe head installation. It is best to use 2 sensors that
are 180° from each other. E.g. (0:90 and 0:180 )or(90:-90 and 90:90)

To perform the sensor mount calibration drag two child sensors from the parent sensor and drop
into the Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 text-boxes.

Click the Start button and measure 4 points on the sphere at each of the 2 sensor
positions. Click Calib to accept the calibration data.

If deviation of nominal sensor and actual sensor is too big, graphic path seems like not fit, the
software will show position of actual sensor.

- 560 -
Sensors – Additional Operations

How to select and enable a probe?

Open the Sensor database in the dual database area

Right click on the desired sensor and select activate from the pop-up menu.

A small graphic of a probe indicates the active sensor.

Drag & drop from the Feature database to define and activate sensors
Features can be dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto a probe node to create
and activate a sensor.

Drag a feature from the Feature database and drop it onto the root node of the desired probe.
If a probe that is closest to being parallel to the dropped feature vector does not exist,
RationalDMIS will automatically create it. Once the sensor angles have been created, or if the
sensor has already been made, it will then become the active sensor and the probe will index to
the values determined by RationalDMIS.

Drag & drop from the Feature database to define and activate sensors
If the Pick Option in the Graphics view is set to either “Select nominal” or “Select actual” a
feature can be selected from the graphic view and dropped onto a probe node to create and
activate a sensor.

- 561 -
Make sure the Pick Mode is set to Select actual or Select Nominal. Click on the actual or nominal
feature graphic and drag it to the root node of the desired probe. If a probe that is closest to
being parallel to the dropped feature vector does not exist, RationalDMIS will automatically
create it. Once the sensor angles have been created, or if the sensor has already been made, it
will then become the active sensor and the probe will index to the values determined by
RationalDMIS.

Drag and drop of other sensors

Other root sensors can be dragged to another parent node in the sensor database to duplicate
the child angles.

If all of the child angles of one parent probe need to be duplicated in a different parent probe,
drag the parent node with the children to the new parent node. All of the child sensor angles of
the original parent node will be re-created in the new parent node.

Calibrate all sensors in a DMIS program

RationalDMIS has included a quick and easy way to calibrate only the sensors needed to run the
current program.

Load a program or project then right click on the calibration artifact to use in the calibration.
Select “Calibrate sensors in DMIS program” to begin. RationalDMIS will read the program for
sensors and calibrate on those sensors found in the program.

- 562 -
Tolerance

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

The tolerance operation panel includes: Distance, angle, angularity, perpendicularity, parallelism,
position, cylindricity, coordinate tolerance, concentricity/ coaxiality, circular runout, total runout,
circularity, cone angle, diameter tolerance, radius tolerance, flatness, straightness, point profile,
curve profile, surface profile, symmetry and width.

- 563 -
Tolerance - Distance

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Distance from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Distance Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1 & FLabel2

FLabel1 and 2 are the two features to be tolerance for distance. The tolerance features can be
point, edge point, line, plane, circle, cylinder, sphere, arc, ellipse, curve, surface and slot.

Use Evaluated Nom Distance

If use evaluated Nom Distance is checked on, then RationalDMIS will determine the nominal
distance between the two entities. The Nominal Distance text-box will be read-only.
Un-check Use Evaluated Nom Distance to enable the Nominal Distance text-box to enter a
nominal.

Evaluation method
There are three different evaluation methods from which to select in the Eval Method drop-down
list. The eval methods include Average, Maximum and Minimum.

- 564 -
Distance type
The Distance Type drop-down list includes, PT2PT，X axis, Y axis and Z axis

ISO tolerance
ISO tolerances of none, fine, medium, coarse, very coarse can be applied. The upper and lower
tolerances will vary depending on the selection and the nominal distance values.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Nominal distance
If Use evaluated nom distance is checked on, the Nominal Distance text-box will be disabled. If
Use evaluated nom distance is not checked, then the nominal distance value can be entered into
the Nominal Distance text-box.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Define type
There are two types of tolerance reporting options in the Define Type drop-down. Nominal will
report the deviation from nominal, while Limit will report the tolerance in relation to the upper
and lower limits ignoring the nominal.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual distance value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept/Preview
Preview will show the evaluated features in the graphic area. Clicking the Accept button will
evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set to do so, will report the
tolerance evaluation.

- 565 -
Tolerance - Angle

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Angle from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Angle Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1 & FLabel2

FLabel1 and 2 are the two features to be toleranced for angle between. The tolerance features
can be line, plane, circle, cylinder, arc, cone, ellipse and slot.

Use Evaluated Nom Angle

If use evaluated Nom Angle is checked on, then RationalDMIS will determine the nominal angle
between the two entities. The Nominal Angle text-box will be read-only.
Un-check Use Evaluated Nom Angle to enable the Nominal Angle text-box to enter a nominal.

Nominal Angle
If Use evaluated nom angle is checked on, the Nominal Angle text-box will be disabled. If Use
evaluated nom angle is not checked, then the nominal angle value can be entered into the
Nominal Angle text-box.

- 566 -
Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If the lower tolerance is to be a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative
value (-0.005).

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual angle between value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：
The drawing to the left shows an angle between tolerance with
a nominal of 135° and a tolerance of +/- 0.2°

RationalDMIS shows a tolerance label, the two evaluation

features. A nominal angle of 135° with a lower tolerance of -0.2 and upper tolerance of 0.2.
The actual angle is 135.01827° which is in tolerance.

- 567 -
- 568 -
Tolerance - Angularity

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Angularity from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Angularity Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for angularity. The tolerance features can be line, plane,
cone and cylinder.

Length
Defines the length over which the angularity tolerance is to be evaluated. A value of -1 will ignore
the length entry. Length is optional and will be defined in the drawings.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

- 569 -
Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.
Nominal angle
Enter the specified nominal angle.

Datum Label 1 & Datum Label 2

Datum labels 1 & 2 are the datum features defined in the GD&T feature control frame. Feature
that can be used as reference features are: line, plane, cone, and cylinder.

Datum Method
The datum method drop – down can define datum methods as a tangent plane or two parallel
planes.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual angularity value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Bonus
If there is any GD&T bonus tolerance available, it will be specified here.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example:

The angularity tolerance above shows an angularity tolerance zone of 0.02 and a nominal angle
of 45°. The reference frames defines datum -A- as the required datum. There are no modifiers
used and no evaluation length specified.

- 570 -
- 571 -
Tolerance - Perpendicularity

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Perpendicularity from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Perpendicularity Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for perpendicularity. The tolerance features can be line,
plane, cone and cylinder.

Length
Defines the length over which the perpendicularity tolerance is to be evaluated. A value of -1 will
ignore the length entry. Length is optional and will be defined in the drawings.

Datum 2 Label
The feature name for the optional 2nd datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include line, plane, cone, and cylinder.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the

- 572 -
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.
Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum 1 Label
The feature name for the required 1st datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include line, plane, cone, and cylinder.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual perpendicularity value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

Perpendicularity of the cylinder to base plane A is shown in the red circle in the picture above.,
The test feature is CYL1, there is no length applied, there is no 2nd datum, the tolerance zone is
0.1, Datum1 is PLN1, the actual perpendicularity is 0.286928, the deviation above the tolerance
zone is 0.186928, there are no GD&T material conditions used.

- 573 -
Tolerance - Parallelism

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Parallel from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Parallelism Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for parallelism. The tolerance features can be line, plane,
cone and cylinder.

Length
Defines the length over which the parallelism tolerance is to be evaluated. A value of -1 will
ignore the length entry. Length is optional and will be defined in the drawings.

Datum 2 Label
The feature name for the optional 2nd datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include line, plane, cone, and cylinder.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the

- 574 -
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum 1 Label
The feature name for the required 1st datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include line, plane, cone, and cylinder.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual parallelism value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

The evaluation of parallelism of a plane to the reference plane B is shown in the circle above.
Below, the test feature is PLN1, there is no length applied, there is no Datum 2, the tolerance
zone is 0.2, the Datum 1 is PLN4, the evaluated parallelism is 0.046535, it deviates above the
tolerance zone by 0.026535, there are no GD&T modifiers.

- 575 -
Tolerance - Position

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select True Position from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the True Position Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for position. The tolerance features can be point, edge
point, circle, sphere, slot, cylinder, plane and arc.

Length
Defines the length over which the position tolerance is to be evaluated. A value of -1 will ignore
the length entry. Length is optional and will be defined in the drawings.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include point, edge point, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder, cone, line, plane, slot
and DATUM data.

- 576 -
Datum method
Optional, can set the datum along an X,Y,or Z axis.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual true position value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A position tolerance of a cylinder is labeled in the circle of the picture above. The reference
features are three base planes of A, B and C. Tolerance is 0.1.
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

New support:
● Reference system of axis-plane-axis can be used in position evaluation.
The primary axis defines principle axis direction; plane and the primary axis needs to be
perpendicular, intersecting point of them is the original point; the secondary axis defines rotation
direction;

- 577 -
● Position evaluation adds new evaluation method: axis-axis-axis;
The primary axis is the first datum, the secondary parallel axis controls rotation, the tertiary axis
controls original point; Refer original point is on intersecting point of middle plane of the primary
and the secondary axis and the tertiary axis;

● Positional reference system implements the reference of “Axis-Plane-Axis”, for example:

Primary axis controls the first direction;
Secondary planar controls the second direction;
The origin point being determined by the intersection of the second plane and tertiary axis;
Primary axis is parallel to the secondary plane (vector perpendicular), Tertiary axis is
perpendicular to the secondary plane (vector parallel);

● Surface profile evaluation supports that Plane as primary datum and Surface as secondary datum.
The secondary datum Surface finds transformation error constrained by first datum Plane. This
datum system is fully constrained. The transformation directly applies to the evaluation results.
Note: The evaluation of PLANE applies bestfit when the Position Tolerance DRF is active. And
it will keep calculating the result during the input of the tolerances. For this reason, it adds the
button “Evaluation”, so it can finally gain the result after inputting and calculating.

- 578 -
⚫ Cylinder 3d position tolerance can use Line-Plane as datum
Primary reference feature : Line reducible
Secondary reference : Plane
The nominal Line and nominal Plane vectors have angle greater than 75 degree.

⚫ TOL/POS adds display of dx, dy, dz additional to the TOLZON deviation.

An icon is added to the Deviation window. This icon allows switching to XYZ deviation display.

Output can also display XYZ deviation with a new Setup item to control it.

- 579 -
Tolerance - Cylindricity

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Cylindricity from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Cylindricity Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for cylindricity. The only feature type that can be tolerance
is a cylinder.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual cylindricity value and is read-only.

- 580 -
Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A cylindricity tolerance of 0.02 is shown in the circle in the picture above.

The evaluation method in the software is as follows:

- 581 -
Tolerance - Coordinate Tolerance

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Coordinate tolerance from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Coordinate Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for coordinate location. The tolerance features can be
point, edge point, line, plane, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder and cone.

ISO tolerance
ISO tolerances of none, fine, medium, coarse, very coarse can be applied. The upper and lower
tolerances will vary depending on the selection and the nominal distance values.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Eval Method

- 582 -
Evaluate the tolerance along a selected axis, or radially or angular
Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual coordinate location value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

- 583 -
Tolerance - Concentricity

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Concentricity from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Concentricity Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for concentricity. The tolerance features can be circle,
cylinder, arc, line, and cone.

Length
Defines the length over which the concentricity tolerance is to be evaluated. A value of -1 will
ignore the length entry. Length is optional and will be defined in the drawings.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Reference feature
The label name of a feature to act as a datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include circle, cylinder, arc, line and cone.

- 584 -
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual concentricity value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

The evaluation of concentricity (coaxiality) of a cylinder is shown in the circle in the picture above.
The reference feature is cylinder D. The tolerance band is 0.1.
The evaluation method is shown as follows:

TOL/CONCEN to be evaluated with material condition

Y14.5 evaluates concentricity always on a RFS basis.
China tolerance standard allows material condition to be applied;
Application Setup->Tolerance Setup adds a new setting "TOL/CONCEN to be evaluated with
material condition” setting as “YES”;

- 585 -
- 586 -
Tolerance - Circular Runout

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Circular Runout from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Circular Runout Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for circular runout. The only features type is a circle.

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include circle, cylinder, arc, line and cone

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

- 587 -
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual circular runout value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A circular runout tolerance is evaluated in the picture above. The reference feature is cylinder D.
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

- 588 -
Tolerance - Total Runout

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Total Runout from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Total Runout Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for total runout. The tolerance features can be cylinder or
plane.

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include circle, cylinder, arc, line and cone.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

- 589 -
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual total runout value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

The total runout of a cylinder is evaluated in the picture above. The reference feature is cylinder
D.
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

Take the total runout implements PLANE as the first datum.

- 590 -
Tolerance - Circularity

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Circularity from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Circularity Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for circularity. The tolerance features can be circle, cone,
sphere and arc

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual circularity value and is read-only.

- 591 -
Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A circularity tolerance of a circle is evaluated in the picture above.

The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

- 592 -
Tolerance – Cone Angle

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Cone Angle from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Cone Angle Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for cone angle. The only tolerance feature type is a cone.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual

- 593 -
The Actual box shows the actual cone angle value and is read-only.
Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

- 594 -
Tolerance - Diameter

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Diameter from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Diameter Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for diameter. Feature types include circle, cylinder and
sphere .

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features

Evaluation method
There are two different evaluation methods from which to select in the Eval Method drop-down
list. The eval methods include AVG and MINMAX.

Nominal diameter
The nominal diameter is read only and must be edited by changing the nominal diameter in the

- 595 -
feature properties.
Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

ISO tolerance
ISO tolerances may be used in place of upper/lower tolerances. RationalDMIS supports a range of
ISO standard tolerances from 3MM to 50MM.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual diameter value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

- 596 -
Tolerance - Radius

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Radius from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Radius Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for radius. Feature types include circle, cylinder,arc and
sphere.

Evaluation method
There are two different evaluation methods from which to select in the Eval Method drop-down
list. The eval methods include AVG and CRAD.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features

- 597 -
Nominal radius
The nominal radius is read only and must be edited by changing the nominal diameter in the
feature properties.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual diameter value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

- 598 -
Tolerance - Flatness

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Flatness from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Flatness Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for flatness. The only tolerance feature type is a plane.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual flatness value and is read-only.

- 599 -
Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

The flatness of plane is evaluated in the picture above. The tolerance band is 0.02.
The evaluation method is as follows:

Flatness Tolerance Evaluate supports Per Unit tolerance zone.

- 600 -
Tolerance - Straightness

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Straightness from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Straightness Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for straightness. The tolerance feature types are line and
cylinder.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

MMC
The MMC drop-down contains three GD&T modifiers, MMC, LMC and RFS.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

- 601 -
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual straightness value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

- 602 -
Tolerance - Point Profile

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Point Profile from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Point Profile Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the point feature to be toleranced for point profile. The tolerance features can be point,
edge point.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include point, edge point, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder, cone, line, plane, slot
and DATUM data.

- 603 -
Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual point profile value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

New support:
● Point profile evaluation supports reference feature

- 604 -
Tolerance - Curve Profile

Curve Profile and Profile of a Line are the same.

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Curve Profile from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Curve Profile Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for curve profile. The tolerance features can be curve, line,
circle, arc and arc.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include point, edge point, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder, cone, line, plane, slot
and DATUM data.

Define tolerance

- 605 -
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual point profile value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A curve profile tolerance is shown in the picture above. The tolerance band is 0.05. The datum
structure is made up of datums A, B, C
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

These can be set in Application setup.

1. For Y14.5 setting, there is a new option for Deviation calculation

The default is |Max|: the deviation is either Max or Min depending on which one has max
absolute value.
The new option is: Max - Min.

- 606 -
 When Max*Min > 0, Dev = |Max|>|Min|? Max: Min
When Max*Min < 0, Dev = Max - Min
NOTE： Deviation in this output setting doesn't determine the INTOL/OUTOL condition. The
Intol/Outol decision is made with Maximum error from theoretical condition. It is possible that
Deviation is outside of Lotol/Uptol but the tolerance is Intol. "

2. ISO1101 evaluates to a single tolerance zone while ANSI Y14.5 uses upper and lower
tolerances.
3. Absolution error: The absolute error is very close to ISO1101. ISO1101 takes maximum error
and multiply it with 2 to become the actual profile. Absolute error is just the maximum error,
without multiply by 2. Absolute error is always positive.

The output sample on the right shows the Y14.5 tolerance on the first line and absolute error on
the second line

DMIS template DMESW/Command to switch Profile evaluation standard

- 607 -
RationalDMIS supports both ANSI Y14.5 and ISO1101 standards for profile of a line.
Profile tolerance can use PLANE-LINE-POINT as datum

Profile tolerance can use PLANE -POINT-LINE as datum, The Line and Plane must be parallel

Starting distance and Ending distance

These two distance are to trim the Actual Curve Ptmeas points that to be used for profile
evaluation.
Corresponding DMIS support
OUTPUT/FA(GCV1), SD, ED, TA(TPFL1)
SD and ED are stored in the Curve database. If not specified, Curve SD and ED will be set to 0

DMIS syntax support for Curve Profile EVAL with SD and ED distance setting
EVAL/FA(GCV1),10,10,T(TPFL1)

- 608 -
Tolerance - Surface Profile

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Surface Profile from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Surface Profile Tolerance Operation panel from right to left
Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for surface profile. The tolerance features can be surface,
plane, cylinder, sphere, and cone.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum 1, Datum2 and Datum3 Labels

Label names of features that make up the datum structure defined in the feature control frame.
Feature types include point, edge point, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder, cone, line, plane, slot
and DATUM data.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many

- 609 -
features.
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual surface profile value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the tolerance zone. If the evaluated tolerance
deviation is within the tolerance zone, then the Deviation box will report In Tol. If the evaluated
deviation exceeds the tolerance zone, the deviation from the tolerance zone will be displayed. E.g
if the tolerance zone is 0.002 and the result is 0.003, the deviation will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

A surface profile tolerance is shown in the picture above. The tolerance band is 0.1. The datum
structure is made up of datums A, B, C
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:

RationalDMIS supports both ANSI Y14.5

and ISO1101 standards for surface profile.
These can be set in Application setup.
ISO1101 evaluates to a single tolerance
zone while ANSI Y14.5 uses upper and
lower tolerances.

Surface profile tolerance interface adds ‘Evaluate’ button, click this button will evaluate result;
Because sometimes fit evaluation needs long time to calculate;

- 610 -
New support:
● Surface profile datum feature supports feature can be simplified as line as the first datum.
Plane feature as the second datum; feature can be simplified as line must perpendicular to
plane feature;

● Evaluate surface profile tolerance with plane supports to use datum feature;

● Profile tolerance datum supports to use cylinder

Cylinder datum allows rotating around axis and moving along with axis.

● The profile tolerance evaluation supports the use of the ball as a datum, and the axis second
datum.

Edge Point is supported in PROFS tolerance. It changes the followings:

1. PROFS tolerance adds EdgePoint.
2. PROFS tolerance window accepts EdgePoint drag-n-Drop.
3. Tolerance database window Surface Profile label accepts EdgePoint drag-n-drop.
4. Application setup tolerance setup EdgePoint adds Profs.

- 611 -
Tolerance - Symmetry

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Symmetry from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Symmetry Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel1 & FLabel2

FLabel1 and 2 are the two features to be tolerance for symmetry. The tolerance features can be
points, edge points, line, plane, circle, cylinder, cone, sphere, arc, ellipse and slot.

Tolerance zone
The tolerance zone specified in the GD&T feature control frame.

Datum Label
The label name of a feature to act as a datum. Feature types which can be dragged and dropped
include plane, line, cylinder and cone.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many

- 612 -
features.
Actual
The Actual box shows the actual symmetry value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

Symmetry of plane 2 is evaluated in the picture above. Reference feature is plane. Tolerance band
is 0.1. Evaluation method software is shown as follows:

- 613 -
Tolerance - Width

Select “Tolerance” in the Operations toolbar.

Hint: You can use Ctrl+F5 to quickly open the Tolerance Operations panel.

Select Width from the Tolerance toolbar

Description of the Width Tolerance Operation panel from right to left

Tol Label
The Tol Label text-box contains the label name for the tolerance. RationalDMIS provides a default
label, or a new DMIS legal label can be entered.

FLabel
FLabel1 is the feature to be toleranced for width. The only tolerance feature type is slot.

Define tolerance
Once the tolerance parameters have been established, clicking the Define Tolerance will add the
tolerance to the Tolerance database. From there the tolerance can be re-used to apply to many
features.

Low Tol/UpTol
Low tol and uptol allow the definition of the upper and lower limits of the tolerance.
If ISO tolerances are in use, these values are automatically entered. If the lower tolerance is to be
a minus value (e.g +/-0.005), then it must be signed as a negative value (-0.005).

Evaluation direction
The Eval Direction drop down has 3 evaluation direction options: the long axis direction, the short
axis direction and vector direction.

- 614 -
Evaluation method
The Eval Method drop-down has three options: none, maximum and minimum

Actual
The Actual box shows the actual width value and is read-only.

Deviation
Deviation shows the evaluated results with the upper and lower tolerances. If the evaluated
tolerance deviation is within the upper and lower tolerances, then the Deviation box will report
In Tol. If the evaluated deviation exceeds the upper or lower tolerance, the deviation from the
limit will be displayed. E.g if the upper tolerance is +0.005 and the result is +0.006, the deviation
will display 0.001.

Accept
Clicking the Accept button will evaluate the tolerance, add it to the Tolerance database and if set
to do so, will report the tolerance evaluation.

For example：

The slot width tolerance of the long axis and the short axis are shown in the picture above. Upper
tolerance and lower tolerances are 0.02 and -0.02 respectively.
The evaluation method in the software is shown as follows

- 615 -
Tolerance - User Difined

From UI, the ACT window field accepts Tolerance Label drag-n-drop.; it can use mathematical
operators to calculate and the results are accepted as tolerances, open the DMIS statement of
the self-learning records, as follows:
DECL/COMMON, DOUBLE, TPFL1_V
TPFL1_V = VALUE/TA (TPFL1), ACT
T(TVIR1)=TOL/USETOL,LENGTH,NOMINL, 0.010000, -0.010000, 0.010000
OUTPUT/TPFL1_V*2-0.05, TA (TVIR1)

- 616 -
Tolerance - Composite

Composite tolerance supports feature of CURVE and PATERN. PATERN must be all circles. The
composite tolerance UI setting has two pages. The first page defines PATERN and second page
defines FEATUR. The PATERN and FEATUR are defined in DMIS standard TOL/COMPOS
Output also supports Composite tolerance
PATERN: signifies the Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework (PLTZF).
FEATUR: signifies the Feature Relating Tolerance Zone Framework (FRTZF).

The Output panel supports to output Composite tolerance

T(TCOMP4) = TOL/COMPOS,PATERN, 0.500000,DAT(A),DAT(B),DAT(C),FEATUR,$

0.100000, DAT (A)
OUTPUT/FA (PATERN1), TA (TCOMP4)

- 617 -
Coordinate System

A correct coordinate system is required to produce accurate measurements and to meet certain
inspection requirements.

The Coordinate Systems operations panel provides access to numerous tools to aid in the
creation of coordinate systems.
Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

The Coordinate System Operation panel and toolbar become visible

Coordinate toolbar contains numerous methods of generating coordinate systems both with and
without the use of CAD data.

- 618 -
Coordinate System - Coordinate Translation

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Translate from the Coordinate System toolbar.

From CRD
The From Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate systems can be dragged and
dropped from the Coordinate database.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Inputs
The X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis text-boxes can accept numerous inputs.
Features can be dragged from the Feature database or directly from the graphics view and
dropped onto the desired input.
A variable of the REAL type can be dragged and dropped from the Variables database.
A numeric value may be entered.
A mathematical equation may be entered with the result being the input value.

Input Indicator icon

Icons to the left of the input text-boxes provide quick information on the input status:

No input or illegal input

Legal numerical value input or REAL variable input

- 619 -
 Feature input. The Feature input graphically indicates the type of feature in the input
text-box. If the icon is red, then the feature is an actual feature. If the icon is blue, the feature is a
nominal feature. Clicking on the icon will toggle back and forth between actual and nominal.
Under most circumstances, it is preferred to enter the actual feature if available.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the iput text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

X/Y/Z Value of this Feature

The value in the translation input window is the final coordinate reading of the coresponding
feature origin. For example X axis in the right picture. The MYPT3 X value will be reading 10 in
the final coordinate system.

- 620 -
Coordinate System - Coordinate Rotation

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Rotate from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The “Rotation” Operations panel

From CRD
The From Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate
systems can be dragged and dropped from the Coordinate
database.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Rotation Axis
The Rotation axis drop-down list contains 3 axis to
rotate about : X, Y, and Z axis.
Point reducible or line reducible Features can also
be dragged from the Feature database and dropped
onto the Ration axis drop-down.

Rotation Angle
Enter an angle by which to rotate.

- 621 -
Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd
When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

Using Feature
When “Using feature” is checked on, the operations panel modifies slightly.

The Rotation Axis remains the same. The Alignment Direction sets the direction for the alignment.
The box below accepts the drag and drop of a line reducible feature from the Feature database.

Incr angle
Coordinate sytem rotation adds optional incremental angle input. The incremental angle is an
additional rotation
after feature vector alignment

- 622 -
Coordinate System - Create Crd

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Create Crd from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Create Crd Operations panel

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate systems can be dragged and
dropped from the Coordinate database. If Create Crd creates a complete new coordinate system,
the Cur Crd becomes irrelevant.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Coordinate axis controls

The method of establishing a coordinate system through ‘Create Coordinate’ is
to set the directions of the Primary and secondary axis.
The top drop-down list sets the primary axis either + or – direction.

The second drop-down window set the 2nd axis. The items available in the drop-down list depend
on the selection of the 1st primary axis drop down.
Feature input boxes
The top input window represents the primary level or the primary axis.
Drag planar features or some line reducible features from the Feature
database and drop onto the primary feature text-box.

- 623 -
The 2nd middle text-box represents the secondary axis or the alignment axis. Drag line reducible
features from the Feature database and drop onto the secondary feature text-box.
The final input text-box represents the tertiary feature or origin feature. Drag point reducible
features from the Feature database and drop onto the tertiary feature text-box.

Input Indicator icon

Icons to the left of the input text-boxes provide quick information on the input status:

No input or illegal input

Legal numerical value input or REAL variable input

Feature input. The Feature input graphically indicates the type of feature in the input
text-box. If the icon is red, then the feature is an actual feature. If the icon is blue, the feature is a
nominal feature. Clicking on the icon will toggle back and forth between actual and nominal.
Under most circumstances, it is preferred to enter the actual feature if available.

Origin control
The origin input text-boxes control the origins of
the new coordinate system. The default value is 0,
which indicates the input feature to the left will
become an origin 0 for the indicated axis.
If the origin for the indicated axis needs to be something other, point reducible features can be
dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the desired origin text-box. The origin
text-boxes also accept numerical input. The entered value will be an offset from the location of
the input feature on the left.
The origin text-box can also be left empty, indicating that the origin of the current coordinate
system is to be used for the indicated axis in the new coordinate system.

Example of primary coordinate axis

The primary or level plane will be set on PLN in the Z+ direction. PLN1 will have a Z value of 0.

Example of secondary coordinate axis

The secondary axis or alignment axis is aligned to LN1 in the X+ direction. CIR1 will be used as
the Y axis origin.

Example of tertiary coordinate

The tertiary or origin is on the X axis and is set to CIR1.

- 624 -
Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd
When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

Full control
The Ceate Crd panel can create a full new coordinate system with no other dependencies or can
create partial coordinate systems that are still dependent on elements of the current coordinate
system. A complete full coordinate system has been created in the image below.

Partial control
Partial coordinate systems have some dependency on the current coordinate system. In the
example below, there is no origin for the Y axis. The current Y axis orign will be used.

In the example below, only the primary level axis has been set in Z by PLN1, but in not being used
as a Z axis origin. Only the primary level axis has been set. The current coordinate system will use
all of its original parameters with the exception of the primary level axis.

- 625 -
Coordinate system - Offset Coordinate

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Offset Crd from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Offset Crd Operations panel

Offset Crd creates a plane through the offset values of 3 points. The plane will then be used as
the primary level of the new coordinate system with all other parameters based on the current
coordinate system.

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate systems can be dragged and
dropped from the Coordinate database. If Create Crd creates a complete new coordinate system,
the Cur Crd becomes irrelevant.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Coordinate axis control

The coordinate axis control drop-down list has the three axis in both + and – directions. The plane
generated from the offset becomes the primary on the selected axis.

Feature input boxes

Drag a point reducible feature from the Feature database to one of the feature input boxes. The
dropped feature will be combined with its offset value to the right to construct the offset plane.

- 626 -
Distance input boxes
Enter an offset distance or drag a REAL type variable from the Variable database to set the offset
for the point feature to the left.

Translation control
If the Translate origin check-box is checked, the plane will be used as the selected axis origin. If
the Translate origin check-box is not checked, the origin from the current coordinate system will
be used as the origin in the new coordinate system.

Input Indicator icon

Icons to the left of the input text-boxes provide quick information on the input status:

No input or illegal input

Legal numerical value input or REAL variable input

Feature input. The Feature input graphically indicates the type of feature in the input
text-box. If the icon is red, then the feature is an actual feature. If the icon is blue, the feature is a
nominal feature. Clicking on the icon will toggle back and forth between actual and nominal.
Under most circumstances, it is preferred to enter the actual feature if available.

Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 627 -
Coordinate System - Three Points Best-fit Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Three point best-fit coordinate setup from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Three point best-fit coordinate setup operations panel

The Three point best-fit coordinate system will take 3 point reducible features and create a full
new coordinate system that best-fits the entered values for each feature. A common use is a part
fixture with 3 tooling balls with coordinate data entered for each tooling ball.

Nominal Coordinate System

The Nom Crd contains the current coordinate system by default. Other coordinate system labels
can be dragged from the Coordinate system database and dropped onto the Nom Crd text-box.
The coordinate system in the Nom Crd text-box presents the initial Nom X, Nom Y, Nom Z values
of the dropped point reducible features.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Feature input boxes

Drag a point reducible feature from the Feature database and drop it onto the desired feature
input to be used in the creation of the coordinate system. Actual features are required. Even if
the dropped feature is a nominal, RationalDMIS will attempt to locate the actual. If no actual can
be found, the coordinate system cannot be generated.

Nominal Position text-boxes

- 628 -
When a point reducible feature is dropped onto a feature input box, the corresponding Nom X,
Nom Y and Nom Z text-boxes will contain the positional values for the feature in the current
coordinate system. Enter new values for the new coordinate system.

Average errors
If Average errors is checked on, the errors for the location of all 3 entries are averaged, not giving
priority to any one entry.
If Average errors is not checked, then RationalDMIS will fit the 1st entry, followed by the 2nd,
followed by the 3rd. This gives the 1st entry more importance in fitting than the 2nd entry, which in
turn is given more importance in fitting than the 3rd entry.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 629 -
Coordinate System - Two Point Offset Alignment Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Two point offset alignment coordinate setup from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Two point offset alignment coordinate setup operations panel

The two point offset alignment coordinate system creates an alignment in a selected work plane
through 2 offset points. It is dependent on the current coordinate system for primary level and
origins.

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate systems can be dragged and
dropped from the Coordinate database. The locations of the two point reducible features are
initially based on their location in the current coordinate system.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Work plane
The work plane drop-down list has XY, YX and ZX work planes to choose from to define the work
plane that the 2 point offset is conducted in.

Feature Input boxes

Drag a point reducible feature from the Feature database and drop onto the desired feature input
box. The dropped feature will be one of the 2 features used in the offset alignment.

- 630 -
First feature offset values
The two first feature offset value text-boxes contain the positional information for two axis of the
1st feature. The values are shown in the current coordinate system. These values can be kept or
new values entered.

Second feature offset values

The two second feature offset values beside the 2nd feature control both the offset direction and
the offset value. The direction is considered positive if the 2nd feature would have to travel in a
positive direction to get to the 1st feature, and negative if the 2nd feature would have to travel
negative.

Error evaluation method

The error evaluation drop-down list contains a Linear error average and a Point error average
selection.
The linear error average places the 2nd input feature directly on the constructed line by the
entered 2nd feature value.
The point error average takes the average errors in 2 directions to create the coordinate system.

If it is expected that error evaluation result is in a single direction for the second feature. The
direction can be selected from the drop-down lists incorporated into the 2nd feature input boxes.

In the example below, the direction is either + or – X and the offset value is controlled by the Y
input box. The blue circle is the first input point while red circle is the second input point.

- 631 -
Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 632 -
Coordinate System - Six Point Best-fit Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Six points best-fit coordinate setup from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Six points best-fit coordinate setup operations panel

The six points best-fit coordinate setup will create a new full coordinate system based on 6 point
reducible feature nominal values and the corresponding 6 point reducible feature actual
measured values. This is most often used in CAD alignments.

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the basis for the 6 point best-fit. The nominal/actual coordinate deviation is
derived in the current coordinate system. It is very important to select the correct coordinate
system as the difference between nominal and actual are used to calculate the new coordinate
system.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Feature input list

The feature input list accepts the drag and drop of point reducible features from the Feature
database. The dropped features should be actual features. As each feature is dropped, the
nominal location values of those features are displayed in the current coordinate system. The
values are editable to allow user intervention or user definition.

- 633 -
CAD model
A CAD model can be used to evaluate the best-fit result through iteration. When a CAD model is
being used, the CAD model name can be dragged from the Feature database and dropped into
the Use CAD text-box. When a CAD model is being used, RationalDMIS will iterate to re-define
the nominal by projecting the feature onto CAD. When CAD is not used, the results are based on
a single iteration.

Delete/Delete All icons

Clicking the Delete icon will delete the current selected feature. Delete All will delete all the
features.

Iteration icon
Clicking the iteration icon will change the interface to define the iteration parameters. When
iteration is used, measurements will be re-taken and the coordinate system improved each time
until either the convergence value is satisfied or the defined number of iterations has been met.

Variable name
The variable is used to store the iteration convergence value. The variable should be a
REAL type variable. The variable can be dragged from the Variable database and
dropped onto the Var Name text-box.
Iteration label
RationalDMIS uses the Iterat label to create an iteration start point in the DMIS code.
Failure label
If the expected result cannot be met in the pre-defined number of iterations, then the
failure label will be used to exit the iteration.
Maximum iteration
The Max iter value is the maximum number of attempts to iterate to meet the expected
value. The Max iter text-box can contain an entered number or an integer variable can
be dragged from the Variables database to the Max iter text-box.
Convergence value
The convergence value is the difference between iterations. It is set by the Evaluation
type drop-down. If that value is met before the Max iteration value then the iteration is
a success. If the iteration value is not met before the max iterations, then the iteration
has failed.
Evaluation selection
Drop-down lists for Feature 1
through Feature 6 contain
evaluation axis. In the image

- 634 -
 to the left, Feature 1, Feature 2, Feature 3 will use the Z axis data to evaluate, while
Feature 4 and Feature 5 will evaluate the X axis and Feature 6 will evaluate the Y axis
Evaluation Type
The evaluation type drop-down has either Absolute value or Incremental value to
control how the difference in iteration values are compared. If Absolute is selected,
then the deviation from the measured value to the nominal value is used to assess the
deviation. Incremental looks at the difference between the current and the adjacent
single iteration to determine the deviation.

Enable Iterate
When checked the Enable iterate check-box will close the iteration parameter view and
return to the iteration return to the Six points best-fit coordinate setup operations
panel. If Learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

Note: six-point bestfit coordinate system updates the nominal feature value into the new
coordinate system.

- 635 -
Coordinate System - Multi Point Best-fit Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Multi point best-fit coordinate setup from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The multi-point best-fit coordinate setup operations panel

The multi-point best-fit coordinate setup will create a new full coordinate system based on
multiple point reducible feature nominal values and the corresponding multiple point reducible
feature actual measured values. This is most often used in CAD alignments.

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the basis for the multi-point best-fit. The nominal/actual coordinate
deviation is derived in the current coordinate system. It is very important to select the correct
coordinate system as the difference between nominal and actual are used to calculate the new
coordinate system.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Feature input list

Input window allows drag and drop actual feature. These features can be drag from feature data
zone or directly from graphical window and drop it onto input window. X, Y, Z three check boxes
are related with each input point feature respectively. By default, X, Y, Z three check boxes are in
selecting status.
Multi-point bestfit allows using multi-surface, multi-curve to make bestfit calculation, and

- 636 -
supports circle, slot features involved in bestfit calculation. When check box is selected, it
indicates the coordinate value is used when making bestfit; when check box is not selected, it
indicates the coordinate value is not used when making bestfit.

Rotation and translation check-boxes

There are two checkboxes for each axis. If a Rotation check-box is checked, the corresponding axis
rotation can be used in the best-fit. If a Translation is checked the corresponding axis translation
can be used in the best-fit. If check-boxes are not checked, then those rations or translations
cannot be used.

Delete/Delete All icons

Clicking the Delete icon will delete the current selected feature. Delete All will delete all the
features.

Error evaluation
When the “Bestfit” button is clicked, the interface changes to display an error evaluation.
The maximum error for each axis is shown as well as the feature label associated with the error.
The Best-Fit error is shown along with the label of the feature responsible for the largest error.

Click the green arrow on the right to return to the operation panel.

Least Squares Error indicators (LSE) show the new error compared to the initial error. The LSE
New value should be less than the LSE Orig value.

Iteration icon
Clicking the iteration icon will change the interface to define the iteration parameters. When
iteration is used, measurements will be re-analyzed and the coordinate system improved each
time until either the convergence value is satisfied or the defined number of iterations has been
met.

- 637 -
 Variable name
The variable is used to store the iteration convergence value. The variable should be a
REAL type variable. The variable can be dragged from the Variable database and
dropped onto the Var Name text-box.
Iteration label
RationalDMIS uses the Iterat label to create an iteration start point in the DMIS code.
Failure label
If the expected result cannot be met in the pre-defined number of iterations, then the
failure label will be used to exit the iteration.
Maximum iteration
The Max iter value is the maximum number of attempts to iterate to meet the expected
value. The Max iter text-box can contain an entered number or an integer variable can
be dragged from the Variables database to the Max iter text-box.
Convergence value
The convergence value is the difference between iterations. It is set by the Evaluation
type drop-down. If that value is met before the Max iteration value then the iteration is
a success. If the iteration value is not met before the max iterations, then the iteration
has failed.
Evaluation Type
The evaluation type drop-down has either Absolute value or Incremental value to
control how the difference in iteration values are compared. If Absolute is selected,
then the deviation from the measured value to the nominal value is used to assess the
deviation. Incremental looks at the difference between the current and the adjacent
single iteration to determine the deviation.
Enable Iterate
When checked the Enable iterate check-box will close the iteration parameter view and
return to the iteration return to the multi-point best-fit coordinate setup operations
panel. If Learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.

Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to

- 638 -
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.

- 639 -
Coordinate System - Merge Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Merge coordinate setup from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The merge coordinate setup operations panel

Merge coordinate will create a new coordinate system by transforming features from one
coordinate system to another coordinate system.

Cur Crd
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. Different coordinate
systems ca be dragged from the Coordinate system database and dropped onto the Cur Crd
text-box.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Transform CRD from

The transform CRD from text-box accepts the drag and drop of coordinate systems from the
Coordinate system database. The transform from CRD is the coordinate system that the features
to transform will transform from.

Transform CRD to
The transform CRD to text-box accepts the drag and drop of coordinate systems from the
Coordinate system database. The transform CRD to is the coordinate system that the features to
transform will transform to.

- 640 -
Features to be transformed list
The features to be transformed list accepts the drag and drop from the Feature database of all
features except the CAD model. The features in this list will be transformed from the Transform
CRD from to the Transform CRD to coordinate systems to create a new coordinate system.
There is a Nom Only check-box to the right of the dropped feature label. If Nom-only is checked
on, only the nominal will be transformed otherwise both the nominal and actual will be
transformed.

Delete/Delete All icons

Clicking the Delete icon will delete the current selected feature. Delete All will delete all the
features.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 641 -
Coordinate System - 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation Method II

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select 3-2-1 Method II from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The 3-2-1 Method II operations panel

The 3-2-1 Method II creates a full new coordinate system based on existing point reducible
features. 3 features for primary, 2 features for secondary and 1 feature for tertiary. A common
use is CAD alignment.

Nom CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. The current
coordinate system is the default, however different coordinate systems can be dragged and
dropped from the Coordinate database.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Feature input lists

There are two input lists and one input text-box. The 1st input list accepts a minimum of 3 drag
and drop of point reducible features from the Feature database to create the Primary (or level)
datum. The 2nd list accepts a minimum of 2 drag and drop of point reducible features from the
Feature database to create the Secondary (or align) datum. The Tertiary text-box accepts the drag
and drop of a single point reducible feature from the Feature database.
The 3 inputs combined create the familiar 3-2-1 coordinate system.

- 642 -
Use nominal relation
Normally used for CAD. If the Use nominal relation checkbox is checked on then the relationship
between nominal data and actual data of the dropped features will be used to create the
coordinate system.

Note: When Use nominal relationship is checked on and using CAD, selecting the proper
coordinate system is important. “Nom Crd” must be the coordinate system of the raw CAD model,
which is normally “MCS”.

Example of Use Nominal Relation checked on

In the image above, there are 3 spheres on the CAD model which we are going to use to create
our coordinate system. Extract the 3 nominal spheres from the CAD model (pick option: CAD
Geometry) and then measure those three nominal spheres on the part to create actuals.
With the 3 spheres at CAD nominal and measured on the part there is now a clearly defined
nom/act relationship. Drag all 3 spheres to the Primary list, SPH1 and SPH2 to the Secondary list
and SPH1 to the tertiary list as shown below.

When the coordinate system is created, after selecting “Set Model Alignment” the CAD model
should update to the correct position on the table.

- 643 -
An example of Use nominal relation off.

When use nominal relation is not checked the interface changes slightly to allow the selection of
axis direction. Select the desired axis direction from the axis direction drop-down above the
primary. Based on the primary selection, the available items in the secondary axis direction
drop-down will change. Select the desired axis direction for the secondary. When the coordinate
system is created, it will be created using the selected axis directions.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

CAUTION: The 3-2-1 coordinate system method II does not generate any DMIS code.

- 644 -
Coordinate System - Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select 3-2-1 Method II from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system operations panel

A typical quick 3-2-1 contains at least three points to create a primary leveling feature, 2 points to
create a secondary align feature and a single point to create an origin on the final axis.
Thus a 3-2-1, the points are selected in a fashion to control the 6 degrees of freedom and “lock”
the part in place.

From CRD
The From Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. As a new complete
coordinate system is being created from measured points, the From CRD can be ignored.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Graphics window
The red dot in the graphic represents the next point to be measured. After the point is measured,
the dot will change to green and the red dot will move to the next point until all points are
measured.
The coordinate trihedron can be rotated by clicking. Each click is another rotation.

- 645 -
Create feature
By default, the measurement points used to create the quick 3-2-1 are not stored database.
Check on Create feature to save the measured points to the Feature database. When create
feature is on and learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be generated and added to
the program.

XYZ Offsets
The X, Y and Z text-boxes allow the creation of a different origin than the one created with the
quick 3-2-1. A new value or an equation can by typed into the XYZ text-boxes.

Delete/Delete All icons

Clicking the Delete icon will delete the last measured point. Delete All will delete all the features.

3-2-1 pattern options

There are 4 types of 3-2-1 measurement patterns:
Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system: (default)

Quick 3-3-2 coordinate system

Quick 3-3-3 coordinate system:

Quick equant coordinate system:

- 646 -
Nominals Update
When Nominals Update is NOT checked, nominal features values will change with the coordinate
system. When Nominals Update is checked, the feature nominal will remain the same value as
the value in the From Crd.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 647 -
Coordinate System - CAD Aligned Coordinate System

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select CAD alignment from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The CAD alignment operations panel

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

CAD model
Drag the CAD model from the Feature database and drop onto the CAD Model text-box.

3 Features from CAD

Extract three nominal features from CAD, then drag them from the Feature database and drop
onto the 3 Features from CAD list.
The combinations of the 3 features can be:
plane—plane—plane
plane—line reducible feature—point reducible feature
plane—point reducible feature —point reducible feature

Point Count Display

RationalDMIS will automatically determine feature measurement completetion based
on number the number of measured points, vector, location etc.
Blue numbers mean measurements are still to be taken, red indicates the measurement
is complete.

- 648 -
Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd
When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

CAUTION: The 3-2-1 coordinate system method II does not generate any DMIS code.

- 649 -
Coordinate System - Iterative Alignment

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Iterative Alignment from the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Iterative alignment operations panel

The Iterative alignment will loop though a number of previously measured CAD features a
number of times to refine the alignment to a user defined convergence value.

Cur CRD
The Cur Crd text-box contains the name of the current coordinate system. As a new complete
coordinate system is being created from measured points, the Cur CRD can be ignored.

New coordinate system

The New Crd contains the label name for the new coordinate system.

Feature list
Point reducible features can be dragged and dropped from the Feature database to the feature
list. These dropped features will be used in the iterative alignment.

CAD Model
The CAD model can be dragged from the Feature database and dropped onto the CAD model
text-box. The CAD model is the nominal feature reference.

Max Iterations
Enter the maximum number of times to loop through the alignment setup before generating a
failure.

- 650 -
Convergence value
Enter the desired convergence value. If the convergence value is met before the max iterations
are exceeded, the alignment is successful.

Error indicators
Least Squares Error indicators
(LSE) show the new error
compared to the initial error.
The LSE New value should be
less than the LSE Orig value.

Iterate button
Clicking the iterate button will start the iteration sequence. Each entered point reducible feature
will be read against the CAD model and the coordinate system “jiggled” until the convergence
value is met, or the iteration meets the max iteration count and the iteration fails. Nothing is
re-measured during these iterations.

Preview | Add Crd | Add/Actve Crd

When all entries are satisfactory, the Preview, Add and Add/Active buttons will become enabled.
If the Preview button is clicked, a graphical preview of the coordinate system will be visible. This
button only generates a preview.
If the Add Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be added to
the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database but will NOT be activated as the current
coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be added to the
program.
If the Add/Active Crd button is pressed, the new coordinate system will be created and will be
added to the list of coordinate systems in the Coordinate database and will also become the
current active coordinate system. If learn mode is enabled, the appropriate DMIS code will be
added to the program.
If the buttons are disabled, at least one entry in the input text-boxes does not meet the
requirements for the new coordinate system.

- 651 -
Coordinate System - Coordinate System Mapping

Click “Coordinate” in the Operations toolbar

Select Coordinate mapping in the Coordinate System toolbar.

The Coordinate mapping operations panel

Coordinate mapping will not create another coordinate system, but will display the relationship
from one coordinate system to another in translation and rotation values.

Transfer coordinate system from

Drag the desired “start” coordinate system from the Coordinate system database and drop it onto
the Transfer CRD From text-box.

C. Transfer coordinate system to:

Drag the desired “end” coordinate system from the Coordinate system database and drop it onto
the Transfer CRD to text-box.

Conversion parameter boxes

The read-only conversion parameter boxes display the 3 rotation and 3 translations that occurred
between the “From” coordinate system to the “To” coordinate system.

Output button
The output button will send a report of the conversion parameter values to open report devices.
Mapping window of coordinate system supports rotation vector and translation vector to get
value, rotation value and translation value can be assigned to vector.

- 652 -
DMIS code:
VR=VALUE/D(CRD_FROM),D(CRD_TO),ROTATE
VT=VALUE D(CRD_FROM),D(CRD_TO),TRANS

- 653 -
Status Panel

The RationalDMIS status panel which displays the status of the software and hardware is located
on the lower right of the software interface.
The status panel is made up of a series of tabs. Each tab can be removed from the panel to
become a separate window. Click the downward pointing arrow on the upper right of the
removed tab to return it to the status panel.
The available tabs are:
Machine Position
DRO 1
DRO 2
Feature Watch
Measure
Setting
System Message

- 654 -
Status Panel - Position Control

The machine position tab of the Status panel is used to move the machine to specified locations
using different methods. If RationalDMIS is offline, the graphical machine will move in the same
manner as a real machine.
The machine can be moved a number of
ways:
Absolute Position
Relative Position
Vector Position
Virtual Joystick
Dragger move
Soft home

- 655 -
Status Panel - Position Control - Absolute Position

Absolute position will move the machine to the entered values in the current coordinate
system.
The X Pos, Y Pos and Z Pos input text-boxes
can accept: the drag and drop of a feature
from the Feature database, the drag and
drop of a REAL type variable from the
Variable database, the entry of typed values
or equations. All entries are in the current
units and the current coordinate system.

The refresh icon will read the current probe position and refresh the XYZ boxes with the
XYZ position values.

When working offline, the graphical machine will move. The resolution
text-box controls the speed of movement for the graphical machine. A
higher resolution value is a faster moving offline graphical machine.

Pressing the Preview button will flash a blue preview

sensor on the graphics view to preview the end results of the
move.

Pressing the Apply button will make the machine move

to the entered location.
If learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added
to the program.

- 656 -
Status Panel - Position Control - Relative Position

Relative position will move the machine by the entered X,Y and Z values from the current
probe location to the entered values in the current coordinate system

The X Increment, Y Increment and Z

Increment input text-boxes can accept: the
drag and drop of a feature from the Feature
database, the drag and drop of a REAL type
variable from the Variable database, the
entry of typed values or equations. All
entries are in the current units and the
current coordinate system.

When working offline, the graphical machine will move. The resolution
text-box controls the speed of movement for the graphical machine. A
higher resolution value is a faster moving offline graphical machine.

Pressing the Preview button will flash a blue preview

sensor on the graphics view to preview the end results of the
move.

Pressing the Apply button will make the machine move

to the entered location.
If learn mode is on, the appropriate DMIS code will be added
to the program.

- 657 -
Status Panel - Position Control - Vector Move

Vector move will move the machine along a specified vector by a specified value.

Vector
There are 3 vector type selections in the vector drop-down list.
Manual Input
Manual input will move along the vector information entered in the I,J, and K vector
text-boxes by the distance specified in the Distance input text box. The I,J,K input text-box
accept the drag and drop of a REAL type variable from the Variables database or the typed
entry of a value or equation.

Sensor Direction
If Sensor direction is selected, the machine will move along the current probe vector by the
distance specified in the Distance input text-box.

Picked Direction
Picked dir will move the machine along the vector of a picked feature or CAD entity in the
graphics view by the distance specified in the Distance input text-box.
Within the picked direction, there are 3 possible move option in the
Method drop-down list.

Dir Only
A Dir only move will move from the current probe location in the picked vector
direction by the specified distance.

Dir + Location
A Dir+location move will move from the projected location of the picked vector by the
specified distance.

Location
A Location move will move from the location of the picked vector by the specified
distance.

- 658 -
Status Panel - Position Control – Virtual Joystick

The virtual joystick is simulates joystick movement for offline programming.

Moving the joystick with the mouse cursor simulates real joystick movement offline.

The virtual joystick at rest.

Hold down the left mouse button while moving the joystick
to the left or right to move the machine to the left or right.
Hold down the left mouse button and move the joystick
frontwards or backwards to have the machine move
frontwards or backwards.

Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse up and down to
make the machine Z axis move up and down.

Axis Locks
There is an axis lock for each axis. If the check-box is checked on, the
corresponding axis is locked. Checked off, the axis can move.

Joystick Deflection Map

The joystick deflection map controls the direction of movement. The X axis motion can be
changed from right+ to right- or back + or back- by clicking on the icon until the desired
direction is shown. The Y axis can be changed in the same manner while keeping the X and Y axis
perpendicular

- 659 -
Joystick coordinate selector
A click on the joystick coordinate selector will toggle the selector between moving the
joystick per the machine coordinate system or moving the joystick per the part coordinate
system.

Move Machine
The move machine icon toggles back and forth between the graphical machine moving as
the joystick is actuated, or having a probe position preview move as the joystick is
actuated.

Reset Virtual Position and Move to Virtual Position

If the joystick is set to preview and the Reset Virtual Position is clicked the preview will
move to the probe’s current location.
If the joystick is set to preview and the Move to Virtual Position is clicked, the probe will
move to the location of the preview.

Record Virtual Position

If Learn mode is on, Record virtual position will write the appropriate DMIS code to move
to the current virtual probe position

- 660 -
Status Panel - Position Control - Dragger

The dragger allows positioning the machine via a work plane oriented dragger.

Clicking on the dragger icon will change the graphics view to include a dragger, similar to the
image below.

Hold the left mouse button while the cursor is in the light colored plane area and move the
cursor to the desired location. Dragging along the green cylinder will move the plane along the
green cylinder. The move location is where the green cylinder intersects the plane.

Dragger coordinate selector

A click on the dragger coordinate selector will toggle the selector between moving per the
machine coordinate system or moving per the part coordinate system.

Dragger Move probe vector

A click on the dragger move probe icon will toggle between the dragger just showing the
cylinder along the direction of the probe to move along the probe vector or the normal
plane oriented dragger.

- 661 -
Dragger work plane orientation
The plane of the dragger is always parallel to a working plane. To
change the working plane click one of the working plane icons.

Reset Virtual Position and Move to Virtual Position

If the Reset Virtual Position is clicked the preview will move to the probe’s current location.
If the Move to Virtual Position is clicked, the probe will move to the location of the
preview.

Record Virtual Position

If Learn mode is on, Record virtual position will write the appropriate DMIS code to move
to the current virtual probe position

- 662 -
Status Panel - Position Control - Soft Home

Set a secondary home location for the machine to go to.

Drive the machine to the desired soft home

location and click the Get Home button to get the
current XYZ values, or enter values for the soft
home location.
If the soft home location is satisfactory, press the
Set Home button to set the soft home location.
Anytime the Go Home button is clicked, the
machine will drive to the pre-set soft home
position. If Learn mode is enabled, the
appropriate DMIS code will be added to the program.

Ram
This is an option to GOHOME in reference to the Z Ram instead of Probe position
From/cart, x, y, z
From/cart, x, y, z, RAM
without minor word RAM indicates GOHOME reference to Probe. RAM indicates GOHOME
reference to Z Ram

- 663 -
Status Panel-Digital Read Out (DRO)

There are 2 DRO windows available. Each can be set to show different data.

Unlocked, the coordinate value in the display frame will refresh with the currently
activated coordinate system. Other coordinate systems can be dragged from the
Coordinate system database and dropped onto the coordinate system box in the DRO.

Locked, the DRO will always show the locked coordinate system and does not accept drag
and drop of different coordinate systems.

DRO 1 can be configured to display additional information through the drop-down

list at the top of the DRO. XYZ will display coordinate system information only.
XYZAB will display coordinate system information as well as probe A:B orientation.
AB will only display probe A:B orientation.

The decimal place drop-down list allows the selection of the number of decimal places
to show on the DRO.

- 664 -
Status Panel - Settings

The Settings tab controls machine behavior during DCC the measurement of features.

Approach/Retract Distances
The approach sets the distance away from the nominal
measure point that the machine slows to measurement
speed and is expecting the tough probe to contact a surface. Any surface contact before the
approach distance is considered a collision.
The retract distance is the distance the machine
automatically moves back away after it has measured a
point.
Depth
Depth is applied when measuring a feature
automatically. It is applied along the inverse of the vector
to generate points. For example: if a circle has been extracted of the top Z=0 face of a CAD model
the circle will have a Z value of 0 at the intersect of the plane and the cylinder used to create the
circle. This is difficult to measure at Z=0. A depth setting automatically moves those points down
by the depth value.

Clear Surface
A clear surface ensures the probe clears above the specified surface by the
clearance value. The Clear surface drop-down list has an “Off” selection to
disable clear surface. It also accepts the drag and drop of plane features.
If a plane feature is dropped, it automatically becomes the clearance surface
and will clear above (perpendicular to) the plane by the
specified clearance value.

The search distance is the distance beyond an expected

point measurement that the machine will move.
The search distance should be greater than the approach value.

Accepts the new settings and if Learn mode is on, generates the appropriate DMIS
code and add it to the program

- 665 -
Status Panel - Feature Watch

The Feature watch tab displays selected information on the last measured feature to facilitate
real-time monitoring of measurements.
Each selected item appears on a separate line. Yellow indicates the feature is within tolerance and
red indicates the feature is out of tolerance.
Supports CTRL+W shortcut to pop up feature watch window, and CTRL+W can regress feature
watch window to default position as well.

The feature label automatically updates with each feature measured.

The decimal place drop-down allows the selection of decimal places to display.

To change a reported parameter, hover the mouse over the

parameter name of the left side of the desired row. The
cursor will turn to a hand indicating a click can display a
menu containing parameters that can be directly monitored.

There is a 2nd format to watch features that provides more detailed. Drag the Feature Watch tab
out of the status panel so it can create it’s own
window. Grab either the right edge or the left
edge of the Feature Watch window and pull it left
or right to expand it. If the window does not
change to the window on the left, make sure the
Lock DRO icon is not locked.

- 666 -
Status Panel - Measure

The Measure interface provides 2 methods: straight line, arc.

The measure interface is intended as automatic point gathering for manual machines or portable
arms.
It is important that the Measurement Operation panel is showing the histogram view.
The measure panel will drive the machine to measure the points, the histogram view needs to be
open to accept the measured points.

Straight Line
The straight line measurement is established
along a move axis. A move amount can be
set to ignore points unless the measuring
device has moved by the set amount.
A measure axis can be established for probe
compensation.
Repeat times indicates the number of points
to measure.

Arc
The starting location is the current probe
position. Select the work plane from the
drop-down and enter the radius of the circle.
If the probe head supports scanning, both
touch and scanning will be available on the
Measure Type drop-down. Enter the number
of points to measure.

initial position of the measurement is the present location of measuring head; select the working
plane and the radius of the measured circle to define a circle, specify the number of measuring
points, create the measurement of a circle rapidly and automatically.

DCC execution stop watch

Start: when press GO button at DMIS toolbar;
End: when DMIS program finishes;
There are 3 execution time records, just like the interface of stopwatch below;
2 icons: left is to view in tree list of entire record, and right button is to reset record;

- 667 -
- 668 -
Status Panel - System Message

When an error message is generated, in

addition to going to the screen, the error
message is logged in the System Message tab.
Messages will accumulate during the
RationalDMIS session. The messages are
removed when RationalDMIS is closed.

Press the clear error button to clear an error.

Note: Some errors if not cleared right away such as some controller errors may
need to be cleared more than once as the software is continually polling for any errors.

Errors can be saved to a text file for later review.

- 669 -
Status Bar

The Status bar is located at the lower right of the RationalDMIS window. It provides some current
system status information as well as the ability to change some settings.

Set the length units.

These can be changed multiple times within the same session or program and
have no effect on any previous measurements.

Set the angular units.

Select either Cartesian coordinates or Polar coordinates in a given work plane.

The following Extended DMIS language is used to change CART|POL

DMESW/Comand,'CrdType/Cart'
DMESW/Comand,'CrdType/Pol'
wkplan/yzplan

Enable or disable automatic Path generation. Automatic path generation is used in teaching
programs. Every time the joystick changes direction a positional move is recorded in the DMIS
program.

Enable or disable probe compensation. This should be left on unless there is a specific need
to disable it. If you are experiencing measurement results that are out by a constant value,
check to make sure probe compensation is enabled.

Enable or disable FLY mode. Fly mode allows the machine to travel in a smooth are path
during a program or automatic measurement as opposed to a series of straight-line moves.
FLY mode can offer slightly faster measurement sequences. As FLY mode can introduce some
positioning error, FLY mode should be disabled when machine positioning is extremely critical or
in the measurement of extremely small circles.

- 670 -
Appendix

Definitions
Line reducible: A line reducible feature is any feature that be reduced to a line element.
Cone, Slot, Cylinder, Ellipse, Line

Point reducible: A point reducible feature is any feature that can be reduced down to a point
element.
Arc, circle, cone, slot, bound cylinder, edge point, ellipse, point

- 671 -